2008 G37 Coupe Owner's Manual Infiniti Owners

User Manual: 2008 Infiniti G37 Coupe Owners Manual Troubleshoot 2008 Infiniti G37 Coupe |

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 416 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2008 G37 Coupe Owner's Manual
- Owner's Manual - A
  - Table of Contents
- Owner's Manual - B

2008 G Coupe

Owner's Manual

Compare the VIN (vehicle identification number) information found on

your vehicle's VIN plate to the VIN information below to determine which

Owner's Manual applies to your vehicle. The VIN plate is located on top

of the instrument panel, on the driver's side of your vehicle.

If your vehicle's VIN is XXXXXXXXXXX106576 or lower:

Select Owner's Manual - A in the bookmarks panel on the left side of the screen.

If your vehicle's VIN is XXXXXXXXXXX106577 or higher:

Select Owner's Manual - B in the bookmarks panel on the left side of the screen.

Your INFINITI represents a new way of thinking

about vehicle design. It integrates advanced

engineering and superior craftsmanship with a

simple, refined aesthetic sensitivity associated

with traditional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxury and

beauty. The car itself is important, but so is the

sense of harmony that the vehicle evokes in its

driver, and the sense of satisfaction you feel

with the INFINITI — from the way it looks and

drives to the high level of dealer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the

fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s

Manual immediately. It explains all of the fea-

tures, controls and performance characteristics

of your INFINITI; it also provides important

instructions and safety information.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet is in-

cluded in your Owner’s literature portfolio. The

INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide ex-

plains details about maintaining and servicing

your vehicle. Always carry it with you when you

take your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer. The War-

ranty Information Booklet contents provide

complete information about all warranties cov-

ering this vehicle, the requirements to keep the

warranties in effect as well as the INFINITI Road-

side Assistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Care and

Lemon Law Information Booklet will explain how

to resolve any concerns you may have with your

vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your

state’s lemon law.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s

Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity

with controls and maintenance requirements,

assisting you in the safe operation of your

vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS

FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to help

ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and

your passengers!

●NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or

drugs.

●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and

never drive too fast for conditions.

●ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking

other actions that could distract you.

●ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate

child restraint systems. Pre-teen children

should be seated in the rear seat.

●ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to all

occupants of the vehicle.

●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for im-

portant safety information.

FOREWORD

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modifica-

tion could affect its performance, safety or

durability, and may even violate governmen-

tal regulations. In addition, damage or perfor-

mance problems resulting from modification

will not be covered under the INFINITI

warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options

available on this model. Therefore, you may find

some information that does not apply to your

vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations

in this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. INFINITI reserves the right to change

specifications or design at any time without

notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a haz-

ard that could cause death or serious personal

injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the proce-

dures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a haz-

ard that could cause minor or moderate per-

sonal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid

or reduce the risk, the procedures must be fol-

lowed carefully.

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not

do this” or “Do not let this happen” .

If you see a symbol similar to those above in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to the

front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above indicate movement or action.

SIC0697

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above call attention to an item in the

illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, and

certain vehicle components contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-

ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-

tained in vehicles and certain products of com-

ponent wear contain or emit chemicals known

to the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may

contain perchlorate material. The following advi-

sory is provided: “Perchlorate Material - special

handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

BLUETOOTHTis a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc., U.S.A. and licenced to

Xanavi Informatics

Corporation.

GracenoteTis a registered

trademark of Gracenote,

Inc. The Gracenote logo and

logo type, and the “Pow-

ered by Gracenote” logo are

trademarks of Gracenote.

may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system,

or transmitted in any form, or by any means,

electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or

otherwise, without the prior written permission of

Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

INFINITI CARES ...

Both INFINITI and your INFINITI dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your INFINITI dealer

are our primary concerns. Your INFINITI dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your

INFINITI dealer cannot assist you with or you

would like to provide INFINITI directly with

comments or questions, please contact our

(INFINITI’s) Consumer Affairs Department using

our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-662-6200

For Canadian customers

1-800-361-4792

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for

the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (on dash

panel)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your INFINITI dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to INFINITI with the information on

the left at:

For U.S. customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and thank you for buying a quality INFINITI vehicle.

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system (SRS) .....................................0-2

Exterior front......................................0-3

Sedan.........................................0-3

Coupe.........................................0-4

Exterior rear ...................................... 0-5

Sedan......................................... 0-5

Coupe.........................................0-6

Passenger compartment ........................... 0-7

Sedan......................................... 0-7

Coupe.........................................0-8

Cockpit...........................................0-9

Instrument panel ................................. 0-10

Meters and gauges ................................0-11

Engine compartment.............................. 0-12

VQ35HR/VQ37VHR engine ...................... 0-12

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P. 1-38)

2. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags (P. 1-38)

3. Seat belts (P. 1-11)

4. Head restraints (P. 1-9)

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bags (P. 1-38)

6. Child restraint anchor points (for top

tether strap child restraint) (P. 1-23)

7. Occupant classification sensor (pattern

sensor) (P. 1-44)

8. Front seats (P. 1-2)

9. Seat belts with pretensioners (P. 1-51)

10. Rear seat walk-in mechanism (Coupe)

(P. 1-6)

11. Rear seats (P. 1-7)

— Child restraints (P. 1-19)

12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-21)

SSI0341

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

SEDAN

1. Hood (P. 3-17)

2. Headlight and turn signal

— Operation (P. 2-31)

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-17)

— Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) (if

so equipped) (P. 2-34)

— Fog light (P. 2-37)

3. Windshield wiper and washer

— Operation (P. 2-29)

— Maintenance (P. 8-18)

4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

5. Power windows (P. 2-49)

6. Recovery hook (P. 6-14)

7. Tires

— Wheel and tires (P. 8-30, P. 9-9)

— Flat tire ( 6-2)

— Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(P. 2-14, P. 5-3)

8. Outside mirrors (P. 3-27)

9. Doors

— Keys (P. 3-2)

— Door locks (P. 3-4)

— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system (P. 3-14)

SSI0259

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

COUPE

1. Hood (P. 3-17)

2. Headlight and turn signal

— Operation (P. 2-31)

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-24)

— Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) (if

so equipped) (P. 2-34)

— Fog light (P. 2-37)

3. Windshield wiper and washer

— Operation (P. 2-29)

— Maintenance (P. 8-18)

4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

5. Power windows (P. 2-49)

6. Recovery hook (P. 6-14)

7. Tires

— Wheel and tires (P. 8-30, P. 9-9)

— Flat tire ( 6-2)

— Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(P. 2-14, P. 5-3)

8. Outside mirrors (P. 3-27)

9. Doors

— Keys (P. 3-2)

— Door locks (P. 3-4)

— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system (P. 3-14)

SSI0342

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

SEDAN

1. High-mounted stop light (model with a

rear spoiler) (Bulb replacement)

(P. 8-24)

2. High-mounted stop light (model without a

rear spoiler) (Bulb replacement) (P. 8-24)

3. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-31)

4. Rear combination light (Bulb replace-

ment) (P. 8-24)

5. Satellite antenna

(P. 4-30)

6. Fuel-filler door

— Operation (P. 3-21)

— Fuel recommendation (P. 9-4)

7. Rear view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-19)

8. Trunk

— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system (P. 3-14)

— Trunk lid (P. 3-17)

9. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-6)

SSI0260

EXTERIOR REAR

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

COUPE

1. High-mounted stop light (model with a

rear spoiler) (Bulb replacement)

(P. 8-24)

2. High-mounted stop light (model without a

rear spoiler) (Bulb replacement) (P. 8-24)

3. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-31)

4. Satellite antenna (P. 4-30)

5. Rear view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-19)

6. Trunk

— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system (P. 3-14)

— Trunk lid (P. 3-17)

7. Rear combination light (Bulb replacement)

(P. 8-17)

8. Fuel-filler door

— Operation (P. 3-21)

— Fuel recommendation (P. 9-4)

SSI0338

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

SEDAN

1. Coat hooks (P. 2-48)

2. Rear personal light (P. 2-54)

3. Power windows (P. 2-49)

4. Outside mirror remote control switch

(P. 3-27)

5. Automatic drive positioner switch (if so

equipped) (P. 3-28)

6. Sun visors (P. 3-25)

7. Moonroof switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-52)

8. Map light (P. 2-54)

9. Sunglasses holder (P. 2-44)

10. Inside rearview mirror

— Operation (P. 3-25)

— HomeLinkT(if so equipped) (P. 2-56)

— Compass (if so equipped) (P. 2-8)

11. Trunk pass-through/Rear armrest

(P. 1-10)

12. Rear cup holders (P. 2-42)

13. Console box

— Power outlet (P. 2-40)

— Auxiliary input jacks (P. 4-56)

— INFINITI iPodTInterface System (if so

equipped) (P. 4-44)

14. Front cup holders (P. 2-42)

SSI0346

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

COUPE

1. Coat hooks (P. 2-48)

2. Power windows (P. 2-49)

3. Outside mirror remote control switch

(P. 3-27)

4. Automatic drive positioner switch (if so

equipped) (P. 3-28)

5. Sun visors (P. 3-25)

6. Moonroof switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-52)

7. Map light (P. 2-54)

8. Sunglasses holder (P. 2-44)

9. Inside rearview mirror

— Operation (P. 3-25)

— HomeLinkT(if so equipped) (P. 2-56)

— Compass (if so equipped) (P. 2-8)

10. Rear cup holders (P. 2-42)

11. Console box

— Power outlet (P. 2-40)

— Auxiliary input jacks (P. 4-56)

— INFINITI iPodTInterface System (if so

equipped) (P. 4-44)

12. Front cup holders (P. 2-42)

SSI0339

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P. 5-49)

2. Trunk lid release switch (P. 3-18)

3. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-34)

4. Instrument brightness control switch

(P. 2-36)

5. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer

(P. 2-5)

6. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

(P. 2-31)

7. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P. 5-13)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(Left side)

— ENTER or tuning switch (P. 4-54)

— BACK switch (P. 4-54)

— TALK switch (if so equipped) (P. 4-78) /

Phone switch (if so equipped) (P. 4-57)

— Volume control switches (P. 4-54)

— Source select switch (P. 4-54)

9. Trip computer switch (P. 2-24)

10. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-29)

11. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(Right side)

— Cruise control switches (P. 5-17)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-19)

12. Hood release handle (P. 3-17)

13. Intelligent Key port (P. 5-8)

14. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel

lever (if so equipped) (P. 3-23)

15. Manual tilting/telescopic steering wheel

lever (if so equipped) (P. 3-23)

16. Steering wheel

— Horn (P. 2-38)

— Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-38)

SSI0262

COCKPIT

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

1. Side ventilator (P. 4-22)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

3. Center ventilator (P. 4-22)

4. Audio system (P. 4-29)

5. Clock (P. 2-40)

6. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system* (if so equipped)

— Vehicle information and setting buttons

(P. 4-7)

— BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System

(if so equipped) (P. 4-57)

— Audio system (P. 4-29)

7. Center display (P. 4-2)/Navigation

system* (if so equipped)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-37)

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-38)

10. Fuse box cover (P. 8-20)

11. Parking brake (for Automatic Transmis-

sion models)

— Parking (P. 5-16)

12. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-6)

13. Automatic climate control system

(P. 4-23)

14. Cigarette lighter and ashtrays (P. 2-41)

15. Parking brake (for Manual Transmission

models)

— Parking (P. 5-16)

16. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-38)

17. SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-39)

18. CompactFlash card slot (if so equipped)

(P. 4-42)

19. Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defogger switch (P. 2-31)

20. Glove box lid release handle (P. 2-44)

SSI0363

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

21. Trunk release power cancel switch

(P. 3-19)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

1. Tachometer (P. 2-6)

2. Warning/Indicator lights (P. 2-11)

3. Speedometer (P. 2-5)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

(P. 2-6)

5. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/

Odometer/twin trip odometer (P. 2-19)

6. Fuel gauge (P. 2-7)

SSI0264

METERS AND GAUGES

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

VQ35HR/VQ37VHR ENGINE

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P. 8-20)

2. Battery (P. 8-14)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Transmis-

sion models) (P. 8-12)

6. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

8. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)

9. Radiator filler cap (P. 8-8)

10. Drive belts (P. 8-16)

11. Coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

12. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

SSI0345

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system

Seats .............................................1-2

Front seats .....................................1-2

Rear seats ......................................1-7

Front-seat Active Head Restraints .................1-9

Armrest (if so equipped) ........................1-10

Seat belts ........................................1-11

Precautions on seat belt usage ..................1-11

Child safety....................................1-14

Pregnant women ...............................1-15

Injured persons ................................1-15

Pre-crash seat belts (front seats) (if so

equipped) .....................................1-15

Three-point type seat belt.......................1-15

Seat belt extenders.............................1-19

Seat belt maintenance..........................1-19

Child restraints ...................................1-19

Precautions on child restraints ................. 1-20

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

system (LATCH) ................................1-21

Top tether strap child restraint ................. 1-23

Child restraint installation using LATCH ......... 1-24

Child restraint installation using the seat

belts ......................................... 1-28

Booster seats .................................... 1-34

Precautions on booster seats................... 1-34

Booster seat installation ....................... 1-36

Supplemental restraint system .................... 1-38

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................................... 1-38

INFINITI advanced air bag system (front

seats) ........................................ 1-44

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-mounted

curtain side-impact supplemental air bag

system ....................................... 1-49

Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) .......1-51

Supplemental air bag warning labels ............1-52

Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-53

Repair and replacement procedure...............1-53

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

WARNING

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.

The shoulder belt will not be against your

body. In an accident, you could be thrown

into it and receive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when the

vehicle is in motion, the seat should be up-

right. Always sit well back in the seat with

both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt

properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to

make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate

switches or controls. Unattended children

could become involved in serious accidents.

FRONT SEATS

Front power seat adjustment

Operating tips

●The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,

then reactivate the switch.

●Do not operate the power seat switch for a

long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

See “FRONT SEATS” in the “3. Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section for the seat

position memory function.

SSS0133

SEATS

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Forward and backward

Moving the switch s

1forward or backward will

slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch s

2backward until the

desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch s

2forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback

can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when

the vehicle is parked. Seat lifter

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

down to adjust the angle of the front portion or

height of the seat.

SSS0682 SSS0673

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Lumbar support (if so equipped)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back

support to the driver.

Type A

Push the front s

1or back s

2end of the switch

to adjust the seatback lumbar area.

Type B

Move the lever s

1up or down to adjust the

seatback lumbar area.

Side support (if so equipped)

The side support feature provides thigh and

torso supports. Push the switch inside s

1or

outside s

2to adjust the thigh area. Push the

switch inside s

3or outside s

4to adjust the

torso area.

Type A

SSS0707

Type B

SSS0684 SSS0685

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

Thigh extension (if so equipped)

The front portion of the front seats can be

extended forward for seating comfort. Pull up

and hold the lever s

1to extend the front

portion to the desired position.

Passenger’s seat slide (if so equipped)

Pushing the passenger’s seat slide switch will

slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position.

SSS0686 SSS0806

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

Walk-in mechanism (Coupe)

This feature makes it easier to get in and out of

the rear seat. Use the following procedure when

getting in and out of the rear seat.

If the sun visor is used, close it to the original

position before operating the walk-in feature.

1. Pull the seatback lever upward

to fold

the front seatback down. Make sure that

the front seatback is completely folded

down.

2. To slide the front seat forward, firmly

push the seatback switch

. The front

seat will move forward.

3. Get in or out of the vehicle.

4. To return the front seat to its original

position, raise the seatback and push the

seatback switch

again.

●To stop the seat sliding, push the seatback

switch s

2again or push the seat sliding

switch.

●The front passenger seat will stop returning

7.0 in (177.6 mm) from its front-most posi-

tion to retain space for the rear passenger.

●Depending on the seat position, the head

restraint may contact the roof headlining

during the walk-in operation. To prevent

possible interference, lower the seat using

the seat lifter switch.

CAUTION

●When returning the seat to its original posi-

tion, confirm the seat and seatback are

locked properly.

●Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot or

bump your head when operating the walk-in

seat.

●While operating the walk-in seat, do not op-

erate the seatback reclining switch. The re-

clining motor may be damaged.

●Do not place any objects near the seatback

of the front seats. They may be pinched and

damaged.

The automatic forwarding and reversing will not

work or stop under the following conditions:

●When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7

km/h) (driver’s seat only).

●When the seat belt is fastened.

●When the selector lever is not in the P (Park)

position (Automatic Transmission model’s

driver’s seat) or the parking brake is not

applied (Manual Transmission model’s driv-

er’s seat).

●When the door is closed (automatic forward-

ing only).

SSS0786

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●While the automatic drive positioner oper-

ates.

●When the automatic drive positioner

switches are pushed.

●When the seatback switch is pushed.

●When the seat position is adjusted.

Note that the seat must be moved to the

front-most position by operating the walk-in

function or the seat adjusting switches after the

battery is disconnected. Otherwise, the seat will

not move backward during the walk-in function.

REAR SEATS

Folding (Coupe only)

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area

or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down

position. Use of these areas by passengers

without proper restraints could result in se-

rious injury in an accident or sudden stop.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or shift-

ing. Do not place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision, unse-

cured cargo could cause personal injury.

●When returning the seatbacks to the upright

position, be certain they are completely se-

cured in the latched position. If they are not

completely secured, passengers may be in-

jured in an accident or sudden stop.

●Closely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from playing

and becoming locked in the trunk where they

could be seriously injured. Keep the car

locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid

securely latched when not in use, and pre-

vent children’s access to car keys.

The rear seatback can be folded according to

the following procedure.

To fold from the trunk

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Pull the handle

located on the left side

of the trunk. The rear seatback will be

unlatched.

SSS0220A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

3. Fold the rear seatback down

To fold from the rear seat

1. Pull the strap

located at the center

bottom of the seatback sideways. The rear

seatback will be unlatched.

2. Fold the rear seatback down

To return the seatback

1. Fold up the rear seatback.

2. Securely lock the seatback in position.

SSS0219A SPA2122 SSS0805

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

HEAD RESTRAINT

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted properly as

they may provide significant protection against

injury in an accident. Do not remove them.

Check the adjustment after someone else uses

the seat.

Adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower, push and hold the lock knob s

1and

push the head restraint down.

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level

with the center of your ears.

SSS0288 SSS0287

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

●Always adjust the head restraints properly

as specified in the previous section. Failure

to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the

active head restraint.

●Active head restraints are designed to

supplement other safety systems. Always

wear seat belts. No system can prevent all

injuries in any accident.

●Do not attach anything to the head restraint

stalks. Doing so could impair active head

restraint function.

The active head restraint moves forward utiliz-

ing the force that the seatback receives from

the occupant in a rear-end collision. The move-

ment of the head restraint helps support the

occupant’s head by reducing its backward

movement and helping absorb some of the

forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for collisions

at low to medium speeds in which it is said that

whiplash injury occurs most.

Active head restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints as

described in the previous section.

ARMREST (if so equipped)

Rear armrest

Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

SSS0508 SSS0678

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

Trunk pass-through

The rear center seatback can be folded to allow

trunk access from inside of the vehicle.

To access the trunk, pull down the rear center

armrest and pull out the trunk pass-through lid

To lock the lid, use the mechanical key and turn

it to the LOCK position s

2. To unlock, turn the

mechanical key to the UNLOCK position s

3. For

the mechanical key usage, see “KEYS” in the “3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

Make sure that the mechanical key is removed

from the trunk pass-through lid key cylinder

before opening or closing the lid. Otherwise the

lid and the rear armrest may be damaged.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well

back in your seat with both feet on the floor,

your chances of being injured or killed in an

accident and/or the severity of injury may be

greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encourages

you and all of your passengers to buckle up

every time you drive, even if your seating

position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or ter-

ritories specify that seat belts be worn at all

times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0677

SEAT BELTS

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this ve-

hicle should use a seat belt at all times. Chil-

dren should be properly restrained in the

rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child

restraint.

●The seat belt should be properly adjusted to

a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the

effectiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of injury

in an accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

●Always route the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never run

the belt behind your back, under your arm or

across your neck. The belt should be away

from your face and neck, but not falling off

your shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST.

A lap belt worn too high could increase the

risk of internal injuries in an accident.

●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fas-

tened to the proper buckle.

●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

SSS0136A

SSS0134A

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

●Do not allow more than one person to use the

same seat belt.

●Never carry more people in the vehicle than

there are seat belts.

●If the seat belt warning light glows continu-

ously while the ignition is turned ON with all

doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it

may indicate a malfunction in the system.

Have the system checked by an INFINITI

dealer.

●Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated,

it cannot be reused and must be replaced

together with the retractor. See an INFINITI

dealer.

●Removal and installation of pretensioner

system components should be done by an

INFINITI dealer.

●All seat belt assemblies, including retractors

and attaching hardware, should be in-

spected after any collision by an INFINITI

dealer. INFINITI recommends that all seat

belt assemblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was minor and

the belts show no damage and continue to

operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during a col-

lision should also be inspected and replaced

if either damage or improper operation is

noted.

●All child restraints and attaching hardware

should be inspected after any collision. Al-

ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-

spection instructions and replacement rec-

ommendations. The child restraints should

be replaced if they are damaged.

SSS0016

SSS0014

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them. They

need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available

from many other sources, including doctors,

teachers, government traffic safety offices, and

community organizations. Every child is differ-

ent, so be sure to learn the best way to trans-

port your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

●Rear facing child restraint

●Front facing child restraint

●Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and

less than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear

facing child restraints. Front facing child re-

straints are available for children who outgrow

rear facing child restraints and are at least 1

year old. Booster seats are used to help posi-

tion a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who

can no longer use a front facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protection.

The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them prop-

erly. The shoulder belt may come too close to

the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over

their small hip bones. In an accident, an im-

properly fitting seat belt could cause serious or

fatal injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-

tories require the use of approved child re-

straints for infants and small children. (See

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.)

Also, there are other types of child restraints

available for larger children for additional pro-

tection.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens and chil-

dren be restrained in the rear seat. According to

accident statistics, children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in the

front seat.

This is especially important because your ve-

hicle has a supplemental restraint system (air

bag system) for the front passenger. (See

“SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” later in

this section.)

Infants

Infants up to at least one year old should be

placed in a rear facing child restraint. INFINITI

recommends that infants be placed in child

restraints that comply with Federal Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint which fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instructions for

installation and use.

Small children

Children that are over one year old and weigh at

least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placed in a forward

facing child restraint. Refer to the manufactur-

er’s instructions for minimum and maximum

weight and height recommendations. INFINITI

recommends that small children be placed in

child restraints that comply with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and always

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for in-

stallation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraints

should be seated and restrained by the seat

belts which are provided. The seat belt may not

fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg)

and 80 lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be

used to obtain proper seat belt fit.

INFINITI recommends that a child be placed in a

commercially available booster seat if the

shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits

close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of

the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The

booster seat should raise the child so that the

shoulder belt is properly positioned across the

top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap

belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only

be used in seating positions that have a three-

point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit

the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that

it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. Once the child has grown so the

shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face

and neck, use the shoulder belt without the

booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and

do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the

vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as

possible around the hips, not the waist, and

place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and

across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder

belt over your abdominal area. Contact your

doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured persons use

seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with

your doctor for specific recommendations.

PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS (front seats)

(if so equipped)

The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seat belt to

help restrain front seat occupants under emer-

gency braking. This can help reduce the risk of

injury when a collision occurs.

Pre-crash seat belt will not be activated when:

●the brake pedal is not depressed

●the seat belt is not fastened

●the selector lever is in the reverse position

●the vehicle speed is under 10 MPH (15 km/h)

Always wear your seat belt correctly and sit

upright and well back.

If the seat belt warning light blinks even if the

driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts are

fastened, it may indicate the pre-crash seat belt

system has a malfunction. Have your INFINITI

dealer check and repair the system.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this ve-

hicle should use a seat belt at all times.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.

The shoulder belt will not be against your

body. In an accident, you could be thrown

into it and receive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when the

vehicle is in motion, the seat should be up-

right. Always sit well back in the seat with

both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt

properly.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in

this section.)

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac-

tor and insert the tongue into the buckle

until you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock during a

sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling mo-

tion permits the belt to move, and allows you

some freedom of movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully

retracted position, firmly pull the belt and

release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure

the shoulder belt is routed over your

shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and rear seating po-

sitions three-point seat belts have two modes of

operation:

●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

allows the seat belt to extend and retract to

allow the driver and passengers some freedom

of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat

belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for

child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt is fully retracted. For addi-

tional information, see “CHILD RESTRAINTS”

later in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for child

restraint installation. During normal seat belt

use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be

activated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-

fortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain that

seatbacks are completely secured in the

latched position. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

SSS0292 SSS0290

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on

the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat

belt movement by two separate methods:

●When the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

●When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check

or if you have any question about seat belt

operation, see an INFINITI dealer.

Center of rear seat (Sedan)

Selecting correct set of seat belts

The center seat belt buckle is identified by the

CENTER mark s

A. The center seat belt tongue

can be fastened only into the center seat belt

buckle.

SSS0326 SSS0687

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Shoulder belt height adjustment (for

Sedan front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. (See

“PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE” earlier in

this section.)

To adjust, push the button s

A, and then move

the shoulder belt anchor to the desired posi-

tion, so that the belt passes over the center of

the shoulder. The belt should be away from

your face and neck, but not falling off of your

shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock

the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

●After adjustment, release the adjustment

button and try to move the shoulder belt

anchor up and down to make sure it is se-

curely fixed in position.

●The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. Failure

to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an accident.

Shoulder belt arm (for Coupe front

seats)

Before fastening the seat belt, pull the shoulder

belt arm forward until it clicks at the lock

position.

Pulling the arm forward will allow an easy

access to the belt.

SSS0294A SSS0588

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender is available that is

compatible with the installed seat belts. The

extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of

length and may be used for either the driver or

front passenger seating position. See an

INFINITI dealer for assistance if the extender is

required.

WARNING

●Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made by

the same company which made the original

equipment seat belts, should be used with

the INFINITI seat belts.

●Adults and children who can use the stan-

dard seat belt should not use an extender.

Such unnecessary use could result in seri-

ous personal injury in the event of an

accident.

●Never use seat belt extenders to install child

restraints. If the child restraint is not se-

cured properly, the child could be seriously

injured in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

●To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a mild

soap solution or any solution recommended

for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then,

wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to

dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts

to retract until they are completely dry.

●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of

the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may

retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide

with a clean, dry cloth.

●Periodically check to see that the seat belt

and the metal components such as buckles,

tongues, retractors, flexible wires and an-

chors work properly. If loose parts, deterio-

ration, cuts or other damage on the webbing

is found, the entire seat belt assembly

should be replaced.

SSS0099

SSS0100

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

●Infants and small children should always be

placed in an appropriate child restraint

while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a

child restraint can result in serious injury or

death.

●Infants and small children should never be

carried on your lap. It is not possible for even

the strongest adult to resist the forces of a

severe accident. The child could be crushed

between the adult and parts of the vehicle.

Also, do not put the same seat belt around

both your child and yourself.

●Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, never install a rear-facing child re-

straint in the front seat. An inflating front air

bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A

rear-facing child restraint must only be used

in the rear seat.

●INFINITI recommends that the child restraint

be installed in the rear seat. According to

accident statistics, children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat. If you must install a front

facing child restraint in the front seat, see

“CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS” later in this section.

●Improper use or improper installation of a

child restraint can increase the risk or sever-

ity of injury for both the child and other oc-

cupants of the vehicle and can lead to seri-

ous injury or death in an accident.

●Follow all of the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions for installation and use.

When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to

select one which will fit your child and ve-

hicle. It may not be possible to properly in-

stall some types of child restraints in your

vehicle.

●If the child restraint is not anchored prop-

erly, the risk of a child being injured in a

collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.

●Child restraint anchor points are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by cor-

rectly fitted child restraints. Under no cir-

cumstances are they to be used for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

●Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned

to fit the child restraint, but as upright as

possible.

●After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the seat near the

LATCH attachment or by the seat belt path.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if the

belt holds the restraint in place. The child

restraint should not move more than 1 in (25

mm). If the restraint is not secure, tighten

the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

●When your child restraint is not in use, keep

it secured with the LATCH System or a seat

belt to prevent it from being thrown around

in case of a sudden stop or accident.

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in a closed

vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing your child in

the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System

or LATCH. Some child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to these lower anchors. For de-

tails, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-

dren SYSTEM (LATCH)” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

(See “CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS” later in this section.) In gen-

eral, child restraints are also designed to be

installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder

seat belt.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and small children of various sizes.

When selecting any child restraint, keep the

following points in mind:

●Choose only a restraint with a label certify-

ing that it complies with Federal Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

●If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-

ries require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint at all

times while the vehicle is being operated.

LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERS FOR

CHILDREN SYSTEM (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compatible

child restraints. This system may also be re-

ferred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible

system. With this system, you do not have to

use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child

restraint.

LATCH label location (Sedan)

SSS0710

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

The LATCH anchor points are provided to install

child restraints in the rear outboard seating

positions only. Do not attempt to install a child

restraint in the center position using the LATCH

anchors.

LATCH lower anchor point locations

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the

seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH anchors.

WARNING

●Attach LATCH compatible child restraints

only at the locations shown in the illustra-

tion. If a child restraint is not secured prop-

erly, your child could be seriously injured or

killed in an accident.

●Do not secure a child restraint in the center

rear seating position using the LATCH an-

chors. The child restraint will not be secured

properly.

●Child restraint anchor points are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by cor-

rectly fitted child restraints. Under no cir-

cumstance are they to be used for adult seat

belts or harnesses.

LATCH label location (Coupe)

SSS0370B

LATCH lower anchor location (Sedan)

SSS0637

LATCH lower anchor location (Coupe)

SSS0670

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

Installing child restraint LATCH

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this

system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint. Check your

child restraint for a label stating that it is

compatible with LATCH. This information may

also be in the instructions provided by the child

restraint manufacturer.

LATCH child restraints generally require the use

of a top tether strap. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP

CHILD RESTRAINT” later in this section for in-

stallation instructions.)

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint. (See

“CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH”

later in this section.)

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT

If the manufacturer of your child restraint re-

quires the use of a top tether strap, it must be

secured to an anchor point.

WARNING

Child restraint anchor points are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by cor-

rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used for adult seat belts

or harnesses.

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

SSS0643

LATCH rigid attachment

SSS0644

Sedan

SSS0791

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear parcel

shelf.

Installing top tether strap

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

system (rear bench outboard seating positions

only) or the seat belt.

Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor point

which is located directly behind the child seat.

Position the top tether strap over the top of the

seatback and secure it to the tether anchor

bracket that provides the straightest installa-

tion. Tighten the strap according to the manu-

facturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

If you have any questions when installing a top

tether strap child restraint on the rear seat, con-

sult your INFINITI dealer for details.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING LATCH

WARNING

●Attach LATCH compatible child restraints

only at the locations shown. For the LATCH

lower anchor locations, see “Lower Anchors

and Tethers for CHildren SYSTEM (LATCH)”

earlier in this section. If a child restraint is

not secured properly, your child could be

seriously injured or killed in an accident.

●The LATCH anchors are designed to with-

stand only those loads imposed by correctly

fitted child restraints. Under no circum-

stance are they to be used for adult seat

belts or harnesses.

●Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your

fingers into the lower anchor area and feel-

ing to make sure there are no obstructions

over the LATCH anchors, such as seat belt

webbing or seat cushion material. The child

restraint will not be secured properly if the

LATCH anchors are obstructed.

Coupe

SSS0790

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing child

restraint using LATCH:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is

properly attached to the lower anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback. If

the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint and it is inter-

fering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing mounted attachments, remove

any additional slack from the anchor at-

tachments. Press downward and rearward

firmly in the center of the child restraint

with your knee to compress the vehicle

seat cushion and seatback while tighten-

ing the webbing of the anchor attach-

ments.

5. If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether strap

and secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP

CHILD RESTRAINT” earlier in this section.)

Front facing — step 2

SSS0645

Front facing — step 2

SSS0646

Front facing — step 4

SSS0647

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

6. Before placing the child in the child re-

straint, hold child restraint near the

LATCH attachment and use force to push

the child restraint from side to side, and

tug it forward to make sure that it is

securely held in place. It should not move

more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move

more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the

anchor attachments to further tighten the

child restraint. If you are unable to prop-

erly secure the restraint, move the re-

straint to another seating position and try

again, or try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3

through 6.

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using LATCH:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

Front facing — step 6

SSS0638

Rear facing — step 2

SSS0648

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is

properly attached to the lower anchor.

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing mounted attachments, remove

any additional slack from the anchor at-

tachments. Press downward and rearward

firmly in the center of the child restraint

with your hand to compress the vehicle

seat cushion and seatback while tighten-

ing the webbing of the anchor attach-

ments.

4. Before placing the child in the child re-

straint, hold the child restraint near the

LATCH attachment and use force to push

the child restraint from side to side, and

tug it forward to make sure that it is

securely held in place. It should not move

more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move

more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the

anchor attachments to further tighten the

child restraint. If you are unable to prop-

erly secure the restraint, move the re-

straint to another seating position and try

again, or try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

Rear facing — step 2

SSS0649

Rear facing — step 3

SSS0639

Rear facing — step 4

SSS0650

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3

through 4.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

●Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, never install a rear-facing child re-

straint in the front passenger seat. Front air

bags inflate with great force. A rear-facing

child restraint could be struck by the front air

bag in a crash and could seriously injure or

kill your child.

●INFINITI recommends that child restraints be

installed in the rear seat. However, if you

must install a forward facing child restraint

in the front passenger seat, move the pas-

senger seat to the rearmost position. Also,

be sure the front passenger air bag status

light is illuminated to indicate the passenger

air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air bag

and status light” later in this section for

details.

●The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is

equipped with an Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) which must be used when installing

a child restraint.

●Failure to use the ALR will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The re-

straint could tip over or otherwise be unse-

cured and cause injury to the child in a sud-

den stop or collision.

●A child restraint with a top tether strap

should not be used in the front passenger

seat.

The instructions in this section apply to child

restraint installation using the vehicle seat

belts in the rear seat or the front passenger

seat.

SSS0100

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear

seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in the

front seat, it should be placed in a front-

facing direction only. Move the seat to the

rearmost position. Child restraints for in-

fants must be used in the rear-facing direc-

tion and therefore must not be used in the

front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the seatback. If necessary,

adjust or remove the head restraint (front

passenger seat only) to obtain the correct

child restraint fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINT”

earlier in this section.)

If the head restraint is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to install the head

restraint when the child restraint is re-

moved. If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint and it is inter-

fering with the proper child restraint fit, try

another seating position or a different child

restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the buckle

until you hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

Front facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

SSS0640

Front facing — step 3

SSS0360B

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt re-

tractor is in the Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor

(ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully

retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack in

the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rearward

firmly in the center of the child restraint

with your knee to compress the vehicle

seat cushion and seatback while pulling

up on the seat belt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether strap

and secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point (rear seat installation only).

(See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE-

STRAINT” earlier in this section.) Do not

install child restraints equipped with a

top tether strap to seating positions that

do not have a top tether anchor.

Front facing — step 4

SSS0651

Front facing — step 5

SSS0652

Front facing — step 6

SSS0653

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

8. Before placing the child in the child re-

straint, hold the child restraint near the

seat belt path and use force to push the

child restraint from side to side, and tug it

forward to make sure that it is securely

held in place. It should not move more

than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move more

than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the

shoulder belt to further tighten the child

restraint. If you are unable to properly

secure the restraint, move the restraint to

another seating position and try again, or

try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR

mode by trying to pull more seat belt out

of the retractor. If you cannot pull any

more belt webbing out of the retractor,

the retractor is in the ALR mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 8.

11. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, push the ignition

switch to the ON position. The front pas-

senger air bag status light should

illuminate. If this light is not illuminated,

see “Front passenger air bag and status

light” later in this section. Move the child

restraint to another seating position.

Have the system checked by an INFINITI

dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child

restraint mode) is canceled.

Front facing — step 8

SSS0641

Front facing — step 11

SSS0676

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear

seat:

1. Child restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and therefore

must not be used in the front seat. Position

the child restraint on the seat. Always

follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the buckle

until you hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt re-

tractor is in the Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor

(ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully

retracted.

SSS0100

Rear facing — step 2

SSS0654

Rear facing — step 3

SSS0655

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack in

the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the

child restraint; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your hand to compress the

vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

pulling up on the seat belt.

6. Before placing the child in the child re-

straint, hold the child restraint near the

seat belt path and use force to push the

child restraint from side to side, and tug it

forward to make sure that it is securely

held in place. It should not move more

than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move more

than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the

shoulder belt to further tighten the child

restraint. If you are unable to properly

secure the restraint, move the restraint to

another rear seating position and try

again, or try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types of

vehicles.

Rear facing — step 4

SSS0656

Rear facing — step 5

SSS0657

Rear facing — step 6

SSS0658

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR

mode by trying to pull more seat belt out

of the retractor. If you cannot pull any

more seat belt webbing out of the retrac-

tor, the retractor is in the ALR mode.

8. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps

3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode) is canceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS

WARNING

●Infants and small children should always be

placed in an appropriate child restraint

while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a

child restraint or booster seat can result in

serious injury or death.

●Infants and small children should never be

carried on your lap. It is not possible for even

the strongest adult to resist the forces of a

severe accident. The child could be crushed

between the adult and parts of the vehicle.

Also, do not put the same seat belt around

both your child and yourself.

●INFINITI recommends that the booster seat

be installed in the rear seat. According to

accident statistics, children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat. If you must install a booster

seat in the front seat, see “BOOSTER SEAT

INSTALLATION” later in this section.

●A booster seat must only be installed in a

seating position that has a lap/shoulder

belt. Failure to use a three-point type seat

belt with a booster seat can result in a seri-

ous injury in sudden stop or collision.

●Improper use or improper installation of a

booster seat can increase the risk or severity

of injury for both the child and other occu-

pants of the vehicle and can lead to serious

injury or death in an accident.

●Do not use towels, books, pillows or other

items in place of a booster seat. Items such

as these may move during normal driving or

a collision and result in serious injury or

death. Booster seats are designed to be

used with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats

are designed to properly route the lap and

shoulder portions of the seat belt over the

strongest portions of a child’s body to pro-

vide the maximum protection during a

collision.

SSS0099

BOOSTER SEATS

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Follow all of the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use. When

purchasing a booster seat, be sure to select

one which will fit your child and vehicle. It

may not be possible to properly install some

types of booster seats in your vehicle.

●If the booster seat and seat belt is not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured in a

collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.

●Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned

to fit the booster seat, but as up- right as

possible.

●After placing the child in the booster seat

and fastening the seat belt, make sure the

shoulder portion of the belt is away from the

child’s face and neck and the lap portion of

the belt does not cross the abdomen.

●Do not put the shoulder belt behind the child

or under the child’s arm. If you must install a

booster seat in the front seat, see “BOOSTER

SEAT INSTALLATION” later in this section.

●When your booster seat is not in use, keep it

secured with a seat belt to prevent it from

being thrown around in case of a sudden

stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in a closed

vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing your child in

the booster seat.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

●Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

LRS0455

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat s

1is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat s

2should be used.

●If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with

your child. Always follow all recommended

procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-

ries require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint at all

times while the vehicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

WARNING

INFINITI recommends that booster seats be in-

stalled in the rear seat. However, if you must

install a booster seat in the front passenger

seat, move the passenger’s seat to the rear-

most position.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic

Locking Retractor mode when using a booster

seat with the seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in

the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0453 LRS0464

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, adjust the seatback so that it is

upright and then move the seat to the rear-

most position. Do not move the seat with

the booster seat attached to it.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manufac-

turer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If

necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint to obtain the correct booster

seat fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINT” earlier in

this section.) If the head restraint is re-

moved, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to install the head restraint when the

booster seat is removed. If the seating

position does not have an adjustable

head restraint and it is interfering with

the proper booster seat fit, try another

seating position or a different booster

seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure

to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat

belt toward the retractor to take up extra

slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is posi-

tioned across the top, middle portion of

the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the

booster seat manufacturer’s instructions

for adjusting the belt routing.

SSS0640

Center position

LRS0451

Outboard position

LRS0452

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPE

SEAT BELT” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, push the ignition switch

to the ON position. The front passenger

air bag status light may or may not

illuminate depending on the size of the

child and the type of booster seat used.

(See “Front passenger air bag and status

light” later in this section.)

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-

tion contains important information concerning

the Driver and passenger front-impact supple-

mental air bags (INFINITI Advanced Air Bag

System), Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system, Roof-mounted

curtain side-impact supplemental air bag and

Seat belt pretensioner.

Supplemental front-impact air bag system: The

INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest

of the driver and front passenger in certain

frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag system: This system can help cushion

the impact force to the chest and pelvis area of

the driver and front passenger in certain side

impact collisions. The side air bags are de-

signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle

is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemen-

tal air bag system: This system can help cushion

the impact force to the head of occupants in

front and rear outboard seating positions in

certain side impact collisions. The curtain air

bags are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

Front seat

LRS0454 SSS0676

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protection pro-

vided by the driver and passenger seat belts

and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the occu-

pant seated a suitable distance away from the

steering wheel, instrument panel and door fin-

ishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this section

for instructions and precautions on seat belt

usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion, the supplemental air bag warning light illu-

minates. The supplemental air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems

are operational.

SSS0131B

SSS0132B

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

WARNING

●The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in

the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll-

over, or lower severity frontal collision. Al-

ways wear your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

●The front passenger air bag will not inflate if

the passenger air bag status light is lit or if

the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See

“Front passenger air bag and status light”

later in this section.

●The seat belts and the front air bags are most

effective when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate

with great force. Even with the INFINITI ad-

vanced air bag system, if you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting sideways

or out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You

may also receive serious or fatal injuries

from the front air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far-away as practical from

the steering wheel or instrument panel. Al-

ways use the seat belts.

●The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that de-

tect if the seat belts are fastened. The Ad-

vanced Air Bag System monitors the severity

of a collision and seat belt usage then in-

flates the air bags. Failure to properly wear

seat belts can increase the risk or severity of

injury in an accident.

●The front passenger seat is equipped with an

occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-

sor) that turns the front passenger air bag

OFF under some conditions. This sensor is

only used in this seat. Failure to be properly

seated and wearing the seat belt can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in an

accident. See “Front passenger air bag and

status light” later in this section.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steering

wheel. Placing them inside the steering

wheel rim could increase the risk of injury if

the supplemental front air bag inflates.

SSS0007

SSS0006

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or ex-

tend their hands or face out of the window.

Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or

arms. Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the illustrations.

●Children may be severely injured or killed

when the front air bags, side air bags or

curtain air bags inflate if they are not prop-

erly restrained. Pre-teens and children

should be properly restrained in the rear

seat, if possible.

●Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, never install a rear facing child restraint

in the front seat. An inflating front air bag

could seriously injure or kill your child. See

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section

for details.

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bags:

●The side air bags and curtain side air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a

frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or lower

severity side collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity

of injury in various kinds of accidents.

SSS0059A

SSS0188A

SSS0140

SSS0162

SSS0159

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

●The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain

air bags are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the seat. The

side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with

great force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side air bag

on the side of the seatback of the front seat

or near the side roof rails. Do not allow any-

one sitting in the front seats or rear outboard

seats to extend their hand out of the window

or lean against the door. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown in the

previous illustrations.

●When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold

onto the seatback of the front seat. If the

supplemental side air bag inflates, you may

be seriously injured. Be especially careful

with children, who should always be prop-

erly restrained. Some examples of danger-

ous riding positions are shown in the

illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front seat-

backs. They may interfere with supplemen-

tal side air bag inflation.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-

ules (INFINITI Advanced Air Bags)

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags

4. Occupant classification sensor (pattern

sensor)

5. Occupant classification system control

unit

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bags

7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag inflators

8. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

9. Satellite sensors

10. Seat belt pretensioner

INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM

(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI Ad-

vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S.

regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.

However, all of the information, cautions and

warnings in this manual still apply and must be

followed.

Sedan

SSS0683

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is

mounted in the instrument panel above the

glove box. The front air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, al-

though they may inflate if the forces in another

type of collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in

certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or

lack of it) is not always an indication of proper

front air bag operation.

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System has dual

stage air bag inflators. The system monitors

information from the Air bag Control Unit (ACU),

the diagnosis sensor unit, seat belt buckle

sensors and the occupant classification sensor

(pattern sensor). Inflator operation is based on

the severity of a collision and seat belt usage

for the driver. For the front passenger, the

occupant classification sensor is also moni-

tored. Based on information from the sensors,

Coupe

SSS0807

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

only one front air bag may inflate in a crash,

depending on the crash severity and whether

the front occupants are belted or unbelted.

Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be

automatically turned OFF under some condi-

tions, depending on the information provided

by the occupant classification sensor. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger

air bag status light will be illuminated (if the

seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illumi-

nated, but the air bag will be off). (See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” later in this

section for further details.) One front air bag

inflating does not indicate improper perfor-

mance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, contact INFINITI or an INFINITI dealer. If

you are considering modification of your vehicle

due to a disability, you may also contact

INFINITI. Contact information is contained in the

front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate

a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as

it may cause irritation and choking. Those with

a history of a breathing condition should get

fresh air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the head

and chest of the front occupants. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,

an inflating front air bag may cause facial

abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do

not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat belts

should be correctly worn and the driver and

passenger seated upright as far as practical

away from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order

to help protect the front occupants. Because of

this, the force of the front air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, the air bag module

during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a colli-

sion.

The front air bags operate only when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion, the supplemental air bag warning light illu-

minates. The supplemental air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

Front passenger air bag and status

light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to au-

tomatically turn OFF under some conditions.

Read this section carefully to learn how it oper-

ates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child

restraints is necessary for most effective pro-

tection. Failure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts

and child restraints can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

Front passenger air bag status light

SSS0676

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light

is located above the ashtray. The light operates

as follows:

●Unoccupied passenger seat: The is

OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF

and will not inflate in a crash.

●Passenger seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in this

section: The illuminates to indicate

that the front passenger air bag is OFF and

will not inflate in a crash.

●Occupied passenger seat and the passenger

meets the conditions outlined in this sec-

tion: The light is OFF to indicate that

the front passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as described

below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate

in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags

in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air

bag to certain front passenger seat occupants,

such as children, by requiring the air bag to be

automatically turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-

sor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and

is designed to detect an occupant and objects

on the seat. For example, if a child is in the front

passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is

designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in

accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regulations

is on the seat, the occupant classification sen-

sor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn

OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as

outlined in this manual should not cause the

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat

properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by

sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise

being out of position), this could cause the

sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to

be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for

the most effective protection by the seat belt

and supplemental air bag.

INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

INFINITI also recommends that appropriate

child restraints and booster seats be properly

installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible,

the occupant classification sensor is designed

to operate as described above to turn the front

passenger air bag OFF for specified child re-

straints. Failing to properly secure child re-

strains and to use the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in

an accident or sudden stop. This can also result

in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash

instead of being OFF. (See “CHILD RESTRAINTS”

earlier in this section for proper use and instal-

lation.)

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a

crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object being detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could

also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child

is standing on the seat, or if two children are on

the seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle

occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you

can monitor when the front passenger air bag is

automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-

pied. The light will not illuminate when the front

passenger seat is unoccupied.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

passenger air bag status light is illuminated

(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be

that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting

on the seat properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the passenger air bag status light may or

may not be illuminated, depending on the size

of the child and the type of child restraint being

used. If the passenger air bag status light is not

illuminated (indicating that the air bag might

inflate in a crash), it could be that the child

restraint or seat belt is not being used properly.

Make sure that the child restraint is installed

properly, the seat belt is used properly and the

occupant is positioned properly. If the passen-

ger air bag status light is still not illuminated,

reposition the occupant or child restraint in a

rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the

child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant

are properly positioned, the system may be

sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the

air bag is OFF). Your INFINITI dealer can check

that the system is OFF by using a special tool.

However, until you have confirmed with your

dealer that your air bag is working properly,

reposition the occupant or child restraint in a

rear seat.

The INFINITI advanced air bag system and pas-

senger air bag status light will take a few

seconds to register a change in the passenger

seat status. However, if the seat becomes un-

occupied, the air bag status light will remain

off.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger

air bag system, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light , located in the meter and

gauges area will blink. Have the system

checked by an INFINITI dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air

bag precautions

WARNING

●Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also,

do not place any objects between any occu-

pant and the steering wheel or instrument

panel. Such objects may become dangerous

projectiles and cause injury if the front air

bag inflates.

●Do not place objects with sharp edges on the

seat. Also, do not place heavy objects on the

seat that will leave permanent impressions

in the seat. Such objects can damage the

seat or occupant classification sensor (pat-

tern sensor). This can affect the operation of

the air bag system and result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can dam-

age the seat or occupant classification sen-

sor. This can also affect the operation of the

air bag system and result in serious personal

injury.

●Immediately after inflation, several front air

bag system components will be hot. Do not

touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of the supplemen-

tal air bag system. This is to prevent acciden-

tal inflation of the supplemental air bag or

damage to the supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to your

vehicle’s electrical system, suspension sys-

tem or front end structure. This could affect

proper operation of the front air bag system.

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Tampering with the air bag system may re-

sult in serious personal injury. Tampering

includes changes to the steering wheel and

the instrument panel assembly by placing

material over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around the air bag

system.

●Modifying or tampering with the front pas-

senger seat may result in serious personal

injury. For example, do not change the front

seats by placing material on the seat cush-

ion or by installing additional trim material,

such as seat covers, on the seat that is not

specifically designed to assure proper air

bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat or the

seat cushion and seatback. Such objects

may interfere with the proper operation of

the occupant classification sensor.

●No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of the seat belt

system. This may affect the front air bag

system. Tampering with the seat belt system

may result in serious personal injury.

●Work on and around the front air bag system

should be done by an INFINITI dealer. Instal-

lation of electrical equipment should also be

done by an INFINITI dealer. The Supplemen-

tal Restraint System (SRS) wiring should not

be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and probing de-

vices should not be used on the air bag

system.

●A cracked windshield should be replaced im-

mediately by a qualified repair facility. A

cracked windshield could affect the function

of the supplemental air bag system.

●The SRS wiring harness connectors are yel-

low and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IMPACT

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND

ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-

IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

SYSTEMS

The side air bags are located in the outside of

the front seats. The curtain air bags are located

in the side roof rails. These systems are de-

signed to meet voluntary guidelines to help

reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position oc-

cupants. However, all of the information, cau-

tions and warnings in this manual still apply and

must be followed. The front air bags and

SSS0521

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

curtain air bag are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may in-

flate if the forces in another type of collision are

similar to those of a higher severity side impact.

They are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in

certain side collisions on the side where the

vehicle is impacted.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain air

bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, fol-

lowed by release of smoke. This smoke is not

harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care

should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause

irritation and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest

and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain

air bags help to cushion the impact force to the

head of occupants in the front and rear out-

board seating positions. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may

cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags

and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to

the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate quickly in order to help protect the

out-of-position occupants. Because of this, the

force of the side air bag and curtain air bag

inflating can increase the risk of injury if the

occupant is too close to, or is against, these air

bag modules during inflation. The side air bag

and curtain air bag will deflate quickly after the

collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion, the supplemental air bag warning light illu-

minates. The air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the systems are opera-

tional.

WARNING

●Do not place any objects near the seatback

of the front seats. Also, do not place any

objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the

front door finisher and the front seat. Such

objects may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

●Right after inflation, several side air bag and

curtain air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may severely

burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of the side air bag

and curtain air bag. This is to prevent acci-

dental inflation of the side air bag and cur-

tain air bag system or damage to the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems.

1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

●Do not make unauthorized changes to your

vehicle’s electrical system, suspension sys-

tem or side panel. This could affect proper

operation of the side air bag and curtain air

bags systems.

●Tampering with the air bag system may re-

sult in serious personal injury. For example,

do not change the front seat by placing ma-

terial near the seatback or by installing ad-

ditional trim material, such as seat covers,

around the front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags.

●Work around and on the front seat-mounted

side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact supplemental

air bags system should be done by an

INFINITI dealer. Installation of electrical

equipment should also be done by an

INFINITI dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment and

probing devices should not be used on the

side-impact air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harnesses connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to

the appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS

(Front seats)

WARNING

●The pretensioners cannot be reused after ac-

tivation. They must be replaced together

with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

●If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal

collision but the pretensioner is not acti-

vated, be sure to have the pretensioner sys-

tem checked and, if necessary, replaced by

an INFINITI dealer.

●No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of the preten-

sioner system. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental activation of the pretension-

ers. Tampering with the pretensioner sys-

tem may result in serious personal injury.

●Work around and on the pretensioner should

be done by an INFINITI dealer. Installation of

electrical equipment should also be done by

an INFINITI dealer. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the pretensioner system.

●

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

●If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or

scrap the vehicle, contact an INFINITI dealer.

Correct pretensioner disposal procedures

are set forth in the appropriate INFINITI Ser-

vice Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system activates in conjunc-

tion with the air bag system. Working with the

seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in certain

types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat

occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt

retractor. These seat belts are used the same

way as conventional seat belts. When a preten-

sioner activates, smoke is released and a loud

noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful,

and it does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation

and choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters al-

low the seat belt to release webbing (if neces-

sary) to reduce forces against the chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner

system, the supplemental air bag warning light

will not come on, will flash intermittently

or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after

the ignition switch has been pushed to the ON

position. In this case, the pretensioner may not

function properly. They must be checked and

repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest

INFINITI dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact supplemental air bag systems are

placed in the vehicle as shown in the

illustration.

1SRS air bag

The warning labels are located on the surface of

the sun visors.

2SRS side-impact air bag

The warning label is located on the side of the

passenger’s side center pillar.

SSS0330

1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, dis-

playing in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits of the supplemental front-

impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag, roof-mounted curtain

side-impact supplemental air bag and seat belt

pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits

include the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), satellite

sensors, crash zone sensor, front air bag mod-

ules, side air bag modules, curtain air bag

modules, pretensioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.

This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain side air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on approximately 7 seconds after the

ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side

air bags, curtain air bag or pretensioner sys-

tems may not operate properly. They must be

checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the

nearest INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on,

it could mean that the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner sys-

tem will not operate in an accident. To help

avoid injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as

possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

PROCEDURE

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain side air

bags and pretensioners are designed to acti-

vate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,

unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag

warning light will remain illuminated after infla-

tion has occurred. Repair and replacement of

these systems should be done only by an

INFINITI dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain

air bags, pretensioners and related parts

should be pointed out to the person conducting

the maintenance. The ignition switch should

always be in the LOCK position when working

under the hood or inside the vehicle.

SPA1097

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

WARNING

●Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain

air bag has inflated, the air bag module will

not function again and must be replaced.

Additionally, if any of the front air bags in-

flate, the activated pretensioners must also

be replaced. The air bag module and preten-

sioner system should be replaced by an

INFINITI dealer. The air bag module and pre-

tensioner system cannot be repaired.

●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

system and the pretensioner system should

be inspected by an INFINITI dealer if there is

any damage to the front end or side portion

of the vehicle.

●If you need to dispose of the supplemental

air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the

vehicle, contact an INFINITI dealer. Correct

supplemental air bag and pretensioner sys-

tem disposal procedures are set forth in the

appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. Incor-

rect disposal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit........................................... 2-2

Instrument panel .................................. 2-3

Meters and gauges ................................ 2-4

Speedometer and odometer ..................... 2-5

Tachometer ....................................2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge...............2-6

Fuel gauge..................................... 2-7

Compass (if so equipped) ..........................2-8

Zone variation change procedure ................ 2-9

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders......2-11

Checking bulbs ................................2-11

Warning lights ................................ 2-12

Indicator lights................................ 2-16

Audible reminders............................. 2-18

Dot matrix liquid crystal display ................... 2-19

Indicators for operation........................ 2-21

Indicators for maintenance .....................2-23

Trip computer.................................2-24

Security systems .................................2-27

Vehicle security system ........................ 2-27

INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system .............2-28

Windshield wiper and washer switch...............2-29

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . 2-31

Headlight and turn signal switch .................. 2-31

Xenon headlights ............................. 2-31

Headlight switch ..............................2-32

Turn signal switch.............................2-36

Fog light switch ............................... 2-37

Hazard warning flasher switch..................... 2-37

Horn ............................................2-38

Heated seats (if so equipped) .....................2-38

SNOW mode switch (if so equipped) ...............2-39

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ..........2-39

Clock............................................2-40

Adjusting the time.............................2-40

Power outlet .....................................2-40

Cigarette lighter and ashtrays ..................... 2-41

Front ......................................... 2-41

Rear ......................................... 2-41

Storage .........................................2-42

Cup holders ..................................2-42

Sunglasses holder.............................2-44

Glove box ....................................2-44

Console box ..................................2-45

Rear armrest pocket (Sedan) ...................2-46

Card holder...................................2-47

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Coat hooks ...................................2-48

Stowing golf bags (Coupe) .....................2-48

Cargo net.....................................2-49

Trunk net for extra window washer fluid

(Canada only; if so equipped) ..................2-49

Windows ........................................2-49

Power windows ...............................2-49

Moonroof (if so equipped) ........................ 2-52

Automatic moonroof ........................... 2-52

Interior lights ....................................2-54

Map lights....................................2-54

Personal lights (Sedan) ........................ 2-54

Interior light control switch ....................2-54

Vanity mirror lights............................... 2-55

Trunk light.......................................2-56

HomeLinkTuniversal transceiver...................2-56

Programming HomeLinkT...................... 2-57

Programming HomeLinkTfor Canadian

customers ....................................2-59

Operating the HomeLinkTuniversal

transceiver ...................................2-59

Programming trouble-diagnosis................. 2-59

Clearing the programmed information...........2-59

Reprogramming a single HomeLinkTbutton .....2-59

If your vehicle is stolen ........................2-60

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P. 5-49)

2. Trunk lid release switch (P. 3-18)

3. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-34)

4. Instrument brightness control switch

(P. 2-36)

5. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer

(P. 2-5)

6. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

(P. 2-31)

7. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P. 5-13)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (Left

side)

— ENTER or tuning switch (P. 4-54)

— BACK switch (P. 4-54)

— TALK switch (if so equipped)

(P. 4-78)/Phone switch (if so equipped)

(P. 4-57)

— Volume control switches (P. 4-54)

— Source select switch (P. 4-54)

9. Trip computer switch (P. 2-24)

10. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-29)

11. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (Right

side)

— Cruise control switches (P. 5-17)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-19)

12. Hood release handle (P. 3-17)

13. Intelligent Key port (P. 5-8)

14. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel

lever (if so equipped) (P. 3-23)

15. Manual tilting/telescopic steering wheel

lever (if so equipped) (P. 3-23)

16. Steering wheel

— Horn (P. 2-38)

— Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-38)

SSI0262

COCKPIT

2-2 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

1. Side ventilator (P. 4-22)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

3. Center ventilator (P. 4-22)

4. Audio system (P. 4-29)

5. Clock (P. 2-40)

6. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system* (if so equipped)

— Vehicle information and setting buttons

(P. 4-7)

— BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System

(if so equipped) (P. 4-57)

— Audio system (P. 4-29)

7. Center display (P. 4-2)/Navigation

system* (if so equipped)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-37)

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-38)

10. Fuse box cover (P. 8-20)

11. Parking brake (for Automatic Transmis-

sion models)

— Parking (P. 5-16)

12. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-6)

13. Automatic climate control system

(P. 4-23)

14. Cigarette lighter and ashtrays (P. 2-41)

15. Parking brake (for Manual Transmission

models)

— Parking (P. 5-16)

16. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-38)

17. SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-39)

18. CompactFlash card slot (if so equipped)

(P. 4-42)

19. Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defogger switch (P. 2-31)

20. Glove box lid release handle (P. 2-44)

SSI0363

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instruments and controls 2-3

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

21. Trunk release power cancel switch

(P. 3-19)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

1. Tachometer (P. 2-6)

2. Warning/Indicator lights (P. 2-11)

3. Speedometer (P. 2-5)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

(P. 2-6)

5. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/

Odometer/twin trip odometer (P. 2-19)

6. Fuel gauge (P. 2-7)

*: The needle indicators in the speedometer, ta-

chometer, engine coolant temperature gauge

and fuel gauge may move slightly after the

SSI0264

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK posi-

tion. This is not a malfunction.

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in

miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour

(km/h).

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer s

1and twin trip odometer s

2are

displayed on the dot matrix crystal display

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display

Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET switch s

3at the

bottom left of the combination meter panel

changes the display as follows:

Speedometer

SIC3253

Odometer/twin trip odometer

SIC3259

Instruments and controls 2-5

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

TRIP A →TRIP B →TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET switch s

3for more

than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

Average fuel economy and distance to empty

information is also available. (See “DOT MATRIX

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” later in this section

and “HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON” in the “4.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice rec-

ognition systems” section.)

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the engine

into the red zone s

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red zone,

shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed.

Operating the engine in the red zone may cause

serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-

perature.

The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range when the gauge needle points

within the zone s

1shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

SIC3254 SIC3255

2-6 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal range,

reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature.

If gauge is over the normal range, stop the

vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine

is overheated, continued operation of the ve-

hicle may seriously damage the engine. See “IF

YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section for immediate action

required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the

ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers

“E” (Empty).

The low fuel warning appears on the dot

matrix liquid crystal display when the fuel tank

is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-

nient, preferably before the gauge reaches “E”.

There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank

when the fuel gauge needle reaches “E”.

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light (MIL) may come

on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few

driving trips, the light should turn off.

If the light remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by an

INFINITI dealer.

●For additional information, see “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” later in this section.

SIC3256

Instruments and controls 2-7

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the compass display s

Bwill indicate

the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass

by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at

less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can also cali-

brate the compass by driving your vehicle on

your everyday route. The compass will be cali-

brated once it has tracked 3 complete circles.

To turn on and off the compass manually, push

the switch s

Awhile the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

SIC3181

COMPASS (if so equipped)

2-8 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

ZONE VARIATION CHANGE

PROCEDURE

The difference between magnetic north and

geographical north is known as variance. In

some areas, this difference can sometimes be

great enough to cause false compass readings.

Follow these instructions to set the variance for

your particular location if this happens:

1. Push the switch for more than 3

seconds. The current zone number will

appear in the display.

2. Find your current location and variance

number on the zone map.

3. Push the switch repeatedly until

the new zone number appears in the

display, then release the switch. After you

release the switch, the display will show a

compass direction within a few seconds.

●If the compass deviates from the correct

indication soon after repeated adjust-

ment, have the compass checked at an

INFINITI dealer.

●The compass may not indicate the correct

compass point in tunnels or while driving

up or down a steep hill.

Zone map

SIC0611B

Instruments and controls 2-9

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

(The compass returns to the correct com-

pass point when the vehicle moves to an

area where the geomagnetism is stabi-

lized.)

CAUTION

●Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which

are attached to the vehicle by means of a

magnet. They affect the operation of the

compass.

●When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel

or similar material dampened with glass

cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly

on the mirror as it may cause the liquid

cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

2-10 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/02/07—pattie X

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light

(AWD models)* 4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) warning

light* Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)

indicator light*

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

warning light (Orange)* Automatic transmission position indica-

tor light*

Intelligent Key warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Automatic transmission check

warning light Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Brake warning light

Master warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Preview Function warning light (Or-

ange)* Security indicator light

Charge warning light Seat belt warning light Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indi-

cator light

*: if so equipped

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake

and push the ignition switch to the ON position

without starting the engine. The following lights

will come on (if so equipped):

, or , , ,

, , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go

off (if so equipped):

, or , , ,

, , ,

If any light does not come on, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the elec-

trical system. Have the system checked by an

INFINITI dealer.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-11

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed

on the dot matrix crystal display between the

speedometer and tachometer. (See “DOT MATRIX

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” later in this section.)

WARNING LIGHTS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

warning light (AWD models)

The warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is pushed to ON. It turns off

soon after the engine is started.

If the AWD system malfunctions, or the diam-

eter of the front and the rear wheels are differ-

ent, the warning light will either remain illumi-

nated or blink. (See “ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

CAUTION

●If the warning light comes on while driving

there may be a malfunction in the AWD sys-

tem. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your

vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as

soon as possible.

●If the AWD warning light blinks on when you

are driving:

– blinks rapidly (about twice a second):

Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the

engine. The driving mode will change

to2WD to prevent the AWD system from

malfunctioning. If the warning light turns

off, you can drive again.

– blinks slowly (about once every 2 sec-

onds):

Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the

engine. Check that all tire sizes are the

same, tire pressure is correct and tires are

not worn.

●If the warning light is still on after the above

operations, have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light illuminates and then turns off. This indi-

cates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may

indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-

tance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.)

Automatic transmission

check warning light (if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If

the light comes on at any other time, it may

indicate the transmission is not functioning

properly. Have your INFINITI dealer check and

repair the transmission.

or Brake warning

light

This light functions for both the parking brake

and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light comes on when the parking brake is

applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the

light comes on while the engine is running with

2-12 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle

and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. (See “BRAKE AND

CLUTCH FLUID” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked by an INFINITI

dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indica-

tor

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

brake system checked, and if necessary re-

paired, by an INFINITI dealer promptly. Avoid

high-speed driving and abrupt braking. (See

“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”

earlier in this section.)

WARNING

●Your brake system may not be working prop-

erly if the warning light is on. Driving could

be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive

carefully to the nearest service station for

repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be dangerous.

●Pressing the brake pedal with the engine

stopped and/or low brake fluid level may

increase your stopping distance and braking

will require greater pedal effort as well as

pedal travel.

●If the brake fluid level is below the minimum

or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do

not drive until the brake system has been

checked at an INFINITI dealer.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is run-

ning, it may indicate the charging system is not

functioning properly. Turn the engine off and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,

broken, missing or if the light remains on, see

an INFINITI dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is

loose, broken or missing.

4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS)

warning light (if so equipped)

If the light comes on while the engine is run-

ning, it may indicate that there is a malfunction

with the 4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) portion of

the steering system. Push the ignition switch to

the OFF position and then to the ON position. If

the light does not turn off after cycling the

engine, have the system checked by an INFINITI

dealer.

For further information about the 4 Wheel Active

Steer system, see “4 WHEEL ACTIVE STEER

(4WAS) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driv-

ing” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the 4

Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) function will cease

but driving can be continued. However, the

steering wheel is slightly turned even when

driving on a straight road. Drive carefully to the

nearest INFINITI dealer.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If

the light flickers or comes on during normal

driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the

engine immediately and call an INFINITI dealer

or other authorized repair shop.

Instruments and controls 2-13

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

The engine oil pressure warning light is not de-

signed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dip-

stick to check the oil level. (See “ENGINE OIL” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.)

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pres-

sure warning light on could cause serious dam-

age to the engine almost immediately. Such

damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the

engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Intelligent Cruise Control

(ICC) system warning light

(Orange; if so equipped)

This light comes on if there is a malfunction in

the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system.

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle

in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the

engine, resume driving and set the ICC system

again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the

indicator stays on, it may indicate that the sys-

tem is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is

still driveable under normal conditions, have the

vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer.

Intelligent Key warning light

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, this light comes on for about 2 sec-

onds and then turns off.

This light warns of a malfunction with the

electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent

Key system.

If the light comes on while the engine is

stopped, it may be impossible to free the

steering lock or to start the engine. If the light

comes on while the engine is running, you can

drive the vehicle. However in these cases, con-

tact an INFINITI dealer for repair as soon as

possible.

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the

tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this light

illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates, you should stop and adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tire pres-

sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information

label. The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire pres-

sure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “TIRE PRESSURE

MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section and “TIRE PRESSURE

MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case

of emergency” section.

2-14 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

pushed ON. The light will remain on after the 1

minute. Have the system checked by an INFINITI

dealer.

For additional information, see “TIRE PRESSURE

MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section.

WARNING

●If the light does not illuminate with the igni-

tion switch pushed ON, have the vehicle

checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as

possible.

●If the light illuminates while driving, avoid

sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt brak-

ing, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to

a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon

as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires

may permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and may lead to

an accident and could result in serious per-

sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for all-

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the rec-

ommended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label to turnthe

low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the

light still illuminates while driving after ad-

justing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare

tire as soon as possible.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function and the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after the 1 minute. Contact your

INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire

replacement and/or system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper

operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

●The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular

tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire

pressure regularly.

●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less

than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS may not

operate correctly.

●Be sure to install the specified size of tires to

the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the master warning light illuminates if any of

the following are displayed on the dot matrix

liquid crystal display:

●No key warning

●Low fuel warning

●Low washer fluid warning

●Parking brake release warning

●Door/trunk open warning

See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY”

later in this section.

Preview Function warning

light (Orange; if so equipped)

The light comes on if there is a malfunction in

the Brake Assist (with Preview Function) sys-

tem.

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle

in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the

engine, resume driving and set the ICC system

again.

Instruments and controls 2-15

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

If it is not possible to set the system or the

indicator stays on, it may indicate that the sys-

tem is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is

still driveable under normal conditions, have the

vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat

belts. The light illuminates whenever the igni-

tion switch is pushed to the ON position, and

will remain illuminated until the driver’s seat

belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime

will sound for about 6 seconds unless the

driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front passen-

ger will illuminate if the seat belt is not fastened

when the front passenger’s seat is occupied.

For 5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the

ON position, the system does not activate the

warning light for the front passenger.

See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag

warning light

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds

if the supplemental front air bag and supple-

mental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag

systems and/or pretensioner seat belt are op-

erational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and

pretensioner systems need servicing and your

vehicle must be taken to your nearest INFINITI

dealer.

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint systems and/or pretensioners may not

function properly.

For additional information, see “SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on,

it could mean that the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag systems and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an accident.

To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have

your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as

possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Adaptive Front lighting

System (AFS) indicator light

(if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the Adaptive Front lighting System

(AFS) indicator light will illuminate. The light

will turn off in about 1 second if the AFS is

operational.

This light also comes on when the AFS is turned

off by pushing the OFF side of the AFS switch.

2-16 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

If the AFS indicator light blinks, it may indicate

the AFS is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

See “Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)” later

in this section.

Automatic transmission

position indicator light (if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the indicator shows the automatic

selector shift position. (See “AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section.)

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status light ( )

will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

OFF depending on how the front passenger seat

is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light opera-

tion, see “INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM

(front seats)” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” sec-

tion of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight high

beam is on and goes out when the low beam is

selected.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on

steady or blinks while the engine is running, it

may indicate a potential emission control mal-

function.

The malfunction indicator light may also come

on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check

to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and

closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least

3 US gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine

is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is

not ready for an emission control system

inspection/maintenance test. (See “READINESS

FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US

only)” in the “9. Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section.)

Operation

The malfunction indicator light will come on in

one of two ways:

●Malfunction indicator light on steady — An

emission control system malfunction has

been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If

the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten

or install the cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The light should turn off after

a few driving trips. If the light does

not turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by an INFINITI dealer. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed to

the dealer.

●Malfunction indicator light blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system.

To reduce or avoid emission control system

damage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

Instruments and controls 2-17

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop

blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI

dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without having

the emission control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could lead to poor drive-

ability, reduced fuel economy, and possible

damage to the emission control system.

Security indicator light

The light blinks when the ignition switch is in

the LOCK position. This function indicates the

security system equipped on the vehicle is

operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning, this

light will remain on while the ignition switch is

in the ON position. For additional information,

see “SECURITY SYSTEMS” later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC system or

the traction control system is operating, thus

alerting the driver to the fact that the road

surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its

traction limits.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch

lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light

The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic

control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi-

cates that the vehicle dynamic control system

and traction control system are not operating.

When the vehicle dynamic control off indicator

light and slip indicator light come on with the

vehicle dynamic control system turned on, this

light alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle

dynamic control system’s fail-safe mode is op-

erating, for example the vehicle dynamic con-

trol system may not be functioning properly.

Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

If an abnormality occurs in the system, the

vehicle dynamic control system function will be

canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For

additional information, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC

CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver side door is

opened while the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC position or pushed to the OFF or LOCK

position with the Intelligent Key left in the

Intelligent Key port. Make sure the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position, and take

the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the

vehicle.

Light reminder chime

A chime will sound when the driver side door is

opened with the light switch in the or

position and the ignition switch in the

ACC, OFF or LOCK position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave the

vehicle.

2-18 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Parking brake reminder chime

The chime will sound if the vehicle is driven

with the parking brake applied. Stop the vehicle

and release the parking brake.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

the vehicle is in motion whether or not the

brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the warning

sound is heard. The dot matrix liquid crystal display s

1is

located between the tachometer and the speed-

ometer, and it displays the automatic transmis-

sion position indicator (if so equipped), the

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (if so

equipped) information, the Intelligent Key op-

eration information and other warnings and

information.

For details about the automatic transmission

position indicator, see “INDICATOR LIGHTS” ear-

lier in this section. For details about the ICC

system, see “INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL

(ICC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section. For the details about the Intelligent Key

system, see “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the

“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”

section.

SIC3252

DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

Instruments and controls 2-19

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

SIC3461

2-20 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

INDICATORS FOR OPERATION

1. Engine start operation indicator

(Automatic Transmission models)

This indicator appears when the selector lever

is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start

by pushing the ignition switch with the brake

pedal depressed.

2. Steering lock release malfunction

indicator

This indicator appears when the steering wheel

cannot be released from the LOCK position.

If this indicator appears, push the push-button

ignition switch while lightly turning the steering

wheel right and left.

3. Intelligent Key insertion indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key

needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key

port. (For example, the Intelligent Key battery is

discharged.)

If this indicator appears, insert the Intelligent

Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct

direction. (See “PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION

SWITCH” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section.)

4. Intelligent Key removal indicator

This indicator appears when the driver’s door is

opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and the Intelligent Key placed in

the Intelligent Key port. A key reminder chime

also sounds.

If this indicator appears, remove the Intelligent

Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with

you when leaving the vehicle.

5. NO KEY warning

This warning appears in either of the following

conditions.

No key inside the vehicle

The warning appears when the door is closed

with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle

and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle.

Unregistered Intelligent Key

The warning appears when the ignition switch

is pushed from the LOCK position and the

Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the

system. You cannot start the engine with an

unregistered key. Use the registered Intelligent

Key.

See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section for

more details.

6. SHIFT “P” warning (Automatic

Transmission models)

This warning appears when the ignition switch is

pushed to stop the engine with the selector lever

in any position except the P (Park) position.

If this warning appears, move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position or push the ignition

switch to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound. (See

“INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section.)

7. “PUSH” warning (Automatic

Transmission models)

This warning appears when the selector lever is

moved to the P (Park) position with the ignition

switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT “P”

warning appears.

To push the ignition switch to the OFF position,

perform the following procedure:

SHIFT “P” warning →

(Move the selector lever

to “P”) →PUSH warning

→

(Push the ignition

switch →ignition switch position is turned to

Instruments and controls 2-21

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

ON) →PUSH warning

→

(Push the ignition

switch →ignition switch position is turned to

OFF)

8. Intelligent Key battery discharge

indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key

battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the battery

with a new one. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section.)

9. Engine start operation indicator

(Manual Transmission models)

This indicator means that the engine will start

by pushing the ignition switch with the clutch

pedal depressed.

10. Parking brake release warning

This warning appears when the vehicle speed is

above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the parking brake is

applied.

11. Low fuel warning

This warning appears when the fuel level in the

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge

reaches the empty (E) position.

There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the

tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty (E)

position.

12. Low washer fluid warning

This warning appears when the washer tank

fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as

necessary. (See “WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion.)

13. Door/trunk open warning (ignition

switch is in the ON position)

This warning appears if any of the doors and/or

the trunk lid are open or not closed securely.

The vehicle icon indicates which door or the

trunk lid is open on the display.

14. “Time to rest” indicator

This indicator appears when the set “time to

rest” indicator activates. You can set the time

for up to 6 hours. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later

in this section.)

15. Low outside temperature warning

This warning appears if the outside temperature

is below 37°C (3°F). The warning can be set not

to be displayed. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in

this section.)

16. Cruise indicator

Cruise main switch indicator

The indicator is displayed when the cruise

control main switch is pushed. When the main

switch is pushed again, the indicator disap-

pears. When the cruise control main switch

indicator is displayed, the cruise control system

is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator

The indicator is displayed while the vehicle

speed is controlled by the cruise control sys-

tem. If the indicator blinks while the engine is

running, it may indicate that the cruise control

system is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

See “CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section for details.

17. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system MAIN switch indicator (if so

equipped)

The indicator is displayed when the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system main switch is

pushed. When the main switch is pushed again,

the indicator disappears. While the main switch

indicator is displayed, the ICC system is

operational.

2-22 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE

1. Engine oil replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for changing the engine oil. You can set or reset

the distance for changing the engine oil. (See

“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

2. Oil filter replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing the oil filter. You can set or reset

the distance for replacing the oil filter. (See

“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

3. Tire replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing tires. You can set or reset the

distance for replacing tires. (See “TRIP COM-

PUTER” later in this section.)

4. “OTHER” indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil

filter and tires. You can set or reset the distance

for replacing the items. (See “TRIP COMPUTER”

later in this section.)

More maintenance reminders are also available

on the center display. (See “HOW TO USE INFO

BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems” section.)

SIC3281

Instruments and controls 2-23

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

TRIP COMPUTER

Switches for the trip computer are located on

the right side of the combination meter panel.

To operate the trip computer, push the side or

front of the switches as shown above.

Aswitch

Bswitch

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pushing the switch s

Each time the switch s

Ais pushed, the

display will change as follows:

SIC3282

SIC3264

2-24 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Current fuel consumption →Average fuel con-

sumption and speed →Elapsed time and trip

odometer →Distance to empty (dte) →Outside

air temperature (ICY) →Setting →Warning

check

1. Current fuel consumption

The current fuel consumption mode shows the

current fuel consumption.

2. Average fuel consumption (MPG or

l (liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH or

km/h)

Fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the switch

Bfor longer than 1 second. (The average speed

is also reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the

display shows “——”.

Speed

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is

done by pushing the switch s

Bfor longer

than 1 second. (The average fuel consumption is

also reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. The

first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows

“——”.

3. Elapsed time and trip odometer

(mls or km)

Elapsed time

The elapsed time mode shows the time since

the last reset. The displayed time can be reset

by pushing the switch s

Bfor longer than

1 second. (The trip odometer is also reset at the

same time.)

Trip odometer

The trip odometer mode shows the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven since the last

reset. Resetting is done by pushing the

switch s

Bfor longer than 1 second. (The

elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)

4. Distance to empty (dte — mls or

km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The dte is constantly

being calculated, based on the amount of fuel

in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consump-

tion.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning

feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is

displayed on the screen.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte

display will change to “——”.

●If the amount of fuel added is small, the

display just before the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position may continue to

be displayed.

●When driving uphill or rounding curves, the

fuel in the tank shifts, which may momen-

tarily change the display.

5. Outside air temperature (ICY — °C

or °F)

The outside air temperature is displayed in °C

or °F in the range of 222 to 131°C (230 to 55°F).

The outside air temperature mode includes a

low temperature warning feature. If the outside

air temperature is below 37°C (3°F), the warning

is displayed on the screen.

The outside temperature sensor is located in

front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected

Instruments and controls 2-25

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

by road or engine heat, wind directions and

other driving conditions. The display may differ

from the actual outside temperature or the

temperature displayed on various signs or bill-

boards.

6. Setting

Setting cannot be made while driving. A mes-

sage “Setting can only be operated when

stopped” is also displayed on the dot matrix

crystal display.

The switch s

Aand switch s

Bare

used in the setting mode to select and decide a

menu.

SKIP

Push the switch s

Ato move to the

warning check mode.

Push the switch s

Bto select other

menus.

ALERT

There are 3 submenus under the alert menu.

●BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top

page of the setting mode.

●TIME TO REST

Select this submenu to specify when the

“time to rest” indicator activates.

●ICY

Select this submenu to display the low out-

side temperature warning.

MAINTENANCE

There are 5 submenus under the maintenance

menu.

●BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top

page of the setting mode.

●ENGINE OIL

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for changing the engine oil.

●OIL FILTER

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for replacing the oil filter.

●TIRE

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for replacing tires.

●OTHER

Select this submenu and set or reset the

distance for replacing items other than the

engine oil, oil filter and tires.

DISPLAY

There are 3 submenus under the display menu.

●BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top

page of the setting mode.

●LANGUAGE

Select this submenu to choose English or

French for display.

●UNIT

Select this submenu to choose the unit from

MPG or l/100 km.

7. Warning check

SKIP

Push the switch s

Ato move to the

warning check mode.

Push the switch s

Bto select other

menus.

DETAIL

This item is available only when a warning is

displayed.

Select this menu to see the details of warnings.

2-26 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

Your vehicle has two types of security systems,

as follows:

●Vehicle security system

●INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by the

security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audio alarm signals if someone opens the

doors, hood, or trunk lid when the system is

armed. It is not, however, a motion detection

type system that activates when a vehicle is

moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior

or exterior vehicle components in all situations.

Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s)

in the vehicle, and always lock it when unat-

tended. Be aware of your surroundings, and

park in secure, well-lit areas whenever pos-

sible.

Many devices offering additional protection,

such as component locks, identification mark-

ers, and tracking systems, are available at auto

supply stores and specialty shops. Your INFINITI

dealer may also offer such equipment. Check

with your insurance company to see if you may

be eligible for discounts for various theft pro-

tection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the windows

are open.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the ve-

hicle.

4. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all

doors. The doors can be locked with the

Intelligent Key, door handle request

switch, power door lock switch or me-

chanical key.

SIC2132 SIC2045

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Instruments and controls 2-27

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

5. Confirm that the security indicator light

comes on. The security indicator light

stays on for about 30 seconds. The ve-

hicle security system is now pre-armed.

After about 30 seconds the vehicle secu-

rity system automatically shifts into the

armed phase. The security light begins to

flash once every approximately 3 sec-

onds. If, during this 30-second pre-arm

time period, the door is unlocked, or the

ignition switch is pushed to ACC or ON,

the system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passengers are in

the vehicle, the system will activate with all

doors, hood, and trunk lid locked with the igni-

tion switch in the LOCK position. When pushing

the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, the

system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the follow-

ing alarm:

●The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

●The alarm automatically turns off after ap-

proximately 1 minute. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with

again.

The alarm is activated by:

●Unlocking the door or opening the trunk lid

without using the button on the Intelligent

Key, the door handle request switch or the

mechanical key. (Even if the door is opened

by releasing the door inside lock knob, the

alarm will activate.)

●Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by

pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent

Key, the door handle request switch or using

the mechanical key. The alarm will not stop if

the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON

position.

If the system does not operate as described

above, have it checked by an INFINITI dealer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered Intelligent Key. Never leave these

keys in the vehicle.

Statement related to section 15 of FCC rules for

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System (CONT

ASSY - CARD SLOT)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-

tion is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY

APPROVED BY THE PARTY RESPONSIBLE FOR

COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER’S AUTHOR-

ITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

2-28 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Security indicator light

The security indicator light is located on the

meter panel. It indicates the status of the

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks after the ignition switch was in

the LOCK position. This function indicates the

security systems equipped on the vehicle are

operational.

If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, this light will remain on while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the engine will

not start, see an INFINITI dealer for INFINITI Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System service as soon as

possible. Please bring all Intelligent Keys that

you have when visiting an INFINITI dealer for

service.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solution

may freeze on the windshield and obscure your

vision which may lead to an accident. Warm

windshield with the defroster before you wash

the windshield.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continuously for

more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the reservoir

tank is empty.

●Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank

with washer fluid concentrates at full

strength. Some methyl alcohol based

washer fluid concentrates may permanently

stain the grille if spilled while filling the win-

dow washer reservoir tank.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with wa-

ter to the manufacturer’s recommended lev-

els before pouring the fluid into the window

washer reservoir tank. Do not use the win-

dow washer reservoir tank to mix the washer

fluid concentrate and water.

SIC2045

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-29

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

1Intermittent — intermittent operation can

be adjusted by turning the knob toward

A(Slower) or s

B(Faster). When the

speed sensing wiper interval function is

turned on, the intermittent operation

speed varies in accordance with the ve-

hicle speed. (For example, when the ve-

hicle speed is high, the intermittent op-

eration speed will be faster.) To turn this

function on and off, see “HOW TO USE

SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-

tion systems” section.

2Low — continuous low speed operation

3High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up s

4to have one sweep

operation of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s

5to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

SIC3238

2-30 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and

outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the en-

gine and push the switch s

1on. The indicator

light s

2will come on. Push the switch again to

turn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approximately 15

minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear win-

dow, be careful not to scratch or damage the

rear window defroster.

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

●When xenon headlights are on, they produce

a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock,

never attempt to modify or disassemble. Al-

ways have your xenon headlights replaced

at an INFINITI dealer.

●Xenon headlights provide considerably

more light than conventional headlights. If

they are not correctly aimed, they might

temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the

driver ahead of you and cause a serious acci-

dent. If headlights are not aimed correctly,

immediately take your vehicle to an INFINITI

dealer and have the headlights adjusted

correctly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,

its brightness or color varies slightly. However,

the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

Type A

SIC3239

Type B

SIC3278

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR

DEFROSTER SWITCH HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-31

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

●The life of xenon headlights will be shortened

by frequent on-off operation. It is generally

desirable not to turn off the headlights for

short intervals (for example, when the ve-

hicle stops at a traffic signal). Even when the

daytime running lights are active (Canada

only), the xenon headlights do not turn on.

This way the life of the xenon headlights is

not reduced.

●If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burn-

ing out, the brightness will drastically de-

crease, the light will start blinking, or the

color of the light will become reddish. If one

or more of the above signs appear, contact an

INFINITI dealer. HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

1Turn the switch to the position:

The front park, side marker, tail, license

plate and instrument lights will come on.

2Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the other

lights remain on.

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to

be set so they turn on and off automatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

3. The autolight system automatically turns

the headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch

to the OFF, ,or position.

SIC3267 SIC3268

2-32 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

The autolight system can turn on the headlights

automatically when it is dark and turn off the

headlights when it is light.

If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position and one of the doors is opened and

this condition is continued, the headlights re-

main on for 5 minutes.

Automatic headlights off delay

You can keep the headlights on for up to 180

seconds after you push the ignition switch to

OFF and open any door then close all the doors.

You can adjust the period of the automatic

headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to 180

seconds. The factory default setting is 45 sec-

onds.

For automatic headlights off delay setting, see

“Auto Headlights Off Delay” in the “4. Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recognition

systems” section.

Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo

sensor s

Alocated on the top of the instrument

panel. The photo sensor controls the autolight;

if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is

dark and the headlights will illuminate.

Headlight beam select

1To select the low beam, put the lever in

the neutral position as shown.

2To select the high beam, push the lever

forward while the switch is in the

position. Pull it back to select the low

beam.

3Pulling the lever toward you will flash the

headlight high beam even when the

headlight switch is in the OFF position.

Battery saver system

A chime will sound when the driver side door is

opened with the light switch in the or

SAA0642A SIC3269

Instruments and controls 2-33

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

position and the ignition switch in the

ACC, OFF or LOCK position.

When the headlight switch is in the or

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the lights will automatically

turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has

been pushed to the OFF position.

When the headlight switch remains in the

or position after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will turn on when

the ignition switch is pushed to the ON posi-

tion.

CAUTION

●When you turn on the headlight switch again

after the lights automatically turn off, the

lights will not turn off automatically. Be sure

to turn the light switch to the OFF position

when you leave the vehicle for extended pe-

riods of time, otherwise the battery will be

discharged.

●Never leave the light switch on when the

engine is not running for extended periods of

time even if the headlights turn off

automatically.

Daytime running light system

(Canada only)

The daytime running lights automatically illumi-

nate when the engine is started with the park-

ing brake released. The daytime running lights

operate with the headlight switch in the OFF

position or in the position. Turn the

headlight switch to the position for full

illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine

is started, the daytime running lights do not

illuminate. The daytime running lights illumi-

nate once the parking brake is released. The

daytime running lights will remain on until the

ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is ac-

tive, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is

necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights.

Failure to do so could cause an accident injur-

ing yourself and others.

Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)

(if so equipped)

The Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) will

automatically adjust the headlights (low beam)

toward the turning direction to improve the

driver’s view. When the headlight switch is ON

and the driver operates the steering wheel in a

turn, the AFS system will be activated.

The AFS will operate:

●when the headlight switch is ON.

●when the selector lever is in any position

other than P (Park) or R (Reverse).

●when the vehicle is driven at above 16 MPH

(25 km/h) for the left-side headlight. Note

that the right-side low beam headlight will

swivel but the left side will not swivel when

the vehicle is at a stop and the steering

wheel is turned. The vehicle must attain a

speed above 16 MPH (25 km/h) before AFS

activates the left-side headlight.

2-34 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

To turn the AFS off, push the OFF side of the AFS

switch. (The AFS OFF indicator light will illumi-

nate.) Push the ON side of the switch to turn the

system on again.

AFS will also adjust the headlight to a proper

axis automatically, depending on the number of

occupants in the vehicle, the load the vehicle is

carrying and the road conditions.

If the AFS OFF indicator light blinks after the

ignition switch has been pushed to the ON

position, this may indicate that the AFS is not

functioning properly. Have the system checked

by an INFINITI dealer. When the engine is

started, the headlights will vibrate to check the

system condition. This is not a malfunction.

SIC2645 SIC3257

Instruments and controls 2-35

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control switch can be

operated when the ignition switch is in the ON

position. When the switch is operated, the dot

matrix liquid crystal display switches to the

brightness adjustment mode.

Push the upper switch s

Ato brighten the

instrument panel lights. The bar s

1moves to

the + side. When reaching the maximum bright-

ness, “MAX” appears on the display s

Push the lower switch s

Bto dim the instrument

panel lights. The bar s

1moves to the 2side.

When reaching the minimum brightness, “MIN”

appears on the display s

3. However, “MIN”

does not appear during the nighttime.

The dot matrix liquid crystal display returns to

the normal display under the following condi-

tions:

●when the instrument brightness control

switch is not operated for more than 5

seconds.

●when the side or front of the switch or

switch on the right side of the com-

bination meter panel is pushed.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

1Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning

direction. When the turn is completed, the turn

signals cancel automatically.

2Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or

down to the point where lights begin flashing.

SIC3270

SIC3271

2-36 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the position, then turn the

switch to the position. To turn them off,

turn the switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on for the fog lights to

operate.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights will flash.

WARNING

●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

●Do not use the hazard warning flashers while

moving on the highway unless unusual cir-

cumstances force you to drive so slowly that

your vehicle might become a hazard to other

traffic.

●Turn signals do not work when the hazard

warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the ignition

switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of the

hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

SIC3272 SIC2574

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-37

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of

the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could

affect proper operation of the supplemental

front air bag system. Tampering with the

supplemental front air bag system may result

in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

●The battery could run down if the seat heater

is operated while the engine is not running.

●Do not use the seat heater for extended pe-

riods or when no one is using the seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which insu-

lates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat

cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become

overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on the

seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.

This may result in damage to the heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should

be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

●When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline,

thinner, or any similar materials.

●If any abnormalities are found or the heated

seat does not operate, turn the switch off

and have the system checked by an INFINITI

dealer.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

The switches located on the center console can

be operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

1For high heat, push the HI (High) side of

the switch.

2For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of

the switch.

The indicator light in the switch s

3will

illuminate when low or high is selected.

SIC3312 SIC2770

HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

2-38 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to

the level position. Make sure the indicator

light goes off.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or

before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn

off the switch.

For driving or starting the vehicle on snowy

roads or slippery areas, turn on the SNOW

mode switch. The indicator light on the switch

will illuminate. When the SNOW mode is acti-

vated, engine output is controlled to avoid

wheel spin.

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most

driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.

If maximum engine power is needed to free a

stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will illuminate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. (See “VEHICLE

DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

SSD0351 SIC1881

SNOW MODE SWITCH (if so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-39

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

If the power supply is disconnected, the clock

will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the

time.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

1. To set the clock forward, push the button

2. To set the clock backward, push the but-

ton

3. To move forward or backward faster, push

and hold the button more than 5 seconds.

For details about display clock adjustment (if so

equipped), see “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON”

in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems” section.

The power outlet is located in the center con-

sole.

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during or

immediately after use.

●Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12

volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use

double adapters or more than one electrical

accessory.

●Use power outlet with the engine running to

avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

●Avoid using power outlet when the air condi-

tioner, headlights or rear window defroster

is on.

●This power outlet is not designed for use

with a cigarette lighter unit.

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good

contact is not made, the plug may overheat

or the internal temperature fuse may blow.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be

sure the electrical accessory being used is

turned OFF.

●When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do

not allow water to contact the outlet.

SIC3325

Automatic transmission models

SIC3247

Manual transmission models

SIC3273

CLOCK POWER OUTLET

2-40 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

FRONT

To open the ashtray lid, push the lid down and

release it s

To empty the ashtray, pull out s

The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

Push the lighter in all the way s

3, then release

it. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out.

Return the lighter to its original position after

use.

CAUTION

●The cigarette lighter socket is a power

source for the cigarette lighter element only.

The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a

power source for any other accessory is not

recommended.

●Do not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter.

REAR

To open the ashtray lid, pull s

To empty the ashtray, push down s

2, and pull

out.

SIC3219 SIC2570

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAYS

Instruments and controls 2-41

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the

cup holder is being used to prevent spilling

the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you

or your passenger.

●Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard

objects can injure you in an accident.

To open the cup holder, push the lid s

The flap s

Awill be folded down when inserting

a large container.

To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pull it up

as illustrated s

To open the cup holder, slide the lid s

Install the partition plate into the slit s

Automatic transmission models — Front

SIC3313

Manual transmission models — Front

SIC3274

STORAGE

2-42 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

To open the console boxes, push the knob s

and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until the lock

latches.

To open the cup holder, pull the lid.

Manual transmission models — Console box

SIC3275

Rear

SIC1846B

Sedan

SIC3276

Coupe

SIC3462

Instruments and controls 2-43

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

●Do not use bottle holder for any other ob-

jects that could be thrown about in the ve-

hicle and possibly injure people during sud-

den braking or an accident.

●Do not use bottle holder for open liquid

containers.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driv-

ing to prevent an accident.

To open the sunglasses holder, push s

CAUTION

●Do not use for anything other than glasses.

●Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses

holder while parking in direct sunlight. The

heat may damage the glasses.

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help

prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle s

To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.

To lock s

2/unlock s

3the glove box, use the

mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage,

see “KEYS” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section.

SIC3246 SIC3469

2-44 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console boxes, push up the knob

Aand pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until latched.

Automatic transmission models

SIC3245

Manual transmission models

SIC3277

Instruments and controls 2-45

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Removing the console lid (Coupe

model with manual transmission)

To remove the console lid:

1. Remove the hinge mask

using a screw-

driver wrapped with a cloth.

2. Loosen four screws, and remove the lid.

3. Tighten the two outside screws

4. Install the removed hinge mask

to the

original position.

REAR ARMREST POCKET (Sedan)

The pocket can store a first aid kit or other small

items.

Coupe — Manual transmission model

SIC3468

SIC1850

2-46 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

CARD HOLDER

Type A

Insert a card s

Ain the holder.

Type B and C

Pull the sun visor down s

1and slide a card s

in the card holder.

Type A

SIC3263

Type B

SIC2154A

Type C

SIC3463

Instruments and controls 2-47

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

COAT HOOKS

Sedan

The coat hooks are equipped beside the rear

personal lights.

CAUTION

Do not place items which are more than 2 lb (1

kg) on the hook.

Coupe

To use the coat hook, push the hook s

Ato

release.

CAUTION

Avoid hanging heavy goods on the hook.

STOWING GOLF BAGS (Coupe)

Normally, two standard golf bags can be stowed

in the trunk. Insert the top of the golf bag into

left side of the trunk room s

1then put the bag

forward s

2. Insert the top of the 2nd golf bag

into right side of the trunk room s

3and pull it

in all the way s

In some cases, you may not be able to stow two

golf bags in your vehicle, depending on their

sizes or types.

Sedan

SIC3248

Coupe

SIC3544 SIC3467

2-48 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

CARGO NET

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo

area from moving around while your vehicle is

driven.

To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the

retainers s

CAUTION

Avoid keeping heavy objects in the net.

TRUNK NET FOR EXTRA WINDOW

WASHER FLUID (Canada only; if so

equipped)

The trunk net is provided for holding a tank of

extra window washer fluid.

To install the net, place a commercially avail-

able tank in the right corner of the trunk and

then attach the hooks to the restrainers s

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have their

hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in

motion and before closing the windows. Use

the window lock switch to prevent unex-

pected use of the power windows.

●Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate

switches or controls and become trapped in

the window. Unattended children could be-

come involved in serious accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is in the ON position or for about 45

seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to

the OFF position. If the driver’s or front passen-

ger’s door is opened during this period of about

45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

SIC3320 SIC3317

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-49

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Main power window switch (driver’s

side)

1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window

3. Rear left passenger side window (Sedan

only)

4. Rear right passenger side window (Sedan

only)

5. Window lock button

To open or close the window, push down s

Aor

pull up s

Bthe switch and hold it. The main

switch (driver side switches) will open or close

all the windows.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the lock button s

Cis pushed in, only the

driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it in again to cancel.

Passenger side power window switch

The passenger side switch will open or close

only the corresponding window. To open or

close the window, push down or pull up the

switch and hold it.

Sedan

SIC3279

Coupe

SIC3286A SIC3241

2-50 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Automatic operation (for front door

windows or all door windows)

To fully open or close the window, completely

push down or pull up the switch and release it;

it need not be held. The window will automati-

cally open or close all the way. To stop the

window, just push or lift the switch in the

opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will cause the

window to open or close until the switch is

released.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately

before the closed position which cannot be de-

tected. Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before clos-

ing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught in

the window as it is closing, the window will be

immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the window is closed by automatic operation

when the ignition switch is in the ON position or

for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving condi-

tions, the auto reverse function may be activated

if an impact or load similar to something being

caught in the window occurs.

Sedan — Type A

SIC3289

Sedan — Type B

SIC3285

Coupe

SIC3288

Instruments and controls 2-51

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Automatic adjusting function (Coupe)

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from the

battery terminal, do not close either of the front

doors. The automatic window adjusting func-

tion will not work and the side roof panel may

be damaged.

The power window has an automatic adjusting

function. When the door is being opened, the

window is automatically lowered slightly to

avoid contact between the window and the side

roof panel. When the door is closed, the window

is automatically raised slightly.

While the automatic adjusting function does not

work, the window will be controlled as follows:

●When the door is opened, the window lowers

for approximately 2 seconds.

●While the door is open, the window cannot

be raised.

If the windows do not close

automatically

If the power window automatic function (closing

only) does not operate properly, perform the

following procedure to initialize the power win-

dow system.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Close the door.

3. Open the window more than halfway by

operating the power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold it

to close the window, and then hold the

switch more than 3 seconds after the

window is closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Oper-

ate the window by the automatic function

to confirm the initialization is complete.

6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other

windows.

If the power window automatic function does

not operate properly after performing the pro-

cedure above, have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

●In an accident you could be thrown from the

vehicle through an open moonroof. Always

use seat belts and child restraints.

●Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend

any portion of their body out of the moonroof

opening while the vehicle is in motion or

while the moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from

the moonroof before opening.

●Do not place any heavy object on the moon-

roof or surrounding area.

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof only operates when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The automatic moonroof is operational for

about 45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position. If the driver’s door

or the passenger’s door is opened during this

period of about 45 seconds, power to the

moonroof is canceled.

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

2-52 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatically when the

moonroof is opened. However, it must be

closed manually.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push

the UP s

1side of the moonroof switch and

release it; it need not be held. To tilt down the

moonroof, push the DOWN s

2side.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push the

CLOSE s

1or OPEN s

2side of the moonroof

switch and release it; it need not be held. The

roof will automatically open or close all the way.

To stop the roof, push the switch once more

while it is opening or closing.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately

before the closed position which cannot be de-

tected. Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before clos-

ing the moonroof.

If the control unit detects something caught in

the moonroof when it is closing, the moonroof

will be immediately opened.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the moonroof is closed by automatic operation

when the ignition switch is in the ON position or

for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position.

If the moonroof cannot be closed automatically

when the auto reverse function activates due to

a malfunction, push and hold the CLOSE s

side of the moonroof switch.

Depending on the environment or driving condi-

tions, the auto reverse function may be activated

if an impact or load similar to something being

caught in the moonroof occurs.

If the moonroof does not operate

If the moonroof does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initialize the

moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by

repeatedly pushing the CLOSE

side of

the moonroof switch.

2. Push and hold the CLOSE

side of the

moonroof switch to tilt the moonroof up.

3. Release the moonroof switch after the

moonroof moves slightly up and down.

4. Push and hold the OPEN

side of the

moonroof switch to fully tilt the moonroof

down.

5. Check if the moonroof switch operates

normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly after

performing the procedure above, have your

vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer.

SIC3243

Instruments and controls 2-53

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

MAP LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn the light

on or off.

PERSONAL LIGHTS (Sedan)

Rear

Push the button as illustrated to turn the light

on or off.

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

The interior light control switch has three posi-

tions: ON, DOOR and OFF.

ON position

When the switch is in the ON position s

1the

map lights and rear personal lights will illumi-

nate.

DOOR position

When the switch is in the DOOR position s

2, the

map lights and rear personal lights will illumi-

nate under the following conditions:

SIC3249 SIC3250 SIC3251

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-54 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

●ignition switch is switched to the LOCK

position

– remain on for about 15 seconds.

●doors are unlocked by pushing the UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key or door handle

request switch with the ignition switch in the

LOCK position

– remain on for about 15 seconds.

●any door is opened and then closed with the

ignition switch in the LOCK position

– remain on for about 15 seconds.

●any door is opened with the ignition switch

in the ACC or ON position

– remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go

off.

The lights will also turn off after 30 minutes

when the lights remain illuminated after the ig-

nition switch has been pushed to the OFF or

LOCK position to prevent the battery from be-

coming discharged.

When the auto interior illumination is set to the

OFF position (see “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND

SETTINGS” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems” section),

the lights will illuminate under the following

condition:

●any door is opened with the ignition switch

in any position

– remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go

off.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF position s

3, the

lights will not illuminate, regardless of the

condition.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with

the engine stopped. This could result in a dis-

charged battery.

Type A

SIC2064

Type B

SIC2555A

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-55

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when

the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

When the cover is closed, the light will turn off.

The lights will also turn off after 30 minutes

when the lights remain illuminated to prevent

the battery from becoming discharged.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is

opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light

will turn off.

The light will also turn off after 30 minutes when

the light remains illuminated after the ignition

switch has been pushed to the OFF or LOCK po-

sition to prevent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver provides a

convenient way to consolidate the functions of

up to three individual hand-held transmitters

into one built-in device.

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver:

●Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) de-

vices such as garage doors, gates, home and

office lighting, entry door locks and security

systems.

●Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLinkTwill retain all program-

ming.

Once HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver is pro-

grammed, retain the original transmitter for fu-

ture programming procedures (Example: new ve-

hicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver

buttons should be erased for security purposes.

For additional information, see “PROGRAMMING

HomeLinkT” later in this section.

TRUNK LIGHT HOMELINKTUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

2-56 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

WARNING

●Do not use HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver

with any garage door opener that lacks

safety stop and reverse features as required

by federal safety standards. (These stan-

dards became effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage

door opener which cannot detect an object in

the path of a closing garage door and then

automatically stop and reverse, does not

meet current federal safety standards. Using

a garage door opener without these features

increases the risk of serious injury or death.

●During programming procedure, your garage

door or security gate may open or close.

Make sure that people and objects are clear

of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are

programming.

●Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off

while programming HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT

To program your HomeLinkTTransceiver to op-

erate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener,

home or office lighting, you need to be at the

same location as the device. Note: Garage door

openers (manufactured after 1996) have “rolling

code protection”. To program a garage door

opener equipped with “rolling code protection”;

you will need to use a ladder to get up to the

garage door opener motor to be able to access

the “smart or learn” program button.

1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer

HomeLinkTbuttons (to clear the memory)

until the indicator light

blinks (after 20

seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held trans-

mitter 1-3 inches away from the

HomeLinkTsurface.

SIC3182

Instruments and controls 2-57

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

3. Using both hands, simultaneously push

and hold both the HomeLinkTbutton you

want to program and the hand-held trans-

mitter button.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4

has been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indica-

tor light on HomeLinkTflashes, changing

from a “slow blink” to a “rapid blink”.

This could take up to 90 seconds. When

the indicator light blinks rapidly, both

buttons may be released. The rapidly

flashing light indicates successful pro-

gramming. To activate the garage door or

other programmed device, push and hold

the programmed HomeLinkTbutton - re-

leasing when the device begins to acti-

vate.

5. If the indicator light on HomeLinkTblinks

rapidly for two seconds and then turns

solid, HomeLinkThas picked up a “rolling

code” garage door opener signal. You will

need to proceed with the next steps to

train HomeLinkT, completing the pro-

gramming may require a ladder and an-

other person for convenience.

6. Push and release the program button

located on the garage door opener’s mo-

tor to activate the “training mode”. This

button is usually located near the an-

tenna wire that hangs down from the

motor. If the wire originates from under a

light lens, you will need to remove the

lens to access the training button.

NOTE:

Once you have pushed and released the training

button on the garage door opener’s motor and

the “training light” is lit, you have 30 seconds in

which to perform step 7. For convenience, use

the help of a second person to assist when per-

forming this step.

7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushing

and releasing the garage door opener

training button) and firmly push and re-

lease the HomeLinkTbutton you’ve just

programmed. Push and release the

HomeLinkTbutton up to three times to

complete the training.

8. Your HomeLinkTbutton should now be

programmed. To program the remaining

HomeLinkTbuttons for additional door or

gate openers, follow steps 2 through 8

only.

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to “clear”

all previously programmed HomeLinkTbuttons.

If you have any questions or are having diffi-

culty programming your HomeLinkTbuttons,

please refer to the HomeLinkTweb site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

SIC3183

2-58 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKTFOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-

held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2

seconds. To program your hand-held transmit-

ter to HomeLinkT, continue to push and hold

the HomeLinkTbutton (note steps 2 through 4

under “Programming HomeLinkT”) while you

push and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held

transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator

light flashes rapidly (indicating successful

programming).

NOTE:

If programming a garage door opener, etc., it is

advised to unplug the device during the “cy-

cling” process to prevent possible damage to

the garage door opener components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKT

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver (once pro-

grammed) may now be used to activate the

garage door, etc. To operate, simply push the

appropriate programmed HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver button. The red indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS

If HomeLinkTdoes not quickly learn the hand-

held transmitter information:

●replace the hand-held transmitter batteries

with new batteries.

●position the hand-held transmitter with its

battery area facing away from the

HomeLinkTsurface.

●push and hold both the HomeLinkTand

hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-

ruption.

●position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in

(50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLinkT

surface. Hold the transmitter in that position

for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLinkTis not

programmed within that time, try holding

the transmitter in another position - keeping

the indicator light in view at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficul-

ties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer Af-

fairs Department. The phone numbers are lo-

cated in the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however

to clear all programming, push and hold the two

outside buttons and release when the indicator

light begins to flash (in approximately 20 sec-

onds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINKTBUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLinkTUniversal Trans-

ceiver button, complete the following.

1. Push and hold the desired HomeLinkT

button. Do not release the button until

step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position the

hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127

mm) away from the HomeLinkTsurface.

3. Push and hold the hand-held transmitter

button.

4. The HomeLinkTindicator light will flash,

first slowly and then rapidly. When the

indicator light begins to flash rapidly,

release both buttons.

Instruments and controls 2-59

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

The HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver button

has now been reprogrammed. The new device

can be activated by pushing the HomeLinkT

button that was just programmed. This proce-

dure will not affect any other programmed

HomeLinkTbuttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

been programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the

manufacturer or dealer of those devices for

additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to

reprogram the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver

with your new transmitter information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Op-

eration is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference and (2) This device must accept any

interference that may be received, including in-

terference that may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and complies

with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modi-

fications not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

2-60 Instruments and controls

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ............................................. 3-2

Intelligent key ................................. 3-2

Valet hand-off.................................. 3-3

Doors ............................................ 3-4

Locking with mechanical key .................... 3-4

Opening and closing windows with the

mechanical key ................................ 3-4

Locking with inside lock knob ................... 3-5

Locking with power door lock switch............. 3-5

Child safety rear door lock (Sedan) .............. 3-6

Intelligent key system ............................. 3-6

Intelligent key operating range .................. 3-8

Door locks/unlocks precaution ..................3-8

Intelligent key operation ........................ 3-9

Battery saver system ...........................3-11

Warning signals................................3-11

Troubleshooting guide ......................... 3-12

Remote keyless entry system...................... 3-14

How to use remote keyless entry system ........ 3-14

Hood.............................................3-17

Trunk lid .........................................3-17

Trunk lid release switch........................ 3-18

Trunk open request switch ..................... 3-18

Trunk release power cancel switch.............. 3-19

Interior trunk lid release .......................3-20

Fuel-filler door ................................... 3-21

Opening the fuel-filler door .................... 3-21

Fuel-filler cap .................................3-22

Tilting telescopic steering column ................. 3-23

Manual operation (if so equipped) ..............3-24

Electric operation (if so equipped) ..............3-24

Sun visors ....................................... 3-25

Mirrors .......................................... 3-25

Inside mirror.................................. 3-25

Outside mirrors ............................... 3-27

Vanity mirror..................................3-28

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .........3-29

Entry/exit function (Automatic Transmission

Sedan models)................................3-29

Seat synchronization function ..................3-30

Memory storage............................... 3-31

System operation ............................. 3-32

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe

place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If

you lose your keys, see an INFINITI dealer for

duplicates by using the key number. INFINITI

does not record any key numbers so it is very

important to keep track of your key number

plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, this key can be

duplicated by an INFINITI dealer.

1. Two Intelligent Keys

2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent Keys)

3. Key number plate

INTELLIGENT KEY

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelli-

gent Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s

Intelligent Key system components and INFINITI

Vehicle Immobilizer System components. As

many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered

and used with one vehicle. The new keys must

be registered by an INFINITI dealer prior to use

with the Intelligent Key system and INFINITI

Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle.

Since the registration process requires erasing

all memory in the Intelligent Key components

when registering new keys, be sure to take all

Intelligent Keys that you have to the INFINITI

dealer.

CAUTION

●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you

when driving. The Intelligent Key is a preci-

sion device with a built-in transmitter. To

avoid damaging it, please note the

following.

– The Intelligent Key is water resistant;

however, wetting may damage the Intelli-

gent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is completely

dry.

– Do not bend, drop or strike it against an-

other object.

– Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in a place where tem-

peratures exceed 140°C (60°F).

– Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

– Do not use a magnet key holder.

– Do not place the Intelligent Key near an

electric appliance such as a television set

or personal computer.

SPA2315

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

– Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come

into contact with water or salt water, and

do not wash it in a washing machine. This

could affect the system function.

●If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI

recommends erasing the ID code of that In-

telligent Key. This will prevent the Intelli-

gent Key from unauthorized use to unlock

the vehicle. For information regarding the

erasing procedure, please contact an

INFINITI dealer.

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it

into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob

returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the

doors, trunk lid, glove box and trunk pass-

through lid, if they are equipped with a key

cylinder.

See “DOORS” later in this section and “TRUNK

LID” later in this section, “STORAGE” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section and “SEATS”

in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system” section.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed in

the Intelligent Key.

VALET HAND-OFF

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give

them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the

mechanical key with you to protect your belong-

ings.

To prevent the glove box and the trunk from

being opened during valet hand-off, follow the

procedures below.

1. Push the trunk release power cancel

switch to the CANCEL side.

2. Remove the mechanical key from the In-

telligent Key.

3. Lock the glove box and the trunk pass-

through with the mechanical key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet,

keeping the mechanical key in your

pocket or bag for insertion into the Intel-

ligent Key when you retrieve your vehicle.

See “TRUNK LID” later in this section, “STOR-

AGE” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-

tion and “SEATS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section.

SPA2033

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

WARNING

●Always have the doors locked while driving.

Along with the use of seat belts, this pro-

vides greater safety in the event of an acci-

dent by helping to prevent persons from be-

ing thrown from the vehicle. This also helps

keep children and others from unintention-

ally opening the doors, and will help keep

out intruders.

●Before opening any door, always look for and

avoid oncoming traffic.

●Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate

switches or controls. Unattended children

could become involved in serious accidents.

LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock

or unlock all doors simultaneously using the

mechanical key.

●Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the

front of the vehicle s

1will lock all doors.

●Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once

to the rear of the vehicle s

2will unlock the

driver’s door. After returning the key to the

neutral position s

3, turning it to the rear

again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.

●You can switch the lock system to the mode

that allows you to open all the doors when

the key is turned once. (See “HOW TO USE

SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, cli-

mate, audio, phone and voice recognition

systems” section.)

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS

WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY

The driver’s door key operation also allows you

to open and close all door windows.

To open the windows, turn the driver’s door key

cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer than

1 second . The door is unlocked and the window

keeps opening while turning the key.

This function can also be performed by pushing

and holding the door UNLOCK button of the

Intelligent Key. (See “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM” later in this section.)

To close the windows, turn the driver’s door key

cylinder to the front of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second . The door is locked and the

window keeps closing while turning the key.

SPA1999

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door individually, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position s

1then close the

door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the

unlock position s

When locking the door without an Intelligent

Key, be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key

inside the vehicle.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will lock

or unlock all the doors. The switches are lo-

cated on the driver’s and front passenger’s door

armrests.

To lock the doors, push the power door lock

switch to the lock position s

1with the driver’s

or front passenger’s door open, then close the

door.

When locking the door this way, be certain not to

leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.

To unlock the doors including the fuel-filler

door, push the power door lock switch to the

unlock position s

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver or front

passenger) is moved to the lock position with

the Intelligent Key in the port and any door

open, all doors will lock and unlock automati-

cally. With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle

(not in the Intelligent Key port) and any door

open, all doors will unlock automatically and a

chime will sound after the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelligent

Key from being accidentally locked inside the

vehicle.

SPA1814 SPA2300

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

(Sedan)

The child safety rear door lock helps prevent

doors from being opened accidentally, espe-

cially when small children are in the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position s

1, the

rear doors can be opened only from the outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the unlock

position s

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric

medical equipment. Those who use a pace-

maker should contact the electric medical

equipment manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door locks using the remote controller function

or pushing the request switch on the vehicle

without taking the key out from a pocket or

purse. The operating environment and/or con-

ditions may affect the Intelligent Key system

operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you

when operating the vehicle.

●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle

when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating

with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The

Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio

waves. Environmental conditions may interfere

with the operation of the Intelligent Key system

under the following operating conditions.

●When operating near a location where strong

radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV

tower, power station and broadcasting sta-

tion.

●When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,

and CB radio.

●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

●When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal com-

puter.

●When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depend-

ing on the operating conditions, the battery’s

life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is

discharged, replace it with a new one.

SPA2301

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv-

ing radio waves, if the key is left near equip-

ment which transmits strong radio waves, such

as signals from a TV and personal computer, the

battery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-

tery, see “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACE-

MENT” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

Because the steering wheel is locked electri-

cally, unlocking the steering wheel with the

ignition switch in the LOCK position is impos-

sible when the vehicle battery is completely

discharged. Pay special attention that the ve-

hicle battery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered

and used with one vehicle. For information

about the purchase and use of additional Intel-

ligent Keys, contact an INFINITI dealer.

CAUTION

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which con-

tains electrical components, to come into

contact with water or salt water. This could

affect the system function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If

the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately

wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex-

tended period in an area where tempera-

tures exceed 140°C (60°F).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key

holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-

ment that produces a magnetic field, such as

a TV, audio equipment and personal

computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to oper-

ate the vehicle. For information regarding the

erasing procedure, contact an INFINITI dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch.

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged

or strong radio waves are present near the

operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s

operating range becomes narrower, and the

Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)

from each request switch.

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper the request

switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone who does not

carry the Intelligent Key to push the request

switch to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION

●Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the Intel-

ligent Key is outside the vehicle.

●After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

key with you and then lock the doors.

SPA2341A

SPA2326

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the trunk, make sure you carry the key

with you and then close the trunk.

●Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

●The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing

doors with the door handle request switch)

can be set to remain inactive. (See “VEHICLE

INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in the “4.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems” section.) INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the key out from your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch s

Awithin the range of

operation.

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

When you lock or unlock the doors or the trunk

lid, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn

(or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma-

tion. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator

and horn mode” later in this section.

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position, push the ignition switch to the

OFF position and make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

SPA2316 SPA2303

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

3. Push the driver’s or front passenger’s

door handle request switch while carrying

the Intelligent Key with you.*3

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key

while any door is open.

*3: Doors will not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch with the Intelligent

Key inside the vehicle.

However, when an Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-

other registered Intelligent Key.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Push the driver’s or front passenger’s

door handle request switch once while

carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and

outside chime sounds once. The corre-

sponding door and the fuel-filler door will

unlock.

3. Push the door handle request switch

again within 5 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and

outside chime sounds once again. All the

doors will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless

one of the following operations is performed

within 1 minute after pushing the request switch

while the doors are locked. If during this

1-minute time period, the request switch is

pushed, all doors will be locked automatically

after another 1 minute.

●Opening any door

●Pushing the ignition switch SPA2317

Sedan

SPA2304

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the trunk open request switch

for

more than 1 second.

2. The trunk will unlatch. An outside chime

will sound four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-

dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection

is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent

Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will

sound and the trunk will open.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met for 60

minutes, the battery saver system will cut off

the power supply to prevent battery discharge.

●The ignition switch is in the ACC position,

and

●All doors are closed, and

●The selector lever is in the P (Park) position

(Automatic Transmission models).

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-

pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelli-

gent Key listed on the following chart or to help

prevent the vehicle from being stolen, chime or

beep sounds inside and outside the vehicle and

a warning displays in the dot matrix liquid

crystal display.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warning

displays, be sure to check the vehicle and

Intelligent Key.

See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in this

section and “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DIS-

PLAY” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

Coupe

SPA2404

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch to

stop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the

display and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously (Automatic

Transmission models).

The selector lever is not in the P

(Park) position.

Shift the selector lever to the P

(Park) position.

When opening the driver’s door to

get out of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds

continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

The Intelligent Key is in the Intelli-

gent Key port.

Remove the Intelligent Key from the

Intelligent Key port.

When closing the door after getting

out of the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on the

display, the outside chime sounds 3

times and the inside warning chime

sounds for approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

The SHIFT P warning appears on the

display and the outside chime

sounds continuously (Automatic

Transmission models).

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

OFF position and the selector lever is

not in the P (Park) position.

Move the selector lever to the P

(Park) position and push the ignition

switch to the OFF position.

When closing the door with the in-

side lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for ap-

proximately 3 seconds and all the

doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the ve-

hicle or trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle re-

quest switch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for ap-

proximately 2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the ve-

hicle or trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

The door handle request switch is

pushed before the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switch

after the door is closed.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for ap-

proximately 10 seconds and the

trunk lid opens.

The Intelligent Key is inside the

trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel-filler

door, activate the panic alarm and open the

windows by pushing the buttons on the Intelli-

gent Key from outside the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the Intelli-

gent Key is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key

can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft

(10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance

depends upon the conditions around the ve-

hicle.)

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with

one vehicle. For information concerning the

purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys,

contact an INFINITI dealer.

The lock and unlock buttons on the Intelligent

Key will not operate when:

●the distance between the Intelligent Key and

the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).

●the Intelligent Key battery runs down.

After locking with the remote keyless entry

function, pull the door handle to make sure the

doors are securely locked.

The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies de-

pending on the environment. To securely oper-

ate the lock and unlock buttons, approach the

vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

When you lock or unlock the doors or the trunk

lid, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn

(or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma-

tion. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator

and horn mode” later in this section

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position (Automatic Transmission mod-

els), push the ignition switch to the OFF

position and make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the LOCK button

on the

Intelligent Key.

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key

while any door is open.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Push the UNLOCK button

on the

Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

driver’s door and fuel-filler door will un-

lock.

3. Push the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key again within 5 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once again.

All the doors will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless

one of the following operations is performed

within 1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK but-

ton on the Intelligent Key while the doors are

locked. If during this 1-minute time period, the

SPA2010

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key is

pushed, all doors will be locked automatically

after another 1 minute.

●Opening any door

●Pushing the ignition switch

Opening windows

To open the windows, push the door UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key for about 3

seconds after the door is unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK

button.

Window cannot be closed using the Intelligent

Key.

The door windows can be opened or closed by

turning the metal key in a door lock. (See

“DOORS” earlier in this section.)

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the TRUNK button

on the

Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The trunk will unlatch.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the alarm to call attention as

follows:

1. Push the PANIC button

on the

Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights

will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

●It has run for 25 seconds, or

●Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key

are pushed. (Note: Panic button should be

pushed for more than 1 second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn

mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK button s

1is pushed, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps

once. When the UNLOCK button s

2is

pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can be

switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button

is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the

horn operates.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Hazard indicator and horn mode

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system (Using

door handle request switch or

trunk open request switch)

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME -

twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME -

once

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME - 4

times

Remote keyless entry system

(Using , or

button)

HAZARD - twice

HORN - once HAZARD - once

HORN - none HAZARD - none

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system (Using

door handle request switch or

trunk open request switch)

HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none

Remote keyless entry system

(Using , or

button)

HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none

Switching procedure

Push the LOCK s

1and UNLOCK s

buttons on the Intelligent Key simultaneously

for more than 2 seconds to switch the mode

from one to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set the hazard

indicator mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3

times.

When pushing the buttons to set the hazard

indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator

flashes once and the horn chirps once.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

located below the instrument panel; the

hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever

up at the front of the

hood with your fingertips and raise the

hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the

hood down to latch both the right and left

locks. Push the hood down to lock the

hood securely into place.

WARNING

●Make sure the hood is completely closed and

latched before driving. Failure to do so could

cause the hood to fly open and result in an

accident.

●If you see steam or smoke coming from the

engine compartment, to avoid injury do not

open the hood.

WARNING

●Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be

drawn into the vehicle. See “EXHAUST GAS

(Carbon monoxide)” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

●Closely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from playing

and becoming locked in the trunk where they

could be seriously injured. Keep the car

locked, with the trunk closed, when not in

use, and prevent children’s access to Intelli-

gent Keys.

SPA2318

HOOD TRUNK LID

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH

The trunk lid release switch s

Ais located on the

instrument panel.

To open the trunk lid, push the release switch

down as illustrated. To close, push the trunk lid

down.

You can open the trunk lid with Intelligent Key.

(See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” page 3-6 or

“REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM” earlier in

this section.)

TRUNK OPEN REQUEST SWITCH

The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the

trunk open request switch when the Intelligent

Key is within the operating range of the trunk

lock/unlock function regardless of the inside

lock knob position. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYS-

TEM” earlier in this section.)

SPA2307

Sedan

SPA2304

Coupe

SPA2404

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCEL

SWITCH

When the switch located inside the glove box is

in the OFF position s

A, the power to the trunk

lid will be canceled and the trunk lid cannot be

opened by the trunk lid release switch, the

trunk open request switch with the Intelligent

Key carried with you or the TRUNK button on the

Intelligent Key.

When you have to leave the vehicle with a valet

and want to keep your belongings safe in the

glove box and the trunk, push this switch to OFF

and lock the glove box with the mechanical key.

Then leave the vehicle and the Intelligent Key

with the valet and keep the mechanical key with

you.

See “KEYS” earlier in this section.

To connect the power to the trunk lid, push the

switch to the ON s

Bposition.

SPA2308

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from playing and

becoming locked in the trunk where they could

be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with

the trunk lid securely latched, when not in use,

and prevent children’s access to Intelligent

Keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism allows

opening of the trunk lid in the event that people

become locked inside the trunk or in the event

of the loss of electrical power such as a dis-

charged battery.

Releasing inside the trunk

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the

release handle s

1until the lock releases and

push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is

made of a material that glows in the dark after

a brief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located on the back of the trunk

lid as illustrated.

Releasing from the rear seat

Sedan

You can also access the release handle through

the trunk pass-through (rear seat armrest). (See

“ARMREST” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts

and supplemental restraint system” section.)

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, pull the

release handle towards front of vehicle until the

lock releases.

Sedan

SPA2327

Coupe

SPA2402

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Coupe

You can access the release handle by folding

the rear seat.

Pull the strap s

1, located at center bottom of

the seatback sideways, and then fold down the

seatback s

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, pull the

release handle towards front of vehicle until the

lock releases.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel-filler

door by using one of the following operations,

then push the right side of the door (Sedan) or

push the left side of the door (Coupe).

●Push the door handle request switch with

the Intelligent Key carried with you.

●Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent

Key.

●Insert the mechanical key into the door lock

cylinder and turn it to the rear of the vehicle.

●Push the power door lock switch to the

UNLOCK position.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and

lock all doors by operating the door handle

request switch, the LOCK button on the Intelli-

gent Key, the mechanical key or the power door

lock switch.

Coupe

SPA2122

Sedan

SPA2340

Coupe

SPA1562A

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

●Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly

explosive under certain conditions. You

could be burned or seriously injured if it is

misused or mishandled. Always stop engine

and do not smoke or allow open flames or

sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after

the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automati-

cally. Continued refueling may cause fuel

overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possi-

bly a fire.

●Use only an original equipment type fuel-

filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in

safety valve needed for proper operation of

the fuel system and emission control sys-

tem. An incorrect cap can result in a serious

malfunction and possible injury. It could

also cause the malfunction indicator light to

come on.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to at-

tempt to start your vehicle.

●Do not fill a portable fuel container in the

vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause

an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or

gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the

risk of serious injury or death when filling

portable fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the ground

when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the

container while you are filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel contain-

ers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it

away with water to avoid paint damage.

●Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure

to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may

cause the malfunction indicator light

(MIL) to illuminate. If the light illumi-

nates because the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and con-

tinue to drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving trips. If the

light does not turn off after a few driv-

ing trips, have the vehicle inspected by an

INFINITI dealer.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the

cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten,

turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks

are heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder s

while refueling.

WARNING

●Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-

ing. You could lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

●Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer

to you than is necessary for proper steering

operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag

inflates with great force. If you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting sideways

or out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You

may also receive serious or fatal injuries

from the air bag if you are up against it when

it inflates. Always sit back against the seat-

back and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

Sedan

SPA2338

Coupe

SPA2403

TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

MANUAL OPERATION (if so equipped)

Tilt or telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever s

1down and adjust the

steering wheel up, down, forward or rearward to

the desired position.

Push the lock lever up securely to lock the

steering wheel in place.

ELECTRIC OPERATION (if so equipped)

Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the lever to adjust the steering wheel up

or down, forward or rearward to the desired

position.

Entry/Exit function operation (if so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system will

make the steering wheel move up automatically

when the driver’s door is opened with the

ignition switch in the LOCK position. This lets

the driver get into and out of the seat more

easily.

For more information, see “AUTOMATIC DRIVE

POSITIONER” later in this section.

SPA2328 SPA2312

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

CAUTION

●Do not store the main sun visor before stor-

ing the extension sun visor.

●Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly

downward.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing

down the main sun visor

2. To block glare from the side, remove the

main sun visor from the center mount and

swing it to the side

3. Draw out the extension sun visor

from

the main sun visor to block from further

glare.

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the height and the angle of the inside

mirror to the desired position.

SIC3451

SPA2343

SUN VISORS MIRRORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Manual anti-glare type

The night position s

1will reduce glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position s

2when driving in day-

light hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when necessary,

because it reduces rear view clarity.

Automatic anti-glare type

Type A

The inside mirror is designed so that it auto-

matically changes reflection according to the

intensity of the headlights of the following

vehicle.

The anti-glare system will be automatically

turned on when you push the ignition switch to

the ON position.

When the system is turned on, the indicator

light s

Bwill illuminate and excessive glare from

the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be

reduced.

Push the switch s

Ato make the inside

rearview mirror operate normally and the indi-

cator light will turn off. Push the switch

again to turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the sensor s

Cor

apply glass cleaner on it. Doing so will reduce

the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in im-

proper operation.

For HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver (if so

equipped), see “HomeLinkTUNIVERSAL TRANS-

CEIVER” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

SPA2143 SPA2253

Type A

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

08/10/07—pattie X

Type B

The inside mirror is designed so that it auto

matically changes reflection according to the

intensity of the headlights of the following

vehicle.

When the inside mirror isin the 0|0(AUTO)

position s

1, excessive glare from the head-

lights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced.

The AUTO indicator light s

A(green) will be on.

When the switch of the inside mirror is in the

0s0(OFF) position s

2, the inside mirror will

operate normally.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the

passenger side are closer than they appear. Be

careful when moving to the right. Using only

this mirror could cause an accident. Use the

inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to

properly judge distances to other objects.

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is located on

the armrest.

The outside mirror will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Turn the switch right or left to select the right or

left side mirror s

1, then adjust using the con-

trol switch s

Defrosting outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

The outside mirrors will be heated when the

rear window defroster switch is operated.

SPA2157

Type B

SPA2319

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

w—

—

08/10/07—pattie X

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the

rear of the vehicle.

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun

visor and pull up the cover.

SPA1829

Type A

SIC2064

Type B

SIC2555A

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

The automatic drive positioner system has three

features:

●Entry/exit function (Automatic Transmission

Sedan models)

●Seat synchronization function

●Memory storage

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (Automatic

Transmission Sedan models)

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat

and steering column will automatically move

when the automatic transmission selector lever

is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver

to get into and out of the driver’s seat more

easily. Note that the function is set to disabled

as the factory default setting.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and the

steering wheel will move up when the driver’s

door is opened with the ignition switch in the

LOCK position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return

to the previous positions when one of the

following is operated:

●When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ACC position after the driver’s door is

closed.

●When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position.

The driver’s seat will not return to the previous

positions if the seat or steering adjusting

switch is operated when the seat is at the exit

position.

Cancel or activate entry/exit function

The selector lever must be in the P (Park)

position with the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The entry/exit function can be activated or

canceled by pressing and holding the SET

switch for more than 10 seconds.

Activating or canceling the entry/exit function

using the SET switch also activates or cancels

the seat synchronization function.

The indicator lights on the memory switches (1

and 2) will blink once when the function is

canceled, and the indicator lights will blink

twice when the function is activated. Note that

the indicator lights may illuminate after 5 sec-

onds while holding the SET switch. This indi-

cates readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to

a stored memory position. Keep the SET switch

pressed for more than 10 seconds to turn on or

off the entry/exit function.

The entry/exit function can also be activated or

canceled if the “Lift Steering Wheel on Exit” key

or “Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit” key is turned

to ON or OFF in the “Comfort & Conv.” settings.

(See “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in

the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems” section.)

Initialize entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the entry/exit function will not work

though this function was set on before. In such

a case, after connecting the battery or replacing

with a new fuse, open and close the driver’s

door more than two times after the ignition

switch is turned from the ON position to the

LOCK position. The entry/exit function will be

activated.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so

equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION

The seat synchronization function automatically

adjusts the positions of the steering wheel and

outside mirrors when the seat is adjusted using

the power seat switches.

However, the steering wheel and outside mir-

rors will not move if the seat is adjusted over

the maximum thresholds. The system considers

that the steering wheel and outside mirror

adjustments are not necessary because the

seat may not be adjusted for the driving posi-

tion. Note that the function is set to disabled as

the factory default setting.

The seat synchronization function operates un-

der the following conditions:

●The ignition switch is in the ON position.

●The selector lever is in the P (Park) position

(Automatic Transmission models) or the

parking brake is applied (Manual Transmis-

sion models).

●The seatback is raised (Coupe).

If the outside mirrors or the steering wheel

reaches its maximum adjustment, the function

is automatically disabled. Restart the function

by selecting a previously stored seat memory

position using the memory switches (1 or 2). An

Intelligent Key that was previously linked to the

stored seat memory can also be used to restart

the function.

If a seat position was not previously stored in

the seat memory, restart the function by adjust-

ing the steering wheel and outside mirrors

manually for your best driving position and then

drive the vehicle above 4 MPH (7 km/h).

Cancel or activate seat

synchronization function

For Automatic Transmission models:

The selector lever must be in the P (Park)

position with the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

For Manual Transmission models:

The parking brake must be applied with the

ignition switch in the OFF position.

The seat synchronization function can be acti-

vated or canceled by pushing and holding the

SET switch for more than 10 seconds while the

ignition switch is in the OFF position.

Activating or canceling the seat synchronization

function using the SET switch also activates or

cancels the entry/exit function (Sedan).

The indicator lights on the memory switches (1

and 2) will blink once when the function is

canceled, and the indicator lights will blink

twice when the function is activated. Note that

the indicator lights may illuminate after 5 sec-

onds while holding the SET switch. This indi-

cates readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to

a stored memory position. Keep the SET switch

pushed for more than 10 seconds to turn on or

off the seat synchronization function.

For Automatic Transmission Sedan models, the

seat synchronization function can also be acti-

vated if both the “Lift Steering Wheel on Exit”

key and “Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit” key are

turned to ON or canceled if either the “Lift

Steering Wheel on Exit” key or “Slide Driver

Seat Back on Exit” key or both are turned to OFF

SPA2322

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

in the “Comfort & Conv.” settings. (See

“VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in the

“4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems” section.)

MEMORY STORAGE

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering

column and outside mirrors can be stored in the

automatic drive positioner memory. Follow

these procedures to use the memory system.

1. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual transmission models:

Apply the parking brake.

2. Raise the seatback (Coupe).

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

4. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column

and outside mirrors to the desired posi-

tions by manually operating each adjust-

ing switch. For additional information, see

“SEATS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section and “TILTING TELESCOPIC STEER-

ING COLUMN” page 3-23 and “OUTSIDE

MIRRORS” earlier in this section.

5. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-

onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2)

fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will stay on for approximately 5 sec-

onds after pushing the switch.

If memory is stored in the same memory

switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking Intelligent Key to a stored

memory position

The Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored

memory position with the following procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory

position.

2. While the indicator light for the memory

switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-

onds, push the button on the Intel-

ligent Key. If the indicator light blinks, the

Intelligent Key is linked to that memory

setting.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position,

and then push the button on the Intelli-

gent Key. The driver’s seat, steering wheel and

outside mirrors will move to the memorized

position.

Confirming memory storage

●Push the ignition switch to the ON position

and push the SET switch. If the main memory

has not been stored, the indicator light will

come on for approximately 0.5 second.

When the memory has stored in position, the

indicator light will stay on for approximately

5 seconds.

●If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In

this case, reset the desired position using

the previous procedure.

●If optional Intelligent Keys are added to your

vehicle, the memory storage procedure to

switch 1 or 2 and linking Intelligent Key

procedure to a stored memory position

should be performed again for each Intelli-

gent Key. For additional Intelligent Key infor-

mation, see “KEYS” earlier in this section.

Selecting the memorized position

1. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual transmission models:

Apply the parking brake.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

2. Raise the seatback (Coupe).

3. Use one of the following methods to move

the driver’s seat, the outside mirrors and

the steering wheel.

●Push the ignition switch to the ON position

and push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for

at least 1 second.

●Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s

door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully

for at least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, steering column and out-

side mirrors will move to the memorized

position with the indicator light flashing,

and then the light will stay on for approxi-

mately 5 seconds.

For manual transmission models, the memory

positions can be selected even when the engine

is running. In this case, move the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position and apply the parking

brake. Then, perform step 2.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will not

work or will stop operating under the following

conditions:

●When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH

(7 km/h).

●When the adjusting switch for the driver’s

seat and steering column is turned on while

the automatic drive positioner is operating.

●When the memory switch 1 or 2 is not

pushed for at least 1 second.

●When the seat, steering column and outside

mirrors have already been moved to the

memorized position.

●When no position is stored in the memory

switch.

●When the parking brake is released (MT

models).

●When the speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h)

while the parking brake is applied (MT mod-

els).

To restart the drive positioner system, move

the parking brake to off and on.

●When the engine is started while moving the

automatic drive positioner.

●When the AT selector lever is moved from the

P (Park) position to any other position. (How-

ever, it will not be canceled if the switch is

pushed while the seat and steering column

are returning to the previous positions

(entry/exit function).)

●When the driver’s door remains open for

more than 45 seconds and the ignition

switch is not in the ON position.

●When the seatback is folded (Coupe).

●While the walk-in function operates (Coupe).

●The seat synchronization function is auto-

matically disabled if the outside mirrors or

steering wheel reaches its maximum adjust-

ment.

●The seat synchronization function will not

move if the seat is adjusted over one of the

following maximum thresholds:

– Seat sliding: 3.0 in (76 mm)

– Seatback reclining: 9.1 degrees

– Seat lifter (rear side): 0.8 in (20 mm)

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems

Safety note ....................................... 4-2

Center multi-function control panel ................. 4-2

How to use INFINITI controller ...................4-4

How to use touch screen (models with

navigation system) ............................. 4-4

Start-up screen (models with navigation

system) .......................................4-6

Start menu ....................................4-6

How to select menus on the screen .............. 4-7

Vehicle information and settings.................... 4-7

How to use status button ....................... 4-7

How to use brightness control and display

on/off button .................................. 4-7

How to use info button .........................4-8

How to use setting button ..................... 4-12

How to use aux button ........................ 4-18

Rearview monitor (if so equipped) ................. 4-19

How to read the displayed lines ................4-20

How to park with predicted course lines.........4-20

How to adjust the screen ...................... 4-21

Operating tips ................................4-22

Ventilators.......................................4-22

Automatic climate control .........................4-23

Automatic climate control (TYPE A)..............4-24

Automatic climate control (TYPE B)..............4-26

In-cabin microfilter ............................4-28

Servicing climate control.......................4-28

Audio system ....................................4-29

Audio operation precautions ...................4-29

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

changer ......................................4-38

CompactFlash (CF) player operation

(models with navigation system)................4-42

iPodTplayer operation (if so equipped) .........4-44

Music box hard drive (models with

navigation system) ............................4-45

CD/CF (CompactFlash) care and cleaning ........ 4-53

Steering-wheel-mounted controls for audio ......4-54

Antenna ...................................... 4-55

Auxiliary input jacks...........................4-56

Car phone or CB radio ............................4-56

BluetoothThands-free phone system (if so

equipped) ....................................... 4-57

Regulatory information.........................4-58

Model with navigation system ..................4-59

Models without navigation system ..............4-65

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Speaker adaptation (SA) mode ................. 4-75

Troubleshooting guide .........................4-77

INFINITI voice recognition system (models with

navigation system) ...............................4-78

Command list .................................4-78

Using the system..............................4-85

Voice command learning function...............4-88

Troubleshooting guide ......................... 4-91

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

WARNING

●Do not disassemble or modify this system. If

you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or

electric shock.

●Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack

of sound. Continued use of the system may

result in accident, fire or electric shock.

●In case you notice any foreign object in the

system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice

smoke or smell coming from it, stop using

the system immediately and contact your

nearest INFINITI dealer. Ignoring such condi-

tions may lead to accidents, fire, or electric

shock.

●Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply

the parking brake to view the images on the

front center display screen using devices

connected to the auxiliary input jacks.

Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme

temperature conditions [below 24°C (220°F)

and above 158°C (70°F)]. Operating this system

under these conditions may result in system

malfunctions.

1. “STATUS ” status display button (P. 4-7)

2, 6, 7, 10, 11. For navigation system control

buttons (Refer to the sepa-

rate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual.)

3. INFINITI controller (P. 4-4)

4. “PHONE ” BluetoothTHands-Free Phone

System button (P. 4-57)

5. “ OFF ” brightness control and dis-

play ON/OFF button (P. 4-7)

8. “AM·FM·SAT ” band selector button

(P. 4-29)

9. “DISC·AUX ” selector button (P. 4-18,

P. 4-29)

12. “INFO ” vehicle and navigation informa-

tion button (P. 4-8)

13. “SETTING ” button (P. 4-12)

With navigation system

SAA1523

SAFETY NOTE CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

1. “AUX ” button (P. 4-18)

2. “RADIO AM·FM ” band selector button

(P. 4-29)

3. INFINITI controller (P. 4-4)

4. “ OFF ” brightness control and dis-

play ON/OFF button (P. 4-7)

5. “INFO ” vehicle information button (P. 4-8)

6. “DISC ” selector button (P. 4-29)

7. “STATUS ” status display button (P. 4-7)

8. “SETTING ” button (P. 4-12)

When you use this system, make sure the

engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not run-

ning (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will

use up all the battery power, and the engine will

not start.

Without navigation system

SAA1524 With navigation system

SAA1541

Without navigation system

SAA1508

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

HOW TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER

Choose an item on the display using the main

directional buttons s

2(or additional directional

buttons s

6with navigation system) or center

dial s

3, and push the ENTER button s

1for

operation.

If you push the BACK button s

4before the

setup is completed, the setup will be canceled

and/or the display will return to the previous

screen. This button can also be used to delete

characters that have been input.

After the setup is completed, push the BACK

button s

4and return to the previous screen.

For the VOICE button s

5functions, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models

with navigation system)

CAUTION

●The glass screen on the liquid crystal display

may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp

object. If the glass breaks, do not touch the

liquid crystalline material, which contains a

small amount of mercury. In case of contact

with skin, wash immediately with soap and

water.

●To clean the display, never use a rough cloth,

alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of sol-

vent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning

agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the

panel.

●Do not splash any liquid such as water or car

fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid

will cause the system to malfunction.

To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot

be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then

operate the navigation system.

Touch screen operation

With this system, the same operations as those

for the INFINITI controller are possible using the

touch screen operation.

Selecting the item

Touch an item to select. When you select the

“Audio” settings, touch the “Audio” area s

1on

the screen.

Touch the BACK s

2button to return the previ-

ous screen.

SAA1542

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Adjusting the item

Touch the + s

1or 2s

2button to adjust the

settings.

Touch the UP s

3or DOWN s

4button to move to

the previous or next page.

Inputting characters

Touch the letter or number s

There are some options available when input-

ting characters.

●Uppercase:

Shows uppercase characters.

●Lowercase:

Shows lowercase characters.

●Space:

Inserts a space.

●Symbols:

Shows symbols such as the question mark

(?).

●Delete:

Deletes the last character that has been

input with one touch. Push and hold the

button to delete all of the characters.

●OK:

Completes character inputs.

Touch screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or

detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then

wipe the screen.

SAA1543 SAA1617

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

START-UP SCREEN (models with

navigation system)

When you push the ignition switch to the ACC or

ON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is

displayed on the screen. When you read and

agree with the warning, push the ENTER button.

If you do not push the ENTER button, you will

not be able to use the NAVI system.

To proceed to the NAVI system, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

START MENU

The start menu can be displayed using the

ENTER switch on the steering-wheel-mounted

controls.

1. While the map (if so equipped) or status

screen is displayed, push and hold the

ENTER switch until the “Menu Options”

screen appears.

2. Highlight the preferred item tilting the

ENTER switch up or down, and then push

the ENTER switch.

Available items

Destination/Route

These items are for the navigation system. If

your vehicle is equipped with the navigation

system, see the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual for details.

Information

Displays the information screen. It is the same

screen that appears when you push the INFO

button.

Settings

Displays the settings screen. It is the same

screen that appears when you push the

SETTING button.

SAA1454 SAA1525 SAA1591

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE

SCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the display

screen in menus. Whenever a menu selection is

made or menu item is highlighted, different

areas on the screen provide you with important

information. See the following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the current

screen. (i.e. push SETTING button > choose

“Comfort & Conv.” menu item.)

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose within that

menu screen. (i.e. Auto Interior Illumination,

etc.)

3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:

Shows that the INFINITI controller may be

used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and

select more options.

4. Screen Count:

Shows the number of menu selections avail-

able for that screen (i.e. 1/9).

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available)

about the menu selection currently high-

lighted. (i.e. Cabin lighting when un-

locking doors.)

HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON

To display the status of the audio, climate

control system, fuel consumption and naviga-

tion system (if so equipped), push the STATUS

button. The following information will appear

when the STATUS button is pushed.

Audio →Audio and Climate control system →

Audio and fuel consumption →Audio and Navi-

gation system (if so equipped) →Audio

HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CONTROL

AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON

Push the “ OFF ” button to switch the

display brightness to the daytime mode or the

nighttime mode, and to adjust the display

brightness using the INFINITI controller while

the indicator is displayed at the bottom of the

screen.

The display brightness can also be adjusted

using the brightness UP button (+) or bright-

ness DOWN button (2) (models with navigation

system).

Push the “ OFF ” button for more than 2

seconds to turn the display off. Push the button

again to turn the display on.

SAA1510

VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON

The display screen shows vehicle and naviga-

tion (if so equipped) information for your con-

venience.

The information shown on the screen should be

a guide to determine the condition of the ve-

hicle. See the following for details.

Vehicle information display

1. Push the INFO button on the control panel.

The screens as illustrated will appear.

2. Choose an item using the INFINITI control-

ler and push the ENTER button.

3. After viewing or adjusting the information

on the following screens, push the BACK

button to return to the INFORMATION

menu.

For the items “Traffic Info.”, “Where am I?”,

“GPS Satellite Info.” and “Navigation Version”,

refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual.

With navigation system

SAA1545

Without navigation system

SAA1511

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Fuel Economy information

The distance to empty, average fuel economy

and current fuel economy (shown on the right

side bar) will be displayed for reference.

To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use the

INFINITI controller to highlight the “Reset ” key

and push the ENTER button.

If the “View ” key is highlighted with the

INFINITI controller and the ENTER button is

pushed, the average fuel consumption history

will be displayed in graph form along with the

average for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

The unit can be converted between “US” and

“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON”

later in this section.)

The fuel economy information may differ from

the information displayed on the dot matrix

liquid crystal display. This is due to the timing

difference in updating the information and does

not indicate a malfunction.

Maintenance information

To set the maintenance interval for Reminders 1

to 4, choose an item using the INFINITI control-

ler and push the ENTER button.

You can also set to display a message to remind

you that the maintenance needs to be per-

formed.

The following example shows how to set Re-

minder 1. Use the same steps to set the other

maintenance information.

SAA1546

SAA1547

SAA1554

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

1. Reset the driving distance to the new

maintenance schedule.

2. Set the interval (mileage) of the mainte-

nance schedule. To determine the recom-

mended maintenance interval, refer to

your “INFINITI Service and Maintenance

Guide”.

3. To display the reminder automatically

when the set trip distance is reached,

highlight the “Interval Reminder ” key

with the INFINITI controller and push the

ENTER button.

4. To return the display to MAINTENANCE

INFO., push the BACK button.

Maintenance information display cannot be op-

erated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the

vehicle in a safe place to see the information.

The unit can be converted between “US” and

“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON”

later in this section.)

The Reminder will be automatically displayed as

shown when both of the following conditions

are met:

●the vehicle is driven the set distance and the

ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK posi-

tion.

●the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or

ON position the next time you drive the

vehicle after the set value has been reached.

To return to the previous display after the

“MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed,

push the BACK button.

SAA1555 SAA1611

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is dis-

played each time the ignition switch is pushed

to the ON position until one of the following

conditions is met:

●“Reset Distance” is selected.

●“Interval Reminder” is set to OFF.

●the maintenance interval is set again.

Voice Recognition information

(models with navigation system)

If you use the voice recognition system for the

first time or you do not know how to operate it,

you can display the voice command list or user

guide for confirmation. (See “INFINITI VOICE

RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation

system)” later in this section for the details.)

Command List

Displays a list of voice commands that the

system can recognize.

User Guide

Displays a simplified operation manual of the

voice recognition system and how to use the

voice commands.

SAA1592

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON

The display as illustrated will appear when the

SETTING button is pushed.

For navigation settings, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

To show the “Comfort & Conv.” item, push the

ignition switch to the ON position.

Audio settings

The following display will appear when pushing

the SETTING button, selecting the “Audio ” key

with the INFINITI controller and pushing the

ENTER button.

Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade

To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound

balance, select the “Bass ”, “Treble ”, “Balance

”or“Fade ” key and adjust it with the INFINITI

controller.

These items can also be adjusted by pushing

and turning the AUDIO knob.

With navigation system

SAA1556

Without navigation system

SAA1514

SAA1557

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Precision Phased Audio (if so equipped)

When this item is turned to ON, super high pitch

sound and super low pitch sound are empha-

sized and midrange sound is played naturally.

Speed Sensitive Vol.

Sound volume is increased according to the

vehicle speed. Choose the effect level from OFF

(0) to 5.

Driver’s Audio Stage (if so equipped)

When this feature is turned on, better sound

will be provided to the driver’s position. The

driver can enjoy a more crisp and clear sound

that is specialized for the driver’s position.

The effect of this feature depends on the types

of music that are played. For some music, it may

be difficult to realize the difference of this

feature.

Display settings

The following display will appear when pushing

the SETTING button, selecting “Display ” key

with the INFINITI controller and pushing the

ENTER button.

Display

To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button

and turn the “Display” indicator off. The other

method is to push the “ OFF ” button for

more than 2 seconds.

When any mode button is pushed with the

screen off, the screen turns on for further

SAA1559 SAA1761

With navigation system

SAA1560

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

operation. The screen will turn off automatically

5 seconds after the operation is finished.

To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON

position, or push the “ OFF ” button.

Brightness/Contrast/Background Color

To adjust the brightness and contrast of the

screen, select the “Brightness ”or“Contrast ”

key and push the ENTER button.

Then, you can adjust the brightness to “Darker”

or “Brighter”, and the contrast to “Lower” or

“Higher” using the multi-function controller.

For information on the “Background Color ” key,

refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual.

Navigation settings (if so equipped)

For the details of “Navigation” settings, refer to

the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

Volume and Beeps settings (models

with navigation system)

The following display will appear when pushing

the SETTING button, selecting the “Volume and

Beeps ” key with the INFINITI controller and

pushing the ENTER button.

Guidance Vol.

To adjust the guidance voice volume louder or

softer, select the “Guidance Volume” and ad-

just it with the INFINITI controller.

You can also adjust the guidance voice volume

by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice

guidance is being announced.

Guidance Voice

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear

voice guidance in the navigation (if so

equipped) operation or in other operations.

Ringer Vol./Incoming Call/Outgoing Call

For the details of these items, see

“BLUETOOTHTHANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM”

later in this section.

Button Beeps

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a

beep sound when you use a button.

SAA1561 SAA1562

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Beeps settings (models without

navigation system)

The following display will appear when pushing

the SETTING button, selecting the “Beeps ” key

with the INFINITI controller and pushing the

ENTER button.

Button Beeps

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a

beep sound when you use a button.

Phone settings (if so equipped)

For the details of “Phone” settings, see

“BLUETOOTHTHANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM”

later in this section.

Clock settings (if so equipped)

The following display will appear when pushing

the SETTING button, selecting the “Clock ” key

with the INFINITI controller and pushing the

ENTER button.

On-screen Clock

When this item is turned to ON, a clock is

always displayed in the upper right corner of

the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactly

because it is always adjusted by the GPS sys-

tem.

Clock Format

Choose either the 12-hour clock display or the

24-hour clock display.

Offset Adjust

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per

minute.

Daylight Saving Time

Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time

application.

Time Zone

Choose the time zone from the following

●Pacific

●Mountain

●Central

●Eastern

●Atlantic

●Newfoundland

●Hawaii

●Aleutian

●Alaska

SAA1612 SAA1563

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Comfort & Conv. settings

The following display will appear when pushing

the SETTING button, selecting the “Comfort &

Conv. ” key with the INFINITI controller and

pushing the ENTER button. This key does not

appear on the display until the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position.

Auto Interior Illumination

When this item is turned to ON, the interior

lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked.

Auto Headlights Sensitivity (if so equipped)

Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic head-

lights higher (right) or lower (left).

Auto Headlights Off Delay (if so equipped)

Choose the duration of the automatic headlight

off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and

180 second periods.

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval

When this item is turned to ON, the wiper

interval is adjusted automatically according to

the vehicle speed.

Selective Door Unlock

When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s

door is unlocked first after the door unlock

operation. When the door handle request

switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side

door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corre-

sponding door is unlocked first. All the doors

can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is

performed again within 5 seconds.

When this item is turned to OFF, all the doors

will be unlocked after the door unlock operation

is performed once.

Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock

When this item is turned to ON, door

lock/unlock function by pushing the door

handle request switch will be activated.

Lift Steering Wheel on Exit (if so equipped)

When this item is turned to ON, the steering

wheel moves upward for easy exit if the ignition

switch is in the OFF position and the driver’s

door is opened. After getting into the vehicle

and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC

position, the steering wheel moves to the pre-

vious position.

Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit (if so equipped)

When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s seat

moves backward for easy exit if the ignition

SAA1564 SAA1565

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

switch is in the OFF position and the driver’s

door is opened. After getting into the vehicle

and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC

position, the driver’s seat moves to the previous

position.

Return All Settings to Default

Select this item, push the ENTER button and

choose “YES” if you want to return all settings

to the default.

Others settings (models with

navigation system)

The following display will appear when pushing

the SETTING button, selecting the “Others ” key

with the INFINITI controller and pushing the

ENTER button.

Voice Recognition

●Command List

Displays the voice command list on the

screen.

●Minimize Voice Feedback

When this item is turned to ON, vocal feed-

back is reduced if the voice recognition

system is activated.

●Voice Command Learning

Select this item to have the INFINITI Voice

Recognition system learn the user’s voice.

The system can memorize the voices of up to

three persons.

For the details of this function, see “INFINITI

VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with

navigation system)” later in this section.

●User Guide

Select this item to learn the operation flow of

the INFINITI Voice Recognition system with

the help of a step-by-step guide.

Language/Units

●Select Language

Choose the “Select Language ” key and push

the ENTER button. Select “English” or

“Français” for your favorite display appear-

ance.

●Select Units

Choose the “Select Units ” key and push the

ENTER button. Select “US” (Mile, °C, MPG) or

“Metric” (km, °F, L/100 km) for your favorite

display appearance.

SAA1566

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Language/Units settings (models

without navigation system)

The following display will appear when pushing

the SETTING button, selecting the

“Language/Units ” key with the INFINITI control-

ler and pushing the ENTER button.

Select Language

Choose the “Select Language ” key and push

the ENTER button. From the following display,

select “English”, “Français” or “Español” for

your favorite display appearance.

Select Units

Choose the “Select Units ” key and push the

ENTER button. From the following display, se-

lect “US” (Mile, °C, MPG) or “Metric” (km, °F,

L/100 km) for your favorite display appearance.

HOW TO USE AUX BUTTON

Images being played can be switched to the

center display if NTSC compatible devices are

connected to the auxiliary input jacks in the

center console. (See “AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS”

later in this section.) Push the AUX button to

perform switching.

The above display will appear when the “Set-

ting ” key is selected using the INFINITI

controller.

SAA1092 SAA1567

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Display Mode

Choose the display mode from the following:

●Normal

●Wide

●Cinema

When the selector lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows

view to the rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in

detecting large stationary objects to help avoid

damaging the vehicle. The system will not de-

tect small objects below the bumper and may

not detect objects close to the bumper or on the

ground.

WARNING

●The rear view camera is a convenience but it

is not a substitute for proper backing up.

Always turn and check that it is safe to do so

before backing up. Always back up slowly.

●Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor dif-

fer from actual distance because a wide-

angle lens is used. Objects in the RearView

Monitor will appear visually opposite than

when viewed in the rear view and outside

mirrors.

●Make sure that the trunk is securely closed

when backing up.

●Do not put anything on the rear view camera.

The rear view camera is installed on the

trunk finisher or on the rear spoiler.

●When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water may

enter the camera unit causing water conden-

sation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an

electric shock.

●Do not strike the camera. It is a precision

instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction

or cause damage resulting in a fire or an

electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera. Do not

scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or snow

from the cover.

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

bumper line s

Aare displayed on the monitor.

They are indicated as reference distances to

objects. Displayed lines indicate distances 1.5

feet (red) s

1, 3 feet (yellow) s

2, 7 feet (green)

3and 10 feet (green) s

4[0.5 m (red), 1 m

(yellow), 2 m (green) and 3 m (green)] from the

lower part of the bumper line s

When the steering wheel is turned with the

selector lever in the R (Reverse) position, the

predicted course line s

Bis displayed on the

monitor.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

●Always turn and check that it is safe to do so

before backing up. Always back up slowly.

●Use the displayed lines as a reference. The

lines are highly affected by the number of

occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road

condition and road grade.

●If the tires are replaced with different sized

tires, the predicted course line may be dis-

played incorrectly.

●On a snow-covered or slippery road, there

may be a difference between the predicted

course line and the actual course line.

●If the battery is disconnected or becomes

discharged, the predicted course lines may

be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs,

please perform the following procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock

while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road for

more than 5 minutes.

●When the steering wheel is turned with the

ignition switch in the ACC position, the pre-

dicted course lines may be displayed

incorrectly.

●The distance guide line and the vehicle

width line should be used as a reference only

when the vehicle is on a level paved surface.

The distance viewed on the monitor is for

reference only and may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle and dis-

played objects.

●When backing-up the vehicle up a hill ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are further than

they appear. When backing-up the vehicle

down a hill objects viewed in the monitor are

closer than they appear. Use the inside mir-

ror or glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

The vehicle width and predicted course lines are

wider than the actual width and course.

SAA1099

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed

on the screen as illustrated when the

selector lever is moved to the R (Reverse)

position. The predicted course lines

will appear when the steering wheel is

turned to the right or left.

3. Back up the vehicle to the parking space

while referring to the predicted course

lines. Do not rely completely on the infor-

mation displayed on the screen. Confirm

the safety of the vehicle by visually check-

ing around the vehicle.

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the

vehicle width lines

parallel to the

parking space

while referring to the

predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the selector lever to the

P (Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,

Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView

Monitor, push the SETTING button with the

RearView Monitor on, select the item key and

adjust the level using the INFINITI controller.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint and

Color of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle

is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly

applied and the engine is not running.

SAA1137

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

OPERATING TIPS

●When the selector lever is shifted to R, the

monitor screen automatically changes to the

RearView Monitor mode. However, the radio

can be heard.

●It may take some time until the RearView

Monitor or the normal screen is displayed

after the selector lever has been shifted to R

from another position or to another position

from R. Objects may be distorted momen-

tarily until the RearView Monitor screen is

displayed completely.

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display

objects. This is not a malfunction.

●When strong light directly enters the cam-

era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

This is not a malfunction.

●Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light. This is not a malfunction.

●The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-

tor may differ somewhat from those of the

actual object.

●Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark place or at night. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

●If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,

the RearView Monitor may not clearly dis-

play objects. Clean the camera.

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to

clean the camera. This will cause discolora-

tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth

dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent

and then wipe with a dry cloth.

●Do not damage the camera as the monitor

screen may be adversely affected.

●Do not use wax on the camera window. Wipe

off any wax with a clean cloth dampened

with mild detergent diluted with water.

Center ventilators

SAA1499

Side ventilators

SAA1500

VENTILATORS

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction

of ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the vents

are closed.

: This symbol indicates that the vents

are open.

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who would

normally require the support of others alone

in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone

either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in

a closed vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly fatal in-

juries to people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for long

periods as it may cause the interior air to

become stale and the windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the automatic

climate control system.

When the “STATUS” button is pushed, the

automatic climate control status screen will

appear. (See “HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON”

earlier in this section.)

You can individually set the driver and front

passenger side temperature using each tem-

perature control button.

Rear (if so equipped)

SAA0564B SAA1520

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

1. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON

button/Temperature control dial (driver

side)

2. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button

3. “ ” fan speed increase button

4. “ ” front defroster button

5. “MODE” manual air flow control button

6. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF

button/Temperature control dial (passen-

ger side)

7. “OFF” button for climate control system

8. “ ” fan speed decrease button

9. “ ” rear window defroster button

(See “REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIR-

ROR DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2. In-

struments and controls” section.)

10. “ ” intake air control button

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

(TYPE A)

Automatic operation

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round. The

system works automatically to control the in-

side temperature, air flow distribution and fan

speed after the preferred temperature is set

manually.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator

on the button will illuminate and AUTO will

be displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial (driver

side) to set the desired temperature.

Adjust the temperature to about 75°C (24°F)

for normal operation.

●The temperature of the passenger com-

partment will be maintained automati-

cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed

will also be controlled automatically.

Type A

SAA1527

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

3. You can individually set driver and front

passenger side temperature using each

temperature control button. When the

“DUAL” button is pushed or the passen-

ger side temperature control button is

turned, the DUAL indicator will come on.

To turn off the passenger side tempera-

ture control, push the “DUAL” button.

4. To turn off the climate control system,

push the “OFF” button.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate in this

mode. When you need to heat only, use this

mode.

1. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator

will turn off.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also

controlled automatically.

●Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-

tem may not work properly.

●Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the “ ” front defroster button.

(The indicator light on the button will

come on.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

●To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, push the fan speed increase but-

ton “ ” and set it to the maximum

position.

●As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to

the auto mode.

●When the “ ” front defroster button is

pushed, the air conditioner will automati-

cally be turned on at outside temperatures

above 23°C (25°F) to defog the windshield,

and the air recirculate mode will automati-

cally be turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defogging per-

formance.

Manual operation

Fan speed control

Push the fan speed increase “ ”orde-

crease “ ” buttons to manually control the

fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the intake air control button

“” to recirculate interior air inside

the vehicle. The indicator light on the “ ”

side will come on.

The air recirculation mode cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the front defrost-

ing mode “ ”.

Outside air circulation

Push the intake air control button

“” to draw outside air into the

passenger compartment. The indicator light on

the “ ” side will come on.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-

trolled automatically. To manually control the

intake air, push the intake air control button

“”. To return to the automatic con-

trol mode, push the intake air control button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

“ ” for about 2 seconds. The indi-

cator lights (both air recirculation and outside

air circulation sides) will flash twice, and then

the intake air will be controlled automatically.

Air flow control

Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control

button selects the air outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors.

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

To turn the system off

Push the OFF button.

1. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON

button/Temperature control dial

2. Air flow control button

3. “ ” Fan speed control dial

4. “OFF” button

5. “ ” front defroster button

6. “ ” rear window defroster button

(See “REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIR-

ROR DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2. In-

struments and controls” section.)

7. “ ” intake air control button

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

(TYPE B)

Automatic operation

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round. The

system works automatically to control the in-

side temperature, air flow distribution and fan

speed after the preferred temperature is set

manually.

Type B

SAA1526

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator

on the button will illuminate and AUTO will

be displayed.)

2. Use the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

Adjust the temperature to about 75°C (24°F)

for normal operation.

●The temperature of the passenger com-

partment will be maintained automati-

cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed

will also be controlled automatically.

3. To turn off the climate control system,

push the “OFF” button.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate in this

mode. When you need to heat only, use this

mode.

1. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator

will turn off.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also

controlled automatically.

●Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-

tem may not work properly.

●Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the “ ” front defroster button.

(The indicator light on the button will

come on.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

●To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, turn the “ ” fan speed con-

trol dial and set it to the maximum position.

●As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to

the auto mode.

●When the “ ” front defroster button is

pushed, the air conditioner will automati-

cally be turned on at outside temperatures

above 23°C (25°F) to defog the windshield,

and the air recirculate mode will automati-

cally be turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defogging per-

formance.

Manual operation

Fan speed control

Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to

manually control the fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the intake air control button

“” to recirculate interior air inside

the vehicle. The indicator light on the “ ”

side will come on.

The air recirculation mode cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the front defrost-

ing mode “ ”.

Outside air circulation

Push the intake air control button

“” to draw outside air into the

passenger compartment. The indicator light on

the “ ” side will come on.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-

trolled automatically. To manually control the

intake air, push the intake air control button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

“ ”. To return to the automatic con-

trol mode, push the intake air control button

“” for about 2 seconds. The indi-

cator lights (both air recirculation and outside

air circulation sides) will flash twice, and then

the intake air will be controlled automatically.

Air flow control

Pushing an air flow control button manually

controls the air flow and selects the air outlet to

the following settings.

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors.

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

To turn the system off

Push the OFF button.

The sunload sensor s

Aon the instrument panel

helps maintain a constant temperature. Do not

put anything on or around this sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The climate control system is equipped with an

in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,

dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner

heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace

the filter in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in the INFINITI Service and Mainte-

nance Guide. To replace the filter, contact an

INFINITI dealer.

The filter should be replaced if air flow is ex-

tremely decreased or when windows fog up eas-

ily when operating heater or air conditioning

system.

SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL

The climate control system in your INFINITI is

charged with a refrigerant designed with the

environment in mind. This refrigerant will not

harm the earth’s ozone layer. However, special

charging equipment and lubricant are required

when servicing your INFINITI air conditioner.

Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will

cause severe damage to your climate control

system. (See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section for climate con-

trol system refrigerant and lubricant recommen-

dations.)

Your INFINITI dealer will be able to service your

environmentally friendly climate control sys-

tem.

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant under high

pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air con-

ditioner service should be done only by an ex-

perienced technician with the proper

equipment.

SIC2768

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Radio

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position and push the “RADIO ” button to turn

on the radio. If you listen to the radio with the

engine not running, the ignition switch should

be pushed to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external

influences. Intermittent changes in reception

quality normally are caused by these external

influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may

influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your INFINITI radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance

radio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the

quality of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle,

even when the finest equipment is used. These

characteristics are completely normal in a given

reception area, and do not indicate any mal-

function in your INFINITI radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change

because of vehicle movement. Buildings, ter-

rain, signal distance and interference from

other vehicles can work against ideal reception.

Described below are some of the factors that

can affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones and other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the

device in a different location may reduce or

eliminate the noise.

FM radio reception

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30

miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range than

stereo FM. External influences may sometimes

interfere with FM station reception even if the

FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The

strength of the FM signal is directly related to

the distance between the transmitter and re-

ceiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path,

exhibiting many of the same characteristics as

light. For example they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to

fade and/or drift.

SAA0306

AUDIO SYSTEM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Static and flutter: During signal interference

from buildings, large hills or due to antenna

position, usually in conjunction with increased

distance from the station transmitter, static or

flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by

lowering the treble setting to reduce the treble

response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-

flected signals reach the receiver at the same

time. The signals may cancel each other, result-

ing in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM radio reception

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics. AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmit-

ter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic

lights.

Satellite radio reception

When the satellite radio is first installed or the

battery has been replaced, the satellite radio

may not work properly. This is not a malfunc-

tion. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite

radio ON for satellite radio to receive all of the

necessary data.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XMT

satellite radio service subscription. Satellite

radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and

Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite

radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna

can affect satellite radio performance. Remove

the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

Compact Disc (CD) player

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert

slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD

changer/player.

SAA0480

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed

could damage the CD and/or CD changer.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to the humidity. If this

occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ven-

tilate the player completely.

●The player may skip while driving on rough

roads.

●The CD player sometimes cannot function

when the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-

perature before use.

●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round

discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL

AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.

●Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

●CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched,

covered with fingerprints, or that have pin

holes may not work properly.

●The following CDs may not work properly:

–Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

–Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

–Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Do not use the following CDs as they may

cause the CD player to malfunction.

–3.1 in (8 cm) discs

–CDs that are not round

–CDs with a paper label

–CDs that are warped, scratched, or have

abnormal edges

●This audio system can only play prerecorded

CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn

CDs.

●If the CD cannot be played, one of the follow-

ing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

–Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly

(the label side is facing up, etc.).

–Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped

and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is an error due to the temperature inside

the player is too high. Remove the CD by

pushing the EJECT button, and after a short

time reinsert the CD. The CD can be played

when the temperature of the player returns to

normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio system

(only MP3 or WMA CD).

CompactFlash (CF) player

●Do not force a CF card into the slot. This could

damage the CF card and/or player.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to the humidity. If this

occurs, remove the CF card and dehumidify or

ventilate the player completely.

●The CF player sometimes cannot function

when the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-

perature before use.

●Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight.

●Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

iPodTplayer (if so equipped)

●Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed

properly on the vehicle center screen. We rec-

ommend using English language characters

with an iPodT.

●Large video podcast files cause slow re-

sponses in the iPodT. The vehicle center dis-

play may momentarily black out, but it will

soon recover.

●Improperly plugging in the iPodTmay cause

a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flick-

ering). Always make sure that the iPodTis

connected properly.

●The iPodTnano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-

nected during a seek operation.

●An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using the iPodT

nano (2nd Generation).

●Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on the iPodT.

●The iPodTnano (1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con-

nected during a seek operation. In this case,

please manually reset the iPodT.

●If you are using an iPodT(3rd Generation with

Dock connector), do not use very long names

for the song title, album name or artist name

to avoid the iPodTfrom resetting itself.

●Be careful not to do the following, or the

cable could be damaged and a loss of func-

tion may occur.

–Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40

mm) radius minimum).

–Twist the cable excessively (more than

180 degrees).

–Pull or drop the cable.

–Close the center console lid on the cable

or connectors.

–Store objects with sharp edges in the

storage where the cable is stored.

–Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.

●Do not connect the cable to the iPodTif the

cable and/or connectors are wet. It may dam-

age the iPodT.

●If the cable and connectors are exposed to

water, allow the cable and/or connectors to

dry completely before connecting the cable

to the iPodT(wait 24 hours for it to dry).

●If the connector is exposed to fluids other

than water, evaporative residue may cause a

short between the connector pins. In this

case, replace the cable, otherwise damage to

the iPodTand a loss of function may occur.

●If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, con-

nectors cracked, contamination such as liq-

uids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do not

use the cable and contact an INFINITI dealer

to replace the cable with a new one.

●When not in use for extended periods of time,

store the cable in a clean, dust free environ-

ment at room temperature and without direct

sun exposure.

●Do not use the cable for any other purposes

other than its intended use in the vehicle.

* iPodTis a trademark of Apple Inc., registered

in the U.S. and other countries.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlash (CF)

with MP3 or WMA

Explanation of terms

●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size

of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD/CF can reduce the file

size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling:

44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no

perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression

removes the redundant and irrelevant parts

of a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t

hear.

●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Mi-

crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music files.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

●Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is

called a multisession.

●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part

of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that con-

tains information about the digital music file

such as song title, artist, album title, encod-

ing bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag

information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* WindowsTand Windows MediaTare regis-

tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States of America

and/or other countries.

CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk

Corporation in the United States of America

and/or other countries. Playback order

Music playback order of the CD/CF with MP3 or

WMA is as illustrated above.

●The folder names of folders not containing

MP3/WMA files are not shown in the display.

SAA1025

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

●The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software, so

the files might not play in the desired order.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW:

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

CompactFlash card:

FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4

Tag information (Song title and Artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels

With navigation system:

Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Without navigation system:

Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation With navigation system: 128 characters

Without navigation system: 64 characters

Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big

Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.

Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour)

before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA

data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character

codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the

setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time before the music

starts playing. If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be re-

quired before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing

width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song when

playing. When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is

prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in the desired

order. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play

in the desired order.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

1. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob

2. Radio PRESET A-B-C selector button

3. Radio SCAN (tuning)/CD RPT (repeat) play

button

4. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button

for SEEK/TRACK

5. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK

6. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA folder selector /

AUDIO control knob

7. CD EJECT button

8. Radio station and CD selector buttons

9. CD LOAD button (if so equipped)

10. CompactFlash (CF) card slot (models with

navigation system) (located above the

ashtray)

No satellite radio reception is available unless a

satellite receiver and antenna are installed and

an XMTsatellite radio service subscription is

active.

SAA1532

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

1. AM·FM·SAT band select button

2. DISC·AUX button

1. RADIO AM·FM band select button

2. DISC button

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) CHANGER

For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO OP-

ERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this section.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XMT

satellite radio service subscription. Satellite

radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and

Guam.

It may take some time to receive the activation

signal after subscribing to the XMTsatellite

radio. After receiving the activation signal, an

available channel list will be automatically up-

dated in the radio. For XMT, push the ignition

switch from LOCK to ACC to update the channel

list.

Audio main operation

Head unit

The radio has an FM diversity reception system,

which employs two antennas printed on the

rear window. This system automatically

switches to the antenna which is receiving less

interference.

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically in both

radio reception and CD playback.

With navigation system

SAA1533

Without navigation system

SAA1504

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

ON·OFF/Volume control

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, and then push the ON·OFF/VOLUME

control knob while the system is off to call up

the mode (radio, CD or AUX) which was playing

immediately before the system was turned off.

While the system is on, pushing the

ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob turns the system

off.

Turn the ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob to ad-

just the volume.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push

the Audio control knob. When the display

shows the setting you want to change (Bass,

Treble, Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio

control knob to set the desired setting. For the

other setting methods, see “HOW TO USE SET-

TING BUTTON” earlier in this section.

This vehicle has some sound effect functions as

follows (if so equipped):

●Precision Phased Audio

●Speed Sensitive Volume

For more details, see “VEHICLE INFORMATION

AND SETTINGS” earlier in this section.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

or radio (FM/AM/SAT) band

select

Pushing the radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

AM →FM →XM →AM

When the radio band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the station

last played.

The last station/channel played will also come

on when the ON·OFF/VOL control knob is

pushed to ON.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XMT

satellite radio service subscription. Satellite

radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and

Guam.

If another audio source is playing when the

radio band select button is turned to ON, the

audio source will automatically be turned off

and the last radio station played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning)

●For AM and FM radio

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob for manual tun-

ing.

●For XM satellite radio

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to seek chan-

nels from all of the categories when any CAT

is not selected.

SEEK tuning/CATEGORY

(CAT)

●For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button

or to tune from low to high or high to

low frequencies and to stop at the next

broadcasting station.

●For XM satellite radio

Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button

or to tune to the first channel of the

next or previous category.

During satellite radio reception, the following

notices will be displayed under certain

conditions.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the

SAT tuner is connected.)

●OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)

●ANTENNA ERROR (Antenna connection error)

●LOADING (When the initial setting is per-

formed)

●UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-

scription is not active)

●INVALID CH (Invalid channel is received.)

SCAN tuning

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low

to high frequencies and stops at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the but-

ton again during this 5 seconds period will stop

SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to

that station.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within

5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

PRESET select

Push the PRESET select button to go to the next

PRESET. After choosing from the PRESET A, B or

C, you can select the desired channel using the

INFINITI controller or pushing the station preset

buttons s

1to s

6Station memory operations

Six stations/channels can be set for PRESET A,

B and C. The PRESET A, B and C function allows

you to store a combination of FM, AM and XM

stations for easy access.

1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using the

preset select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using the

SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.

3. Select the desired station/channel and

keep pushing any of the desired station

preset buttons

until a beep

sound is heard. (The radio mutes when

the select button is pushed.)

4. The channel indicator will then come on

and the sound will resume. Memorizing is

now complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse blows, the radio memory will be erased. In

that case, reset the desired stations.

Text

When the “Text” key is selected with the

INFINITI controller on the display and then the

ENTER button is pushed while the satellite radio

is being played, the text information will be

displayed on the screen.

●CH Name

●Category

●Name

●Title

●Other

Compact Disc (CD) player/changer

operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, push the LOAD button (if so equipped)

and insert the compact disc into the slot with

the label side facing up. The compact disc will

be guided automatically into the slot and start

playing.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on

the disc and the play time will appear on the

display.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-

cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

If the system has been turned off while the

compact disc was playing, pushing the

ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the compact

disc.

CD LOAD (if so equipped)

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the LOAD

button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the

loading position by pushing the CD insert select

button s

1to s

6, then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in succession,

push the LOAD button for more than 1.5 sec-

onds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the

display.

or PLAY

When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed with

the system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will

start to play.

When the DISC button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the

radio will automatically be turned off and the

compact disc will start to play.

When the DISC button is pushed while a CD is

loaded and a medium is played using the

auxiliary input jacks, you can toggle back and

forth between CD and medium.

Text

When the “Text” key is selected in the screen

using the INFINITI controller and then the ENTER

button is pushed while the CD is being played,

the music information below will be displayed

on the screen.

CD:

●Disc title

●Track title

CD with MP3 or WMA:

●Folder title

●File title

●Song title

●Album title

●Artist

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind)/APS (Automatic

Program Search) FF, APS

REW

When the (fast forward) or (rewind)

button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds

while the compact disc is being played, the

compact disc will play while fast forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released, the

compact disc will return to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is

being played, the next track or the beginning of

the current track on the CD will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to

select tracks when a CD is being played.

CD PLAY selection (if so equipped)

To change to another CD already loaded into the

player, push the CD play select buttons s

1to

6or choose a disc displayed on the screen

using the INFINITI controller.

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT button is pushed while the

compact disc is played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

(CD)

(CD with MP3 or WMA)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

CD EJECT

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD select

button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5

seconds.

To eject all the discs (if so equipped), push the

EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while the compact

disc is being played, the compact disc will come

out and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is not re-

moved, it will be pulled back into the slot to

protect it.

COMPACTFLASH (CF) PLAYER

OPERATION (models with navigation

system)

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, remove the cover s

Aand insert a CF

card s

Binto the slot. Then, push the

button repeatedly to switch to the Compact-

Flash mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

CompactFlash card was playing, pushing the

ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the Com-

pactFlash card.

PLAY

When the DISC button is pushed with the

system off and the CF card inserted, the system

will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a CF card

is inserted, push the DISC button repeatedly

until the center display changes to the Com-

pactFlash mode.

Text

When the “Text” key is selected on the screen

using the INFINITI controller and then the ENTER

button is pushed while the CF is being played,

the music information below will be displayed

on the screen.

●Folder title

●Song title

●Track title

●Album Title

●Artist

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind)/APS (Automatic

Program Search) FF, APS

REW

When the (fast forward) or (re-

wind) button is pushed for more than 1.5 sec-

SAA1568

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

onds while the CompactFlash card is being

played, the CompactFlash card will play while

fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button

is released, the CompactFlash card will return to

the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the CompactFlash

card is being played, the next track or the

beginning of the current track on the CF will be

played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to

select tracks when the CompactFlash card is

being played.

Folder selection

To change to another folder in the Compact-

Flash card, turn the MP3/WMA folder selector or

choose a folder displayed on the screen using

the INFINITI controller.

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT button is pushed while the

CompactFlash card is played, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CF EJECT

When the knob next to the CF slot is pushed

with the CF card inserted, the CF card will be

ejected.

Messages

The following messages will be displayed under

certain conditions.

●Reading Compact Flash (The system is read-

ing the CF card inserted in the slot.)

●No Compact Flash card (A CF card is not

inserted in the slot.)

●Compact Flash read error (The system can-

not read a CF card.)

●Unplayable file (The system cannot play a

music file.)

●No audio file (The CF card inserted in the slot

or its folder does not contain any music

files.)

Compatibility with other media

If a commercially available CompactFlash

adapter is inserted into the slot, your memory

media can also be used.

Type A

SAA1773

Type B

SAA1774

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

IPODTPLAYER OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Connecting iPodT

Open the console lid and connect the cable s

as illustrated, and then connect the other end of

the cable to your iPodTs

2. Your vehicle is

equipped with the specialized cable for con-

necting the iPodTto your vehicle audio unit.

The battery of your iPodTis charged during the

connection to the vehicle.

The display on the iPodTshows an INFINITI

screen when the connection is completed.

While connecting the iPodTto the vehicle, the

iPodTcan only be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet,

fully depress the center connector button to

unlatch the connector and pull the connector

straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the

cable from the iPodT, fully depress the side

connector buttons and pull the iPodTconnector

straight out of the iPodT.

* iPodTis a trademark of Apple Inc., registered

in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are available:

●Third generation iPodT(Firmware version 2.3

or later) (Audiobook and Podcast are not

available)

●Fourth generation iPodT(Firmware version

3.1.1 or later)

●Fifth generation iPodT(Firmware version

1.1.2 or later)

●iPodTmini (Firmware version 1.41 or later)

●iPodTphoto (Firmware version 1.2.1 or later)

●iPodTnano (Firmware version 1.2 or later)

Make sure that your iPodTfirmware is updated.

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, push the DISC/AUX button re-

peatedly to switch to the iPodTmode.

If the system has been turned off while the

iPodTwas playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL

control knob will start the iPodT.

DISC/AUX button

When the DISC/AUX button is pushed with the

system off and the iPodTconnected, the system

will turn on. If another audio source is playing

and the iPodTis connected, push the DISC

button repeatedly until the center display

changes to the iPodTmode.

Interface

The interface for iPodToperation shown on the

vehicle center display is similar to the iPodT

interface. Use the INFINITI controller and the

ENTER or BACK button to play the iPodTwith

your favorite settings.

The following items can be chosen from the

menu list screen. For further information about

each item, see the iPodTOwner’s Manual.

●Playlists

●Artists

●Albums

●Songs

●Podcasts

●Genres

●Composers

●Audiobooks

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

The following touch-panel buttons shown on

the screen are also available:

●: returns to the previous screen.

●: plays/pauses the music selected.

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind)/APS (Automatic

Program Search) FF, APS REW

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the iPodTis play-

ing, the iPodTwill play while fast forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released, the

iPodTwill return to the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the iPodTis play-

ing, the next track or the beginning of the

current track on the iPodTwill be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to

select tracks when the iPodTis playing.

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT button is pushed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

MUSIC BOX HARD DRIVE (models with

navigation system)

The Music Box hard drive audio system can

store songs from CDs being played. The system

has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage capacity and

can record up to 200 hours (approximately

2,900 songs).

The following CDs can be recorded in the Music

Box hard drive audio system.

●CDs without MP3/WMA files

●Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid

CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs

●Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) specifi-

cation in CD-Extras

●First session of multisession disc

The optional in-trunk CD changer cannot record

music to the hard disk.

Extreme temperature conditions [below 24°C

(220°F) and above 158°C (70°F)] could affect the

performance of the hard disk.

NOTE:

If the hard disk needs to be replaced due to a

malfunction, all stored music data will be

erased.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Recording songs

1. Operate the audio system to play a CD. For

the details of playing CDs, see “Compact

Disc (CD) player/changer operation” ear-

lier in this section.

2. Select the “REC ” key using the INFINITI

controller and push the ENTER button.

The system starts recording the track being

played and “REC CD” appears on the screen.

If the title information of the track being re-

corded is stored either in the hard-disk drive or

in the CD, the title is automatically displayed on

the screen. For title acquisition from the hard-

disk drive, music recognition technology and

related data are provided by GracenoteT.

To view the details of the track, select the Text

key by touching the screen or using the INFINITI

controller. The track name and album title are

displayed on the screen.

If a track is not recorded successfully due to

skipping sounds, the mark is displayed

behind the track number.

The Music Box hard drive cannot perform re-

cording under the following conditions.

●There is not enough space in the hard disk

●The number of albums reaches the maximum

of 500.

●The number of tracks reaches the maximum

of 3,000.

Automatic recording

If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned

to ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted.

(See “Music Box settings” later in this section.)

Stopping recording

To stop the recording, select the STOP button

by touching the screen or using the INFINITI

controller.

If the CD is ejected, the audio system is turned

off or the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position, the recording also stops.

SAA1613 SAA1614

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Playing recorded songs

Select the Music Box hard drive by using one of

the following methods.

●Push the source select switch on the steer-

ing wheel and the ENTER switch. (See

“STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CONTROLS

FOR AUDIO” later in this section.)

●Push the DISC button repeatedly until the

center display changes to the Music Box

mode.

●Give voice commands. (See “INFINITI VOICE

RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with naviga-

tion system)” later in this section.)

Stopping playback

The system stops playing when:

a. another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlash or

AUX) is selected.

b. the audio system is turned off.

c. the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind)/APS (Automatic

Program Search) FF, APS

REW

When the (fast forward) or (re-

wind) button is pushed for more than 1.5 sec-

onds while a track is being played, the track will

play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When

the button is released, the track will return to

the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while a track is being

played, the next track or the beginning of the

current track will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to

select tracks when a track is being played.

Play mode selection

To change to another album or artist, turn the

MP3/WMA folder selector.

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT button is pushed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

SAA1615

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

There are some options available during play-

back. Select one of the following that are

displayed on the screen, if necessary.

Refer to the following information for each item.

●Play by Artist

Plays songs by an artist whose music is

currently being played. The artists are sorted

in alphabetical order.

●Play by Album

Plays tracks in each album. The albums are

sorted in alphabetical order.

●Play by Date

Plays tracks in each album. The albums are

sorted in order of the date when they were

stored in the system.

●Play by Mood

Plays music from one of the following

moods: Relaxing Music, Lively Music, Slow

Music and Upbeat Music.

●Play by Category

Plays music from one of the following cat-

egories: My Favorites, Hit Songs, Kids’

Songs and Rarely Played.

●Search Artists

Displays a list of artists in alphabetical

order. Selecting an artist displays all of the

tracks by the artist and starts playing the

first track.

SAA1684 SAA1685

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Search Albums

Displays a list of albums in order of the date

when they were stored in the system. Select-

ing an album displays all of the tracks on the

album and starts playing the first track.

Select the “Sort” key to re-sort albums in

one of the following order: Rec. (Recorded)

Date, Name, Release Year, Artist.

●Search Song Details

Set the conditions and select the “Start

Song Search ” key to search for a desired

song that is stored in the system. The con-

ditions are as follows:

Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and Fast)

Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s and ’10s

and After)

Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist, Group

and Duo)

Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip

Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues,

Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age,

Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World,

Classical, Children’s and Other)

●Search Keywords

Input a search keyword using the keypad

displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO USE

TOUCH SCREEN (models with navigation sys-

tem)” earlier in this section.)

●Edit Albums

Select a category (Rec. (Recorded) Date,

Name, Released Year and Artist) and edit the

details using the keypad displayed on the

screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN

(models with navigation system)” earlier in

this section.)

●Music Box System Info.

Displays the following information about the

Music Box hard drive:

a. Music Box Used / Free Space (Information

about “Saved Album”, “Saved Track” and

“Remaining Time” is displayed.)

b. Mood Categories (Number of saved tracks

and their categories (Relaxing Music,

Lively Music, Slow Music, Upbeat Music

and Others) are displayed.)

c. Deleted Items (Information about the de-

leted tracks is displayed.)

d. Search Missing Titles

If titles are not displayed for CDs that have

been recorded, titles can be acquired using

one of the following methods:

— Retrieve from HDD

Searches the title using the database in

the hard disk.

— Retrieve from CF

Searches the title from the information

acquired on the Internet. Visit

www.infiniti.com/music-update/ for

details.

SAA1686

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

— Transfer Missing Titles to CF

Transfers the information of the album

recorded without titles to a Compact-

Flash card. Visit

www.infiniti.com/music-update/ for

details.

e. Music Box Settings (See “Music Box

settings” later in this section.)

f. CDDB Version (the version of the built-in

Gracenote Database is displayed.)

Text

Refer to the following information for each item.

●Set Mood

Set the mood category of the track to “Re-

laxing Music”, “Lively Music”, “Slow Music”

or “Upbeat Music”.

●Delete Track

Delete the track being played.

●Edit Info.

Edit the name of the track being played and

its artist using the keypad displayed on the

screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN

(models with navigation system)” earlier in

this section.)

The category of the track can also be set to

Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip Hop,

Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues,

Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age,

Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World,

Classical, Children’s and Others.

●Remove Track

Reset the mood setting of a track.

Restoring deleted data

Deleted music data can be restored by perform-

ing the following.

1. Select the “Menu ” key and then the

“Music Box System Info. ” key on the

screen.

2. Select the “Deleted Items ” key and then

the “Album/Track ” key.

3. Select the “Restore Album/Track ” key to

restore the deleted music data.

You can also listen to the beginning of each

track that has been deleted by performing the

following.

SAA1688

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

1. Select the “Menu ” key and then the

“Music Box System Info. ” key on the

screen.

2. Select the “Deleted Items ” key and then

the “Play Sample ” key.

Music Box settings

To set the Music box hard drive to your pre-

ferred settings, select the “Menu ” key during

playback, “Music Box System Info. ” key, and

“Music Box Settings ” key with the INFINITI

controller, and then push the ENTER button.

Automatic Recording

When this item is turned to ON, the Music Box

hard drive automatically starts recording when

a CD is inserted.

Recording Quality

Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132

kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.

Title Text Priority

Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc Data

Base) to acquire track information from the

Gracenote Database or set to CD TEXT to acquire

the information from CDs.

Delete ALL Music Box Data

Delete all music data stored on the hard disk.

Gracenote

NOTE:

●The information contained in the Gracenote

Database is not fully guaranteed.

●The service of the Gracenote Database on the

Internet may be stopped without prior notice

for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF

THE TERMS BELOW.

GracenoteTMusicIDTTerms of Use

This device contains software from Gracenote,

Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The

software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-

ware”) enables this application to do online

disc identification and obtain music-related in-

SAA1616

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

formation, including name, artist, track, and

title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online

servers (“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform

other functions. You may use Gracenote Data

only by means of the intended End-User func-

tions of this device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for

your own personal non-commercial use only.

You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or

transmit the Gracenote Software or any

Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE

NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERV-

ERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use

the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,

and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you

violate these restrictions. If your license termi-

nates, you agree to cease any and all use of the

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all

rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-

ware, and the Gracenote Servers, including all

ownership rights. Under no circumstances will

Gracenote become liable for any payment to

you for any information that you provide. You

agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights

under this Agreement against you directly in its

own name.

The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique

identifier to track queries for statistical pur-

poses. The purpose of a randomly assigned

numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote

MusicID service to count queries without know-

ing anything about who you are. For more

information, see the web page for the

Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote Mu-

sicID Service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or warran-

ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy

of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote

Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete

data from the Gracenote Servers or to change

data categories for any cause that Gracenote

deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are

error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-

ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninter-

rupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide

you with new enhanced or additional data types

or categories that Gracenote may provide in the

future and is free to discontinue its online

services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EX-

PRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM-

ITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-

ABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE

DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE

OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE

SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO

CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR

FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

Music recognition technology and related data

are provided by GracenoteT. Gracenote is the

industry standard in music recognition technol-

ogy and related content delivery. For more

information visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,

This product and service may practice one or

more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;

#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,

#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,

#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-

ing. Some services supplied under license from

Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks

of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,

and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-

marks of Gracenote.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

CD/CF (CompactFlash) CARE AND

CLEANING

●Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the

surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

●Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

●A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

CF cards

●Never touch the terminal portion of the

CompactFlash cards. Do not bend the cards.

●Always place the cards in the storage case

when they are not being used.

●Do not place heavy objects on the cards.

●Do not store the cards in highly humid

locations.

●Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight.

●Do not spill any liquids on the cards.

Refer to the CompactFlash card Owner’s Manual

for the details.

1. Source select switch

2. ENTER (models with navigation system) or

tuning (models without navigation sys-

tem) switch

SAA0451

With navigation system

SAA1534

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

3. Volume control switch

4. BACK switch

STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED

CONTROLS FOR AUDIO

ENTER (models with navigation

system) or tuning (models without

navigation system) switch

Push the switch upward or downward to select

a channel, track, CD or folder when they are

listed on the display. You can also use the

ENTER switch to select the items on the usual

setting menu screen.

After selecting an MP3 folder using the up and

down switch, push the ENTER switch to com-

plete the selection.

While the display is in the NAVI, STATUS or

Audio setting screen, some audio functions can

also be controlled using the ENTER switch. The

function varies depending on if you push the

switch shorter (less than 1.5 seconds) or longer

(more than 1.5 seconds).

RADIO

●Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Next or previous preset channel

●Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Next or previous station/channel

Without navigation system

SAA1506

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Next track or the beginning of the current

track

●Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Disc change (When only one disc is loaded,

the 1st track of the disc will be selected.)

CD/CF with MP3/WMA

●Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Next track or the beginning of the current

track

●Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Folder change (When the last folder on a disc

is playing, the next disc will be selected.)

iPodT

●Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Previous or next track (Start/Pause or Menu

can be selected when the ENTER button is

pushed.)

●Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Rewind or fast forward search

Music Box hard drive

●Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Next track or the beginning of the current

track

●Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Playlist change (When the last playlist is

playing, the next playlist will be selected.)

BACK switch

Push this switch to go back to the previous

screen or cancel the selection if it is not com-

pleted.

Volume control switches

Push the upper (+) or lower (2) side switch to

increase or decrease the volume.

SOURCE select switch

Push the source select switch to change the

mode in the sequence of Preset A, Preset B,

Preset C, “iPodT” (if so equipped), “Music Box”

(if so equipped), CD, CompactFlash (if so

equipped) and “AUX”. If they are not ready to

function, those modes will be skipped.

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear

window.

CAUTION

●Do not place metalized film near the rear

window glass or attach any metal parts to it.

This may cause poor reception or noise.

●When cleaning the inside of the rear window,

be careful not to scratch or damage the rear

window antenna. Lightly wipe along the an-

tenna with a dampened soft cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

The auxiliary input jacks are located in the

center console. NTSC compatible devices such

as video games, camcorders and portable video

players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifi-

cation purposes.

●Yellow - video input

●White - left channel audio input

●Red - right channel audio input

Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the

power of the portable device.

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in

your INFINITI, be sure to observe the following

cautions, otherwise the new equipment may

adversely affect the electronic control modules

and electronic control system harness.

WARNING

●A cellular telephone should not be used

while driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions pro-

hibit the use of cellular telephones while

driving.

●If you must make a call while your vehicle is

in motion, the hands-free cellular phone op-

erational mode (if so equipped) is highly rec-

ommended. Exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

●If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires

you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle before doing

so.

Automatic transmission models

SAA1507

Manual transmission models

SAA1531

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

CAUTION

●Keep the antenna as far away as possible

from the electronic control modules.

●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm)

away from the electronic control system har-

ness. Do not route the antenna wire next to

any harness.

●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as

recommended by the manufacturer.

●Connect the ground wire from the CB radio

chassis to the body.

●For details, consult an INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a

safe location. If you have to use a phone

while driving, exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention to

vehicle operation while talking on the

phone, pull off the road to a safe location and

stop your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a

phone after starting the engine.

Your INFINITI is equipped with BluetoothT

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner

of a BluetoothTenabled cellular phone, you can

set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone mod-

ule. With BluetoothTwireless technology, you

can make or receive a telephone call with your

cellular phone in your pocket.

Availability of specific features is dependent

upon the phone’s BluetoothTsupport. Please

refer to www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for pairing

procedures and a list of compatible devices.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-

vehicle phone module, no additional phone

connecting procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phone module when the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position with the registered

cellular phone turned on and carried in the

vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different BluetoothT

cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular

phone at a time.

Before using the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module before using the BluetoothTHands-

Free Phone System.

●Some BluetoothTenabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the telephone

service area.

BLUETOOTHTHANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such as

in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, behind a tall building or in a

mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked in order

not to be dialed.

●When the signal reception is too bad or

ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult

to hear the other person’s voice during a

call.

●Immediately after the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position, it may be impos-

sible to receive a call for a short period of

time.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the BluetoothTwireless connection, the bat-

tery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual.

●If the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System

seems to be malfunctioning, please visit

www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

●Some cellular phones and other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

●The antenna display on the monitor will not

coincide with the antenna display of some

cellular phones.

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as

well as to minimize its echoes.

●If reception between callers is unclear, ad-

justing the outgoing volume may improve

the clarity.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could dam-

age the transmitter and may violate FCC

regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. this device may not cause interference

and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regula-

tions.

Bluetooth trademark:

BLUETOOTHTis a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc., U.S.A. and licenced to

Xanavi Informatics

Corporation.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

MODEL WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Control buttons

1) PHONE button

2) TALK/PHONE SEND button

Pairing procedure

1. Push the SETTING button, and select the

“PHONE” key on the display using the

INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER

button.

2. Select the “Bluetooth Setup” key, and

push the ENTER button.

3. Select the “Pair Phone” key, and push the

ENTER button.

4. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the

name list of the phones, and push the

ENTER button.

5. When a PIN code appears on the screen,

operate the BluetoothTcellular phone to

enter the PIN code.

The pairing procedure of the cellular phone

varies according to each cellular phone. See

the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for de-

tails. You can also visit

www.infiniti.com/bluetooth or call INFINITI

Consumer Affairs Department for instruc-

tions on pairing INFINITI recommended cel-

lular phones.

SAA1772

SAA1570 SAA1571

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

6. When the pairing is completed, the screen

will return to the BluetoothTsetup dis-

play.

Phonebook registration

Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the

phonebook.

1. Push the SETTING button, and select the

“PHONE” key on the display using the

INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER

button.

2. Select the “Phonebook” key, and push

the ENTER button.

3. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the

name list of the phonebook, and push the

ENTER button.

SAA1572

SAA1573

SAA1574

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key,

and push the ENTER button in order to

the phonebook.

5. Operate the cellular phone to send a

person’s name and phone number from

the memory of the cellular phone. The

memory sending procedure from the cel-

lular phone varies according to each cel-

lular phone manufacturer. Availability of

specific features is dependent upon the

phone’s BluetoothTsupport. See the cel-

lular phone Owner’s Manual for more

details.

6. After the memory is registered in the

phonebook, the system will ask if you

want to add a voice tag for it. If you want

to add a voice tag, select “YES” on the

“Add a voicetag?” screen. For example, if

the contact’s name is David, speak

“David” after a tone. The “David” voice

tag is stored in the phonebook. Voice tag

is a useful function for easy dialing sup-

ported by the voice recognition system.

(See “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYS-

TEM (models with navigation system)”

later in this section.)

7. When the phonebook registration is com-

pleted, the screen will return to the name

list of the phonebook.

There are different methods to input a phone

number. Select one of the following options

instead of “Transfer via Bluetooth” in step 4

above.

Enter Data by Keypad

Input the name and phone number manually

using the keypad displayed on the screen. (See

“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models with

navigation system)” earlier in this section.)

Copy from Downloaded Phonebook

Copy a phonebook from the BluetoothTcellular

phone. The availability of this function depends

on each cellular phone. The copying procedure

from the cellular phone also varies according to

each cellular phone. See cellular phone Own-

er’s Manual for more details.

Copy from Outgoing Call Logs

Store the name and phone number from the

outgoing call list.

Copy from Incoming Call Logs

Store the name and phone number from the

incoming call list.

Transfer via Bluetooth

Transfer a contact from the BluetoothTcellular

phone. Availability of this function depends on

each cellular phone. The transferring procedure

SAA1575 SAA1576

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

from the cellular phone also varies according to

each cellular phone. See the cellular phone

Owner’s Manual for more details or visit

www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for transfer instruc-

tions (where supported) and a list of compatible

devices.

Delete

Delete a contact that is registered in the phone-

book.

Making a call

To make a call, follow the procedures below.

1. Push the PHONE button on the instrument

panel or the button on the steering

wheel. The “PHONE” screen will appear on

the display.

2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key on the

“PHONE” menu, and push the ENTER but-

ton.

3. Select the registered person’s name from

the list, and push the ENTER button. Dial-

ing will start.

4. After the call is over, perform one of the

following to finish the call.

1. Select the “Hang up” key and push the

ENTER button.

2. Push the button on the steering

wheel.

3. Push the PHONE button on the instrument

panel.

There are different methods to make a call.

Select one of the following options instead of

“Call (Phonebook)” in step 2 above.

Redial

Dial the previously dialed number again.

Call (Call Logs)

Select the name or phone number from the

incoming or outgoing call logs.

Call (Downloaded)

Select the name or phone number from the

downloaded call list.

Dial (Keypad)

Input the phone number manually using the

keypad displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO

USE TOUCH SCREEN (models with navigation

system)” earlier in this section.)

SAA1577

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Receiving a call

When you hear a phone ring, the display will

change to the incoming call mode. To receive a

call, perform one of the following procedures

listed below.

a. Select the “Answer” key on the display

and push the ENTER button.

b. Push the PHONE button on the instrument

panel.

c. Push the button on the steering

wheel.

There are some options available when receiv-

ing a call. Select one of the following displayed

on the screen.

Answer

Accept an incoming call to talk.

On Hold

Put an incoming call on hold.

Reject Call

Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, perform one of the following

procedures listed below.

a. Select the “Hang up” key on the display

and push the ENTER button.

b. Push the PHONE button on the instrument

panel.

c. Push the button on the steering

wheel.

During a call

There are some options available during a call.

Select one of the following displayed on the

screen if necessary.

Hang up

Finish the call.

Use Handset

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Mute

Mute your voice to the caller.

SAA1578 SAA1579

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Keypad

Send a dial tone to the caller for using network

services such as voice mail.

Cancel Mute

This will appear after “Mute” is selected. Mute

will be canceled.

To adjust the caller’s voice to be louder or

quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or 2)

on the steering wheel or turn the volume control

knob on the instrument panel while talking on

the phone. This adjustment is also available in

the SETTING mode. Phone setting

To set up the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone

System to your preferred settings, push the

SETTING button on the instrument panel and

select the “PHONE” key on the display, and

then push the ENTER button.

Phonebook

See “Phonebook registration” earlier in this

section for adding, editing and deleting a con-

tact.

Downloaded Phonebook

Refer to the following information for each item.

●Download All

Download all of the contacts registered in

the BluetoothTcellular phone’s BluetoothT

support. Availability of this function de-

pends on each cellular phone. The memory

downloading procedure from the cellular

phone also varies according to each cellular

phone. See cellular phone Owner’s Manual

for more details.

●Delete Downloaded Phonebook

Delete a downloaded phonebook.

SAA1580 SAA1581

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phonebook

Delete an entry from the downloaded phone-

book.

Automatic Hold

If this item is turned on, an incoming call will be

placed on hold automatically after several

rings.

Use Vehicle Ringtone

If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that

is different from the cellular phone’s will sound

when receiving a call.

Delete Call Logs

Delete all of the incoming or outgoing call logs

from the list.

Bluetooth Setup

See the following information for each item.

●Bluetooth

If this setting is turned off, the connection

between the cellular phone and the in-

vehicle phone module will be canceled.

●Bluetooth Info

Check information about the device name,

device PIN and connection status.

●Pair Phone

See “Pairing procedure” later in this section.

●Priority Change

Use this command to change the priority

level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone

will be connected to the system when more

than one paired BluetoothTphone is in the

vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the

active phone and asks for a new priority

level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

If the new priority level is already being used

for another phone, the two phones will swap

priority levels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone A

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C

to Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone C

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone A

●Remove Paired Phone

Delete a registered cellular phone from the

paired list.

●Paired Phone List

Up to 5 registered cellular phones are shown

on the list. If you select a cellular phone that

is different from the one currently being

connected, the newly selected phone will be

connected to the system.

●Edit Phone Name

Rename the registered cellular phones using

the keypad displayed on the screen. (See

“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models with

navigation system)” earlier in this section.)

MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initial-

ized, which takes a few seconds. If the

button is pushed before the initialization com-

pletes, the system will announce “Hands-free

phone system not ready” and will not react to

voice commands.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the INFINITI

Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-

ing:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition, push and

release the button located on the steer-

ing wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a

command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-

phone, and voice feedback is given when the

command is accepted.

●If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

●If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please try again.” Repeat the command in a

clear voice.

●If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or “Cor-

rection” any time the system is waiting for a

response.

●You can cancel a command when the system

is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel”

or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel”

and ends the voice recognition (VR) session.

You can also push the button on the

steering wheel at any time. Whenever the VR

session is canceled, a double beep is played

to indicate you have exited the system.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, push the volume control switches

(+ or 2) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use

the radio volume control knob.

How to say numbers

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands.

Refer to the rules and examples below.

●Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight oh oh six six two six two oh

oh”, or

—“One eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”

●Words can be used for the first 4 digits

places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”,

—NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty

two hundred, and

—NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two

hundred.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The

system will prompt you to continuing enter-

ing digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight oh oh”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

—“six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

—“six two oh oh”

●You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # at

anytime in any position of the phone num-

ber.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

—“One five five five one two one two star

one two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as single

digits.

Control buttons

The control buttons for the BluetoothTHands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

TALK/PHONE SEND

Push the button to initiate a VR ses-

sion or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button to skip

through system feedback and to enter com-

mands during a call. (See “List of voice

commands” later in this section and “During

a call” earlier in this section for more infor-

mation.)

PHONE END

Push the button to cancel a VR session

or end a call.

Getting started

The following procedures will help you get

started using the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone

System with INFINITI Voice Recognition. For

additional command options, see “List of voice

commands” later in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the BluetoothTHands-

Free Phone System using English, Spanish or

French.

See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” earlier in

this section to change the language.

SAA1582

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Pairing procedure

1. Push the button on the steering

wheel. The system announces the avail-

able commands.

2. Say: “Setup”

. The system acknowl-

edges the command and announces the

next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone”

. The system ac-

knowledges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

4. Say: “New phone”

. The system ac-

knowledges the command and asks you

to initiate pairing from the phone handset

When you are asked to enter a PIN code for

pairing your BluetoothTcellular phone, op-

erate it to enter the code “1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless of the

number of phones paired.

The pairing procedure of the cellular phone

varies according to each cellular phone.

Availability of specific features is dependent

upon the phone’s BluetoothTsupport. See

the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for de-

tails. You can also visit

www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for instructions

on pairing INFINITI recommended cellular

phones and a list of approved devices.

5. The system asks you to say a name for the

phone

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells you, then prompts you for a

name again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired and

the name sounds too much like a name

already used, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

6. The system asks you to assign a priority

level

. The priority level determines

which phone is active when more than

one paired BluetoothTphone is in the

vehicle. Follow the instructions provided

by the system or see “Setup” later in this

section for more information on changing

priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to

select a custom ringtone

. Follow the

instructions provided by the system or

see “Setup” later in this section for more

information on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phone

number

1. Push the button on steering wheel.

A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call”

. The system acknowledges

the command and announces the next set

of available commands.

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

3. Say the number you wish to call

. For

example, 555-1212 can be said as “five

five five one two one two.” (See “How to

say numbers” earlier in this section for

more information.) For better recognition,

you can separate the digits into groups,

for example, “five five five”, then “one

two one two”.

4. When you have finished speaking the

phone number, the system repeats it back

and announces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial”

. The system acknowledges

the command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List of

voice commands” later in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ringtone, press the

button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the

button on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you hear

the ringtone, press the button on the

steering wheel to reject the call.

For additional command options, see “List of

voice commands” later in this section.

List of voice commands

When you push and release the button

on the steering wheel, you can choose from the

commands on the Main Menu. The following

pages describe these commands and the com-

mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before speaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands

currently available any time the system is wait-

ing for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing

it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time

while the system is waiting for a response. The

system will end the VR session. Whenever the

VR session is canceled, a double beep is played

to indicate you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous com-

mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correction”

anytime the system is waiting for a response.

When you get used to the menus in the system,

you can talk ahead by saying more than one

command at a time. For example, say, “Call five

five five one two one two” or “Memo pad

record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-

sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by

pressing the button on the steering

wheel. However, if you press the button

when the system is waiting for a response from

you it will end the VR session.

SAA1583

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Call

<Name> (speak name)

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book,

you can dial a number associated with a name

and location.

See “Phone book” later in this section to learn

how to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name of

the phone book entry you wish to call. The

system acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with

the name, the system asks you to choose the

location.

Once you have confirmed the name and loca-

tion, the system begins the call.

<Number> (speak digits)

When prompted by the system, say the number

you wish to call. (See “How to say numbers”

earlier in this section and “Making a call by

entering a phone number” earlier in this section

for more details.)

“Redial”

Use the Redial command to call the last number

that was dialed within the vehicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last number dialed

by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to redial” and

ends the VR session.

“Callback”

Use the Call Back command to dial the number

of the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing. If a call

back number does not exist, the system an-

nounces, “There is no number to call back” and

ends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several command op-

tions available. Press the button on the

steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and

enter commands.

●“Help” — The system announces the avail-

able commands.

●“Go back/Correction” — The system an-

nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session and

returns to the call.

●“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces

“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns to

the call.

●“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send

command to enter numbers during a call. For

example, if you were directed to dial an

extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the command and

sends the tones associated with the num-

bers. The system then ends the VR session

and returns to the call.

SAA1584

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●“Transfer Call” — Use the Transfer Call com-

mand to transfer the call from the

BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System to the

cellular phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call

transferred to privacy mode.” The system

then ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com-

mand again to return to a hands-free call

through the vehicle.

●“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute

your voice so the other party cannot hear it.

Use the mute command again to unmute

your voice.

NOTE:

If the other party ends the call or the cellular

phone network connection is lost while the Mute

feature is on, the Mute feature may need to be

reset to “off.”

Phone book

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each

phone paired with the system. Each name can

have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ-

ated with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone book.

You cannot access Phone A’s phone book if you

are currently connected with Phone B.

“New Entry”

Use the New Entry command to store a new

name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name

you would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system

tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name

already stored, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and you

confirm it is correct, the system asks for a

location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: “Home.”

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number

or to transfer a phone number stored in the

cellular phone’s memory.

To enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one

two.” (See “How to say numbers” earlier in this

section for more information.)

To transfer a phone number stored in the

cellular phone’s memory (if so equipped):

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges

the command and asks you to initiate the

transfer from the phone handset. The new

SAA1585

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

contact phone number will be transferred from

the cellular phone via the BluetoothTcommu-

nication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. Availability of specific features

is dependent upon the phone’s BluetoothTsup-

port. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for

details. You can also visit

www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for instructions on

transferring phone numbers from INFINITI rec-

ommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts

you for the next command. When you have

finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number. The system then asks if you would like

to store another location for the same name. If

you do not wish to store another location, the

system ends the VR session.

“Edit”

Use the Edit command to alter an existing

phone book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th

phone number to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name of

the entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asks

you for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location.

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number

or to transfer a phone number stored in the

cellular phone’s memory.

To enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one

two.” (See “How to say numbers” earlier in this

section for more information.)

To transfer a phone number stored in the

cellular phone’s memory (if so equipped):

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges

the command and asks you to initiate the

transfer from the phone handset. The new

contact phone number will be transferred from

the cellular phone via the BluetoothTcommu-

nication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. Availability of specific features

is dependent upon the phone’s BluetoothTsup-

port. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for

details. You can also visit

www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for instructions on

transferring phone numbers from INFINITI rec-

ommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts

you for the next command. When you have

finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number, then announces that the entry has

been stored. The system then ends the VR

session.

“Delete”

Use the Delete command to erase one entry

from the phone book, all entries from the phone

book, the current redial number or the current

call back number.

To delete entries from the phone book, say a

name or “All entries” when prompted by the

system.

The system acknowledges the command and

asks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call back

number, say “redial number” or “call back

number” when prompted by the system.

If a redial number or a call back number exists,

the system deletes them without asking for

confirmation.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying

to delete, the system says so and ends the VR

session.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

“List Name”

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete the

system ends the VR session.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session.

Memo pad

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice

memos, each up to 20 seconds long.

“Play”

The system plays back all the memos in the

order of newest to oldest. The system ends the

VR session.

If there are no memos recorded, the system

announces “No messages to play.” The system

ends the VR session.

“Record”

The system announces “Recording” and a tone

sounds signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record

clearly. When you are done, press the or

button on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces

“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end

the VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you

wish to record over the oldest memo.

“Delete”

The Delete command erases all memos. The

system asks you to confirm this action before

deleting all memos.

SAA1586

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Setup

Use the Setup command to change options

associated with the BluetoothTHands-Free

Phone System.

“Pair Phone”

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to

the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System.

When you are asked to enter a PIN code for

pairing your BluetoothTcellular phone, operate

it to enter the code “1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless of the

number of phones paired.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair

a sixth phone, the system announces that you

must first delete one phone or replace an

existing phone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already been

paired to your vehicle’s system, the system

announces the name the phone is already us-

ing. The pairing procedure will then be can-

celed.

When prompted by the system, choose from the

following commands:

●“New phone” — see “Pairing procedure”

earlier in this section.

●“Replace phone” — The system announces

the names of the phones already paired and

asks which you would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone you

wish to replace, the paring procedure will

begin. (See “Pairing procedure” earlier in

this section.)

●“List phone” — See the description below.

“List Phones”

Use the List Phone command to hear the names

of the phones currently paired. If no phones are

paired, the system announces, “No paired

phones to list.” The system then ends the VR

session.

“Select Phone”

Use the Select Phone command to select a

phone of lesser priority when two or more

phones paired with BluetoothTHands-Free

Phone System are in the vehicle at the same

time.

The system asks you to name the phone and

confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selected

phone remains active until the ignition switch is

turned OFF or you select a new phone.

“Change Priority”

Use the Change Priority command to change the

priority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is

active when more than one paired BluetoothT

phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the active

phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3,

4, 5).

If the new priority level is already being used for

another phone, the two phones will swap prior-

ity levels.

SAA1587

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone A

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C to

Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone C

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete Phone”

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a

specific phone or all phones from the

BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phones

already paired with the system and their priority

level. The system then gives you the option to

delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to

the list again.

Once you choose to delete a phone or all

phones, the system asks you to confirm this

action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associated phone

book for that phone will also be deleted.

“Select Ring tone”

Use the Select Ring tone command to select the

tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call

is received.

The system announces the name of the active

phone and asks you to choose from the follow-

ing commands:

●“Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone

and asks if you would like to select that

tone. If you say no, the system plays the next

ringtone available and continues to cycle

through the ringtones until you select one or

quit.

●“Silent” — The system asks you to confirm

your wish to disable the ringtone.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of

dialect users to train the system to improve

recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of

commands, the users can create a voice model

of their own voice that is stored in the system.

The system is capable of storing a different

speaker adaptation model for memory A and

memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will use

memory A to store the model. If memory A is in

use and memory B is available, the system will

use memory B to store the model. If both of the

memory locations are in use, the system will

ask the user to select which memory location

should be overwritten.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet

outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine

running, the parking brake on, and the

transmission in Park.

3. Press and hold the button for more

than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the

hands-free phone system to enter the

speaker adaptation mode.

5. Press the button.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected

automatically. If both memory locations

are already in use, the system will prompt

you to overwrite one. Follow the instruc-

tions provided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are

ready to begin, the press the

button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the

instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will

tell you an adequate number of phrases

have been recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your

name. Follow the instructions to register

your name.

11. The system will announce that speaker

adaptation has been completed and the

system is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

●The button is pressed for more than 5

seconds in SA mode.

●The vehicle is driven during SA mode.

●The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or

LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs you to

say the following phrases.

(The system will prompt you for each phrase.)

●phone book new entry

●dial three oh four two nine

●delete call back number

●setup pair phone

●memo pad play

●eight pause nine three two pause seven

●delete all entries

●call seven two four zero nine

●phone book delete entry

●memo pad record

●dial star two one seven oh

●Yes

●No

●select ringtone

●dial eight five six nine two

●Bluetooth on

●setup change priority

●call three one nine oh two

●nine seven pause pause three oh eight

●Cancel

●call back number

●call star two zero nine five

●delete phone

●dial eight three zero five one

●Home

●four three pause two nine pause zero

●delete redial number

●phone book list names

●call eight oh five four one

●Correction

●setup change ringtone

●dial seven four oh one eight

●setup main menu

●Delete

●dial nine seven two six six

●memo pad delete

●call seven six three oh one

●go back

●call five six two eight zero

●dial six six four three seven

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the com-

mand correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.)

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the

vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is

too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to

improve the recognition response for the speaker. (See “SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE” earlier in this section.)

The system consistently selects the

wrong entry from the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by

using the “List Names” command. (See “Phone book” earlier in this section.)

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

INFINITI Voice Recognition allows hands-free

operation of the systems equipped on this

vehicle, such as the display, audio, climate

control, phone and optional navigation sys-

tems.

To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition, push and

release the TALK switch located on the

steering wheel. Then speak the command for

the system you wish to activate. The command

given is picked up by the microphone, and it is

performed when it is properly recognized. At

this time INFINITI Voice Recognition will provide

a voice and message (in the center display) to

inform you of the command results.

COMMAND LIST

Displaying command list

If you are controlling the system by voice

commands for the first time or do not know the

appropriate voice command, perform the fol-

lowing procedure for displaying the voice com-

mand list and help list.

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition ” key

using the INFINITI controller and push the

ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “Command List ” key using

the INFINITI controller and push the ENTER

button.

4. Highlight a category using the INFINITI

controller and push the ENTER button.

SAA1545 SAA1590

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

(models with navigation system)

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

5. Highlight an item using the INFINITI con-

troller and push the ENTER button.

6. If necessary, scroll the screen using the

INFINITI controller to view the entire list.

7. Press the BACK button to return to the

previous screen.

SAA1593

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

List of help commands

Navigation Help

See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Audio Help

●Music Box

COMMAND ACTION

Music Box Play Turns on the Music Box hard drive.

Play by Mood Plays the specified song matching your mood.

Relaxing Music Plays the specified relaxing music.

Lively Music Plays the specified lively music.

Slow Music Plays the specified slow music.

Upbeat Music Plays the specified upbeat music.

Play by Category Plays the specified song in the specified category.

My Favorites Plays your favorite song.

Hit Songs Plays the specified hit song.

Kids’ Songs Plays the specified song for children.

Rarely Played Plays a rarely played song.

Music Box OFF Turns off the Music Box hard drive.

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Radio

COMMAND ACTION

Radio Play Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.

Radio AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

Radio FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

Tune <87.7 - 107.9> Tunes to the specified FM frequency.

Tune <530 - 1710> Tunes to the specified AM frequency.

Preset <A - C> <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <A - C> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset bank.

Radio OFF Turns the radio off.

Radio Menu Displays the radio menu.

●Satellite

COMMAND ACTION

Satellite Radio Turns the SAT radio on, selecting the station and band last played.

Satellite Radio Channel <1 - 255> Tunes to the specified SAT frequency.

Preset <A - C> <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <A - C> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset bank.

Radio OFF Turns the radio off.

Radio Menu Displays the radio menu.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●CD

COMMAND ACTION

CD Play Starts to play a CD.

Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track.

Folder <1 - 255> Selects the specified MP3 folder and plays the first file.

Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track on the specified MP3 folder.

CD OFF Stops the CD playback.

CD Text Displays the information about the track currently being played.

CD Menu Displays the CD menu.

●Changer

COMMAND ACTION

CD Changer Play Starts to play the CD changer.

Disc <1 - 6> Switches to the specified CD and plays the first file.

Track <1 - 99> Switches to the specified track.

Disc <1 - 6> Track <1 - 99> Switches to the specified track in the specified CD.

CD Changer OFF Stops the CD playback.

CD Changer Menu Displays the CD menu.

●Audio

COMMAND ACTION

Audio Play Turns the audio system on.

Audio OFF Turns the audio system off.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●CF

COMMAND ACTION

Compact Flash Play Starts to play the files saved in the CompactFlash card.

Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track.

Folder <1 - 255> Selects the specified folder in the CompactFlash card and plays the first file.

Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track in the specified folder in the CompactFlash card.

Compact Flash OFF Stops the playback of the CompactFlash card.

Compact Flash Text Displays the information about the file currently being played.

Compact Flash Menu Displays the CompactFlash menu.

●iPodT

COMMAND ACTION

iPodTPlay Turns the iPodTsystem on.

iPodTOFF Turns the iPodTsystem off.

Phone Help

COMMAND ACTION

Phone Redial Redials the phone number last dialed.

Phone Dial Dials the phone number given in the command.

Phone Dial <Phone number> Dials the phone number given in the command. Speak the phone number in one sequence. The number

is automatically dialed.

Phonebook Shows the first page of the “Phonebook” list.

Phonebook <Voicetag> Dials the phone number registered in the specified “voicetag”.

Outgoing Calls Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

COMMAND ACTION

Incoming Calls Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).

Phone Select Selects another cellular phone registered in the system.

Play Phonebook Outputs the “Voicetags” registered in the system.

Climate Control Help

COMMAND ACTION

Climate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.

Climate Control OFF Turns the climate control system off.

Temperature <60 - 90> Sets the climate control temperature to the value given in the command.

Driver Temperature <60 - 90> Sets the driver’s side temperature to the value given in the command.

Passenger Temperature <60 - 90> Sets the passenger’s side temperature to the value given in the command.

Others Help

●Vehicle

COMMAND ACTION

Fuel Economy Displays the Fuel Economy screen.

Maintenance Displays the Maintenance screen.

Status Displays the Status screen.

●Help

COMMAND ACTION

Help Displays the command list.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Displaying user guide

You can confirm how to use voice commands by

displaying a simplified User Guide or by dis-

playing simulated voice command operations.

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition ” key

using the INFINITI controller and push the

ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “User Guide ” key using the

INFINITI controller and push the ENTER

button.

4. Highlight an item using the INFINITI con-

troller and push the ENTER button.

Available items

●Getting Started

Displays the simplified User Guide describ-

ing how to operate the voice recognition

system.

●Using the Address Book (models with navi-

gation system)

Refer Navigation system Owner’s Manual.

●Finding a Street Address (models with navi-

gation system)

Refer to Navigation system Owner’s Manual.

●Placing Calls

Simulates voice commands to make a phone

call by voice command operation.

●Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips for how to correctly

speak commands in order for them to be

properly recognized by the system.

●Voice Recognition Settings

Displays the description of voice recognition

settings.

●Adapting the System to Your Voice

Simulates an example of the operation to

adapt the system to your voice.

For the items “Finding Points of Interest”, “Us-

ing the Address Book” and “Finding a Street

Address”, refer to the separate Navigation sys-

tem Owner’s Manual.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initial-

ized, which takes a few seconds. When com-

pleted, the system is ready to accept voice

commands. If the TALK switch is pushed

before the initialization completes, a beep

sounds.

SAA1783 SAA1595

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Before starting

To get the best performance out of INFINITI

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

●When the climate control is in the AUTO

mode, the fan speed decreases automati-

cally for easy recognition.

●Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a

command.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice command

1. Push and release the TALK switch

located on the steering wheel.

2. A list of commands appears on the

screen, and the system announces,

“Please say a command”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to ,

speak “Help”, “Voice help” or “Command

list” .

SAA1588 SAA1589

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

4. The system confirms the recognized com-

mand, and a list of command list catego-

ries appears.

5. Locate your desired voice command in the

list using the INFINITI controller. Selecting

a category lists its voice commands.

6. Push the TALK switch and enter the

command.

Operating tips

●Voice commands cannot be accepted when

the icon is .

●The list displayed can be scrolled by tilting

the ENTER switch on the steering wheel.

●If the command is not recognized, the sys-

tem announces, “Please say again”. Repeat

the command in a clear voice.

●Push the BACK button once to return to the

previous screen.

●If you want to cancel the command, push

and hold the TALK switch for 1 sec-

ond. The message “Voice canceled” will be

announced.

●Push the TALK switch again to pause

the operation. Push the TALK switch

to restart the operation.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the

system feedback, push the volume control

buttons (+ or 2) on the steering wheel or use

the audio system volume knob while the

system is making an announcement.

How to speak numbers

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands.

Refer to the following examples. (General rule:

Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”).

Radio frequencies

Speak radio frequencies according to the fol-

lowing examples:

●930 kHz

– “Tune nine thirty AM.”

– “Tune nine thirty.”

●1000 kHz

– “Ten hundred.”

●1040 kHz

– “Tune ten forty.”

●1710 kHz

– “Tune seventeen ten.”

●97.9 MHz

– “Tune ninety seven point nine.”

●100.5 MHz

– “Tune one hundred point five.”

●101.1 MHz

– “Tune one oh one point one FM.”

SAA1784

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Temperatures (climate control)

Speak temperatures according to the following

examples:

●74°C

– “Temperature seventy four.”

●21.5°F

– “Temperature twenty one point five.”

– “Temperature twenty one and a half.”

●19.0°F

– “Temperature nineteen point zero.”

– “Temperature nineteen point oh.”

– “Temperature nineteen.”

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to the follow-

ing examples:

●1-800-662-6200

– “Dial one eight oh oh six six two six two

oh oh.”

– “Dial one eight hundred six six two six

two oh oh.”

– “Dial one eight zero zero six six two oh

oh.”

Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone

dialing results, say phone numbers as single

digits.

Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five

five six thousands”.

Personal vocabulary (voicetags)

INFINITI Voice Recognition provides the function

called “voicetags,” which can be associated

with the phone and the navigation system (if so

equipped). Using your own voice, 40 voicetags

can be registered in the “Phonebook” (phone)

and 10 locations can be registered in the “Ad-

dress Book” (navigation system).

See “BLUETOOTHTHANDS-FREE PHONE SYS-

TEM” earlier in this section and/or the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped) for the method of “voicetag” regis-

tration.

VOICE COMMAND LEARNING

FUNCTION

The voice recognition system has a function to

learn the user’s voice for better voice recogni-

tion performance. The system can memorize the

voices of up to three persons.

Having the system learn the user’s

voice

1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel, highlight the “Others” key on

the display and then push the ENTER

button.

2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and

then push the ENTER button.

SAA1601

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

3. Highlight the “Voice Command Learning”

key and then push the ENTER button.

4. Select the user whose voice is memorized

by the system and push the ENTER but-

ton.

5. Select a category to be learned by the

system from the following list and then

push the ENTER button.

●Audio

●Phone

●Vehicle Info.

●Others

The voice commands in the category are

displayed.

6. Select a voice command and then push

the ENTER button.

The voice recognition system starts.

SAA1606 SAA1605

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

7. The system requests that you repeat a

command after a tone.

8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to ,

speak the command that the system re-

quested.

9. When the system has recognized the

voice command, the voice of the user is

learned.

Push the switch or BACK button to return

to the previous screen.

If the system has learned the command cor-

rectly, the voice command indicator on the

screen turns on.

Learning function settings

Edit Name

Edit the user name using the keypad displayed

on the screen.

Store Result

When this item is turned to ON, the voice

recognition system can easily recognize the

user’s voice that it has learned.

Reset Result

Resets the user’s voice that the voice recogni-

tion system has learned.

Continuous Learning

When this item is turned to ON, you can have

the system learn the voice commands in suc-

cession, without selecting commands one by

one.

SAA1607 SAA1608

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for

the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the

system fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “COMMAND LIST” earlier in this section.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these

in place.

The system consistently selects the wrong

voicetag.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giv-

ing the Radio Directory or Phone Directory command.

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving .............. 5-2

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ................. 5-2

Three-way catalyst ............................. 5-2

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).......... 5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover................... 5-5

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving .............. 5-5

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) driving safety

precautions (for AWD models) ................... 5-6

Push-button ignition switch ........................ 5-6

Operating range for engine start function......... 5-7

Push-button ignition switch positions ............ 5-8

Intelligent key battery discharge................. 5-8

Before starting the engine ......................... 5-9

Starting the engine................................ 5-9

Driving the vehicle ............................... 5-10

Automatic transmission ........................ 5-10

Manual transmission ...........................5-14

Parking brake.................................... 5-16

Automatic transmission models..................5-17

Manual transmission models ....................5-17

Cruise control.....................................5-17

Precautions on cruise control....................5-17

Cruise control operations ...................... 5-18

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (if so

equipped) ........................................5-19

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode .................................5-20

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode .........5-21

Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode ................................. 5-22

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

operation.....................................5-24

Conventional (FIXED SPEED) cruise control

mode ........................................ 5-37

Preview function (for Intelligent Cruise

Control system equipped models) ..............5-40

Break-in schedule .................................5-41

Increasing fuel economy ...........................5-41

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ..............5-41

Parking/parking on hills ..........................5-43

Power steering ...................................5-44

Brake system ....................................5-44

Braking precautions ...........................5-44

Parking brake break-in......................... 5-45

Brake assist ..................................... 5-45

Brake assist .................................. 5-45

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Preview function (Intelligent Cruise Control

system equipped models)...................... 5-45

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) .................5-48

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system..............5-49

4 wheel active steer (4WAS) system (if so

equipped) ....................................... 5-50

Cold weather driving ..............................5-51

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-51

Antifreeze .....................................5-51

Battery ........................................5-51

Draining of coolant water .......................5-51

Tire equipment.................................5-51

Special winter equipment ...................... 5-52

Driving on snow or ice......................... 5-52

Engine block heater (if so equipped) ............ 5-52

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

WARNING

●Do not leave children or adults who would

normally require the support of others alone

in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone

either. They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent opera-

tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause severe

or possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

●Closely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from playing

and becoming locked in the trunk where they

could be seriously injured. Keep the car

locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid

securely latched when not in use, and pre-

vent children’s access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING

●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain

colorless and odorless carbon monoxide.

Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause

unconsciousness or death.

●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-

ing the vehicle, drive with all windows fully

open, and have the vehicle inspected

immediately.

●Do not run the engine in closed spaces such

as a garage.

●Do not park the vehicle with the engine run-

ning for any extended length of time.

●Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, oth-

erwise exhaust gases could be drawn into

the passenger compartment. If you must

drive with the trunk lid open, follow these

precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation to off and

the fan control to high to circulate the air.

●If electrical wiring or other cable connec-

tions must pass to a trailer through the seal

on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manu-

facturer’s recommendation to prevent car-

bon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

●The exhaust system and body should be in-

spected by a qualified mechanic whenever:

– The vehicle is raised for service.

– You suspect that exhaust fumes are en-

tering into the passenger compartment.

– You notice a change in the sound of the

exhaust system.

– You have had an accident involving dam-

age to the exhaust system, underbody, or

rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

●The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are

very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable

materials away from the exhaust system

components.

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam-

mable materials such as dry grass, waste

paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a

fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

CAUTION

●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from

leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three-

way catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust

pollutants.

●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in

the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical sys-

tems can cause overrich fuel flow into the

three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat.

Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or

if noticeable loss of performance or other

unusual operating conditions are detected.

Have the vehicle inspected promptly by an

INFINITI dealer.

●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause the

engine to misfire, damaging the three-way

catalyst.

●Do not race the engine while warming it up.

●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the

engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-

sure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel

efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The TPMS

malfunction indicator is combined with the low

tire pressure telltale. When the system detects

a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continu-

ously illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the malfunction

indicator is illuminated, the system may not be

able to detect or signal low tire pressure as

intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a

variety of reasons, including the installation of

replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the

vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning

properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow

the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Starting and driving 5-3

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Additional information

●The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure

of the spare tire.

●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden

drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire

while driving).

●The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. If the warning light illuminates in low

ambient temperature, check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONI-

TORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section.

WARNING

●If the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates or LOW PRESSURE information is dis-

played on the monitor screen while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage the

tires and increase the likelihood of tire fail-

ure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could result in

serious personal injury. Check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure

to the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Information

label to turn the low tire pressure warning

light OFF. If the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a

tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace

it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (See

“FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section for changing a flat tire.)

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function and the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI

dealer as soon as possible for tire replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper

operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire

sealant into the tires, as this may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION

●The low tire pressure warning system may

not function properly when the wheels are

equipped with tire chains or the wheels are

buried in snow.

●Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This

may cause poor reception of the signals from

the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will

not function properly.

5-4 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner may result in loss of control or

an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As

with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in

a collision with other vehicles or objects, or

cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the

loss of control causes the vehicle to slide side-

ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid

driving when tired. Never drive when under the

influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which may

cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt

as outlined in the “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety

— Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section of this manual, and also in-

struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is signifi-

cantly more likely to be injured or killed than a

person properly wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or

drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces co-

ordination, delays reaction time and impairs

judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol in-

creases the likelihood of being involved in an

accident injuring yourself and others. Addition-

ally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol

can increase the severity of the injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influ-

ence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people

are injured or killed in alcohol-related acci-

dents. Although the local laws vary on what is

considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is

that alcohol affects all people differently and

most people underestimate the effects of

alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,

prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if

Starting and driving 5-5

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired

by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical con-

dition.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) DRIVING

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (for AWD

models)

WARNING

●Do not drive beyond the performance capa-

bility of the tires, even with AWD engaged.

Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneu-

vers or sudden braking may cause loss of

control.

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or ra-

dial), and tread pattern on all four wheels.

Install tire chains on the rear wheels when

driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.

●This vehicle is not designed for offroad

(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandy or

muddy roads that tires may get stuck in.

●For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt

to raise two wheels off the ground and shift

the transmission to any D (Drive) or R (Re-

verse) position with the engine running. Do-

ing so may result in drivetrain damage or

unexpected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

●Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped ve-

hicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer, (such as

the dynamometers used by some states for

emissions testing), or similar equipment

even if the other two wheels are raised off

the ground. Make sure you inform test facil-

ity personnel that your vehicle is equipped

with AWD before it is placed on a dynamom-

eter. Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result in seri-

ous vehicle damage or personal injury.

●When a wheel is off the ground due to an

unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel

excessively.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition switch

while driving the vehicle except in an emer-

gency. (The engine will stop when the ignition

switch is pushed 3 consecutive times or the

ignition switch is pushed and held for more

than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the

vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a

crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button ignition

switch, be sure to move the selector lever to the

P (Park) position (for automatic transmission

model) or the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position (for manual transmission model).

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

5-6 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE

START FUNCTION

The operating range for starting the engine

inside the vehicle is shown in the illustration.

●If the Intelligent Key is on the instrument

panel, rear parcel shelf, inside the glove box

or door pocket, or the corner of interior

compartment, it may not be possible to start

the engine.

●If the Intelligent Key is near the door or door

glass outside the vehicle, it may be possible

to start the engine.

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal (automatic trans-

mission model) or the clutch pedal (manual

transmission model), the ignition switch posi-

tion will change as follows:

●Push center once to change to ACC.

●Push center two times to change to ON.

●Push center three times to change to OFF.

(No position illuminates.)

●Push center four times to return to ACC.

●Open or close any door to return to LOCK

during the OFF position.

The ignition switch is equipped with an anti-

theft steering lock device.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch position cannot be switched to LOCK

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed

toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion. The ignition switch position indicator

will not illuminate.

3. Open the door. The ignition switch will

change to the LOCK position.

The selector lever can be moved from the P (Park)

position if the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion and the brake pedal is depressed.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turn

from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, push the ignition

switch to the OFF position. To unlock the steer-

ing wheel, push the ignition switch. If the steer-

ing lock release malfunction indicator appears

on the dot matrix liquid crystal display, push the

push-button ignition switch again while lightly

turning the steering wheel right and left. (See

“DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in the

“2. Instruments and controls” section.)

SSD0603 SSD0661

Starting and driving 5-7

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the

push-button ignition switch cannot be turned

from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal dis-

play between the speedometer and tachometer.

(See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in

the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key in-

serted in the port.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio, when the engine is not

running.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

OFF

The engine can be turned off without locking

the steering wheel.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the push-button

ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the

engine is not running for an extended period.

This can discharge the battery. INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost

discharged, the guide light s

Bof the Intelligent

Key port s

Ablinks and the indicator appears on

the dot matrix liquid crystal display. (See “DOT

MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section.)

In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into

the port s

1allows you to start the engine. Make

sure that the key ring side faces backward as

illustrated. Insert the Intelligent Key in the port

until it is latched and secured.

To remove the Intelligent Key from the port,

push the ignition switch to the OFF position and

pull the Intelligent Key out of the port.

SSD0595

5-8 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

NOTE:

The Intelligent Key port does not charge the In-

telligent Key battery. If you see the low battery

indicator in the dot matrix liquid crystal display,

replace the battery as soon as possible. (See

“INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion.)

CAUTION

●Never place anything except the Intelligent

Key in the Intelligent Key port. Doing so may

cause damage to the equipment.

●Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the cor-

rect direction when inserting it to the Intelli-

gent Key port. The engine may not start if it is

in the incorrect direction.

●Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-

gent Key port after the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position.

●Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid and window washer fluid as

frequently as possible, or at least whenever

you refuel.

●Check that all windows and lights are clean.

●Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

●Lock all doors.

●Position seat and adjust head restraints.

●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

●Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position. (See “WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the “2. Instru-

ments and controls” section.)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic Transmission (AT) model:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the selector lever is in either of the above

positions.

Manual Transmission (MT) model:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) posi-

tion. Depress the clutch pedal fully to the

floor.

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion. Depress the brake pedal and the

clutch pedal (MT model) and push the

ignition switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and

release the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal with the ignition switch in

any position.

●If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when restart-

ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little

(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while

holding, crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-9

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion to start cranking the engine. After 5

or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing

the ignition switch to OFF. After cranking

the engine, release the accelerator pedal.

Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by depressing the brake

pedal and pushing the push-button igni-

tion switch to start the engine. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15

seconds at a time. If the engine does not start,

push the ignition switch to OFF and wait 10

seconds before cranking again, otherwise the

starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the en-

gine while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather. In cold weather, keep the

engine running for a minimum of2-3

minutes before shutting it off. Starting and

stopping the engine over a short period of

time may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

When racing the VQ37VHR engine up to

4,000 rpm or more under no load condition,

the engine will enter the fuel cut mode

(Coupe only).

5. To stop the engine, shift the selector lever

to the P (Park) position (AT model) or

move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position (MT model), and push the igni-

tion switch to the OFF position.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

5 speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is

electronically controlled by a transmission con-

trol module to produce maximum efficiency and

smooth operation.

Shown on the following pages are the recom-

mended operating procedures for this transmis-

sion. Follow these procedures for maximum

vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot

brake pedal and push the selector lever button

before shifting the selector lever to the R (Re-

verse), N (Neutral), D (Drive), DS (Drive Sport) or

Manual shift mode position. Be sure the vehicle

is fully stopped before attempting to shift the

selector lever.

This automatic transmission model is designed

so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed

before shifting from P (Park) to any drive posi-

tion while the ignition switch position is ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of the P

(Park) position and into any of the other gear

positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the

LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-10 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

push the selector lever button to shift into

a driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot brake,

then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal while

shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Re-

verse), D (Drive), DS (Drive Sport) or manual

shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal

until shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and have an

accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use cau-

tion when shifting into a forward or reverse

gear before the engine has warmed up.

●Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while

vehicle is moving forward. Never shift to P

(Park), D (Drive) or DS (Drive Sport) while

vehicle is moving rearward. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and have an

accident.

CAUTION

●When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing

the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should

be used for this purpose.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads.

This may cause a loss of control.

Shifting

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressing the

brake pedal,

: Push the button,

: Just move the selector lever.

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal and shift the selector lever from P

(Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive), DS

(Drive Sport) or Manual shift mode position.

Selector lever

SSD0596

Starting and driving 5-11

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R

(Reverse). All other positions can be selected

without pushing the button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is

in any position while the engine is not running.

Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move

unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious

personal injury or property damage.

P (Park) position

Use this selector position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the selector lever

button pushed in to move the selector lever from

the N (Neutral) position or any drive position to

the P (Park) position. Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle is com-

pletely stopped.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to back up. Always be sure the

vehicle is completely stopped before selecting

the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must

be depressed and the selector lever button

pushed in to move the selector lever from the P

(Park) position, the N (Neutral) position or any

drive position to the R (Reverse) position.

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.

The engine can be started in this position. You

may shift to the N (Neutral) position and restart

a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

DS (Drive Sport) mode

When the selector lever is shifted from the D

(Drive) position to the manual shift gate, the

transmission enters the DS (Drive Sport) mode.

Moving the selector lever to the DS (Drive Sport)

position allows you to enjoy comfortable driving

on a winding road and feel smooth acceleration

or deceleration on a hilly road by moving in a

lower gear automatically.

When canceling the DS mode, return the selec-

tor lever to the D (Drive) position. The transmis-

sion returns to the normal driving mode.

5-12 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is in the DS (Drive

Sport) position, the transmission is ready for

the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be

selected manually by moving the selector lever

up or down, or pulling the right-side or left-side

paddle shifter.

When shifting up, move the selector lever to the

+ (up) side or pull the right-side paddle shifter

(+) s

A(if so equipped). The transmission shifts

to the higher range.

When shifting down, move the selector lever to

the 2(down) side or pull the left-side paddle

shifter (2)s

B(if so equipped). The transmis-

sion shifts to the lower range.

When canceling the manual shift mode, return

the selector lever to the D (Drive) position. The

transmission returns to the normal driving

mode.

When you pull the paddle shifter while in the D

(Drive) position, the transmission will shift to

the upper or lower range temporarily. The trans-

mission will automatically return to the D (Drive)

position after a short period of time. If you want

to return to the D (Drive) position manually, pull

and hold the paddle shifter for about 1.5 sec-

onds.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1→

←

2→

←

3→

←

4→

←

5 (5th)

Use this position for all normal forward driving

at highway speeds.

4 (4th)

Use this position when driving up long slopes,

or for engine braking when driving down long

slopes.

3 (3rd) and

2 (2nd)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on

downhill grades.

1 (1st)

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, or

for maximum engine braking on steep downhill

grades.

●Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than 5th

gear. This reduces fuel economy.

●Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same

side twice will shift the ranges in succes-

sion.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmission

may not shift to the selected gear. This helps

maintain driving performance and reduces

the chance of vehicle damage or loss of con-

trol.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmission

automatically shifts down to 1st gear before

the vehicle comes to a stop. When accelerat-

Paddle shifter

SSD0599

Starting and driving 5-13

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

ing again, it is necessary to shift up to the

desired range.

Accelerator downshift

— In D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the

transmission down into the lower gear, depend-

ing on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, note that

the transmission will be locked in any of the

forward gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions,

such as excessive wheel spinning and subse-

quent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be

activated. This will occur even if all electrical

circuits are functioning properly. In this case,

push the switch to the OFF position and wait for 3

seconds. Then push the ignition switch back to

the ON position. The vehicle should return to its

normal operating condition. If it does not return

to its normal operating condition, have an

INFINITI dealer check the transmission and re-

pair if necessary.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the

selector lever may not be moved from the P

(Park) position even with the brake pedal de-

pressed and the selector lever button pushed.

To move the selector lever, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock cover

using a

suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock

as illustrated.

5. Push the selector lever button

and

move the selector lever to N (Neutral)

position

while holding down the shift

lock.

Push the ignition switch to the ON position to

unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may

be moved to the desired location.

If the battery is discharged completely, the

steering wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not

move the vehicle with the steering wheel

locked.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park),

have an INFINITI dealer check the automatic

transmission system as soon as possible.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

WARNING

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads.

This may cause a loss of control.

●Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a

lower gear. This may cause a loss of control

or engine damage.

SSD0598

5-14 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

CAUTION

●Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal

while driving. This may damage the clutch.

●Fully depress the clutch pedal before shift-

ing to help prevent transmission damage.

●Stop your vehicle completely before shifting

into R (Reverse).

●When the vehicle is stopped for a period of

time, for example at a stop light, shift to N

(Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with

the foot brake applied.

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-

shifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift

into the appropriate gear, then slowly and

smoothly release the clutch.

This vehicle is equipped with a short throw

shifter manual transmission. To ensure smooth

gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal

before operating the shift lever. If the clutch

pedal is not fully depressed before the trans-

mission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard.

Transmission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,

3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence accord-

ing to vehicle speed.

To back up, depress the shift lever and then

move it to the R (Reverse) gear after stopping

the vehicle completely.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into the R

(Reverse) or 1st gear, shift to the N (Neutral)

position, and then release the clutch pedal

once. Fully depress the clutch pedal again and

shift into the R (Reverse) or 1st gear.

Suggested upshift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for

shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions

relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.

Actual upshift speeds will vary according to

road conditions, the weather and individual

driving habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas

[less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 8 (13)

2nd to 3rd 16 (25)

3rd to 4th 25 (40)

4th to 5th 28 (45)

5th to 6th 33 (53)

SSD0536

Starting and driving 5-15

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas or in

high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed in each

gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not

running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed

(shown below) in any gear. For level road driv-

ing, use the highest gear suggested for that

speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and

drive according to the road conditions, which

will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the

engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may

cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Sedan

Gear MPH (km/h)

1st 39 (63)

2nd 64 (103)

3rd 92 (148)

4th —

5th —

6th —

Coupe

Gear MPH (km/h)

1st 39 (63)

2nd 65 (104)

3rd 93 (149)

4th —

5th —

6th —

WARNING

●Be sure the parking brake is fully released

before driving. Failure to do so can cause

brake failure and lead to an accident.

●Do not release the parking brake from out-

side the vehicle.

●Do not use the gear shift in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure the

parking brake is fully engaged.

●Do not leave children unattended in a ve-

hicle. They could release the parking brake

and cause an accident.

PARKING BRAKE

5-16 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION MODELS

To apply: Fully depress the parking brake pedal

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake

2. Depress the parking brake pedal

and

the parking brake will be released.

3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION MODELS

To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up s

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)

position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake

lever slightly, push the button

and

lower the lever completely

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

will cancel automatically. The SET indicator

on the dot matrix crystal display will then

blink to warn the driver.

●If the engine coolant temperature becomes

excessively high, the cruise control system

will be canceled automatically.

●If the SET indicator blinks, turn the cruise

control main switch off and have the system

checked by your INFINITI dealer.

●The SET indicator may sometimes blink

when the cruise control main switch is

turned ON while pushing the

RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST or CAN-

CEL switch. To properly set the cruise control

system, perform the steps below in the order

indicated.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving un-

der the following conditions:

●when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at

a set speed

●in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed

SPA2331 SPA2110

CRUISE CONTROL

Starting and driving 5-17

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●on winding or hilly roads

●on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

●in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control

and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do not shift

into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch

pedal when the cruise control is set. Should

this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn

the main switch off immediately. Failure to do

so may cause engine damage.

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

2. SET/COAST switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN

switch on. The CRUISE indicator will come on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to

the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch

and release it. (The CRUISE SET indicator will

come on in the instrument panel.) Take your

foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will

maintain the set speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the accel-

erator pedal. When you release the pedal,

the vehicle will return to the previously set

speed.

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

on winding or hilly roads. If this happens,

drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, follow any of these

methods:

a. Push the CANCEL button. The SET indica-

tor will go out.

b. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator

will go out.

c. Move the selector lever to the N (Neutral)

position. The SET indicator will go out.

d. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the CRUISE

indicator and SET indicator will go out.

●If you depress the brake pedal while pushing

the RESUME/ACCELERATE or SET/COAST

switch and reset at the cruising speed, the

cruise control will disengage. Turn the MAIN

switch off once and then turn it on again.

SSD0600

5-18 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●The cruise control will automatically cancel if

the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (12

km/h) below the set speed.

●If you depress the clutch pedal (Manual

Transmission models) or move the selector

lever to N (Neutral) position (Automatic

Transmission models), the cruise control will

be canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of

the following methods:

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the SET/COAST switch.

●Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE

switch. When the vehicle attains the speed

you desire, release the switch.

●Push, then quickly release the

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each time you

do this, the set speed will increase by about

1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of

the following methods:

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET/COAST switch and release it.

●Push and hold the SET/COAST switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows

down to the desired speed.

●Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release

the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The vehicle

will resume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system au-

tomatically maintains a selected distance from

the vehicle traveling in front of you according to

that vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at

the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

The ICC function can be set to one of two cruise

control modes:

●Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

For maintaining a selected distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you

up to the preset speed.

●Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode:

For cruising at a preset speed.

WARNING

●Always drive carefully and attentively when

using either cruise control mode. Read and

understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly

before using the cruise control. To avoid se-

rious injury or death, do not rely on the sys-

tem to prevent accidents or to control the

vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do

not use cruise control except in appropriate

road and traffic conditions.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-19

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode, a warning buzzer will not sound to

warn you if you are too close to the vehicle

ahead. Pay special attention to the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead

of you or a collision could occur.

1. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

2. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode

Push the MAIN switch s

Ato choose the cruise

control mode between the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode s

1and the conventional

(fixed speed) cruise control mode s

Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent

Cruise Control system display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, see the following description. For the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode,

see page 5-37.

SELECTING THE VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE

DISTANCE CONTROL MODE

To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode s

1, quickly push and release the

MAIN switch s

Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be

changed to the other cruise control mode. To

change the mode, push the MAIN switch once to

turn the system off. Then push the MAIN switch

again to turn the system back on and select the

desired cruise control mode.

SSD0604

5-20 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode,

the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system auto-

matically maintains a selected distance from

the vehicle traveling in front of you according to

that vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at

the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

With ICC, the driver can maintain the same

speed as other vehicles without the constant

need to adjust the set speed as you would with

a normal cruise control system.

Sedan — Type A

SSD0624

Sedan — Type B

SSD0625

Coupe — Type A

SSD0662

Coupe — Type B

SSD0663

Starting and driving 5-21

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

PRECAUTIONS ON VEHICLE-TO-

VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE

The system is intended to enhance the opera-

tion of the vehicle when following a vehicle

traveling in the same lane and direction.

If the distance sensor s

Adetects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce

the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows

the vehicle in front at the selected distance.

The system automatically controls the throttle

and applies the brakes (up to 25% of vehicle

braking power) if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is approxi-

mately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

WARNING

●This system is only an aid to assist the driver

and is not a collision warning or avoidance

device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely and be in control of the

vehicle at all times.

●The system is primarily intended for use on

straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It

is not advisable to use the system in city

traffic or congested areas.

●This system will not adapt automatically to

road conditions. This system should be used

in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the sys-

tem on roads with sharp curves, or on icy

roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

The distance sensor will not detect under most

conditions:

●Stationary and slow moving vehicles

●Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

●Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

●Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

This system will not automatically brake the ve-

hicle to a stop.

WARNING

●As there is a performance limit to the dis-

tance control function, never rely solely on

the Intelligent Cruise Control system. This

system does not correct careless, inatten-

tive or absent-minded driving, or overcome

poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad

weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by de-

pressing the brake pedal, depending on the

distance to the vehicle ahead and the sur-

rounding circumstances in order to maintain

a safe distance between vehicles.

●Although the brake operation is controlled

by the system, the system does not auto-

matically stop the vehicle. If the vehicle

speed falls below approximately 20 MPH (32

km/h), the Intelligent Cruise Control system

is automatically canceled and a warning

chime sounds. (The brake control is also

canceled.)

●The system may not detect the vehicle in

front of you in certain road or weather condi-

tions. To avoid accidents, never use the In-

telligent Cruise Control system under the

following conditions:

– On roads where the traffic is heavy or

there are sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as on ice

or snow, etc.

5-22 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

When the windshield wiper is operated at

the low speed (LO) or high speed (HI) po-

sition, the Intelligent Cruise Control sys-

tem is automatically canceled.

– When strong light (for example, at sun-

rise or sunset) is directly shining on the

front of the vehicle

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the sys-

tem sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may

go beyond the set vehicle speed and fre-

quent braking may result in overheating

the brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill roads

– When traffic conditions make it difficult to

keep a proper distance between vehicles

because of frequent acceleration or

deceleration

●In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle

or object can unexpectedly come into the

sensor detection zone and cause automatic

braking. You may need to control the dis-

tance from other vehicles using the accelera-

tor pedal. Always stay alert and avoid using

the ICC system when it is not recommended

in this section.

Sedan — Type A

SSD0624

Sedan — Type B

SSD0625

Coupe — Type A

SSD0662

Coupe — Type B

SSD0663

Starting and driving 5-23

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE OPERATION

Always pay attention to the operation of the

vehicle and be ready to manually control the

proper following distance. The vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control mode of the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system may not be able to

maintain the selected distance between ve-

hicles (following distance) or selected vehicle

speed under some circumstances.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

uses a sensor s

Alocated on the front of the

vehicle to detect vehicles traveling ahead. The

sensor generally detects the signals returned

from the reflectors on a vehicle ahead. There-

fore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflector on

the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not

maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which the

sensor cannot detect the signals:

●When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is

positioned high on the vehicle (trailer, etc.)

●When the reflector on the vehicle ahead is

missing, damaged or covered

●When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is

covered with dirt, snow and road spray

●When the snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles reduces the sensor’s visibility

●When dense exhaust or other smoke (black

smoke) from vehicles reduces the sensor’s

visibility

●When excessively heavy baggage is loaded

in the rear seat or the trunk of your vehicle

The ICC system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s operation. When the sensor

is covered with dirt or obstructs, the system will

automatically be canceled. If the sensor is

covered with ice, a transparent or translucent

vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect

them. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode may not cancel and may

not be able to maintain the selected following

distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to

check and clean the sensor regularly.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is

designed to maintain a selected distance and

reduce the speed to match the slower vehicle

ahead; the system will decelerate the vehicle as

necessary. However, the ICC system can only

apply up to 25% of the vehicles total braking

power. This system should only be used when

traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re-

main fairly constant or when vehicle speeds

change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the

traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling

ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance be-

tween vehicles may become closer because the

ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle

quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system

will sound a warning chime and blink the

system display to notify the driver to take

necessary action.

The system will cancel and a warning chime will

sound if the speed falls below approximately 20

MPH (32 km/h). The system will also disengage

below the 20 MPH (32 km/h) cut-off speed or

over the maximum set speed.

See “Approach warning” later in this section.

The following items are controlled in the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

●When there are no vehicles traveling ahead,

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

maintains the speed set by the driver. The

set speed range is between approximately

25 and 90 MPH (40 and 144 km/h).

●When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ad-

justs the speed to maintain the distance,

selected by driver, from the vehicle ahead.

The adjusting speed range is between ap-

proximately 20 MPH (32 km/h) and up to the

set speed.

5-24 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved

out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control mode accelerates

and maintains vehicle speed up to the set

speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle speed

or warn you when you approach stationary and

slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to

vehicle operation to maintain proper distance

from vehicles ahead when approaching toll

gates or traffic congestion.

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited.

A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone

for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection

mode to maintain the selected distance from

the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the de-

tection zone due to its position within the same

lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected

in the same lane ahead if they are traveling

offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle

that is entering the lane ahead may not be

detected until the vehicle has completely

moved into the lane. If this occurs, the ICC

system may warn you by blinking the system

indicator and sounding the chime. The driver

may have to manually control the proper dis-

tance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0252

Starting and driving 5-25

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

When driving on some roads, such as winding,

hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are

under construction, the ICC sensor may detect

vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily

not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may

cause the ICC system to decelerate or acceler-

ate the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be affected

by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or trav-

eling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle con-

dition. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and sound-

ing the chime unexpectedly. You will have to

manually control the proper distance away from

the vehicle traveling ahead.

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and

approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead,

the ICC will adjust the speed to maintain the

distance, selected by the driver, from the ve-

hicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes

or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accel-

erate and maintain the speed up to the set

speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to

maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates

to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on

winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will

have to manually control the vehicle speed.

SSD0253 SSD0254

5-26 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Intelligent cruise control switch

The system is operated by a MAIN switch and

four control switches, all mounted on the steer-

ing wheel.

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally.

2. SET/COAST switch:

Sets desired cruise speed, reduces

speed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing

the set speed.

4. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following dis-

tance:

●Long

●Middle

●Short

5. MAIN switch:

Master switch to activate the system

Intelligent cruise control system

display and indicators

The display is located between the speedom-

eter and tachometer.

1. MAIN switch indicator:

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in

front of you.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance between

vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.

SSD0605 SSD0606

Starting and driving 5-27

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

4. Indicates your vehicle

5. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

6. Intelligent Cruise Control system warn-

ing light (Orange):

The light comes on if there is a malfunc-

tion in the ICC system.

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the indicators come on as illustrated

to check for a burned-out bulb, and it turns off

when the engine is started.

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push and

release the MAIN switch s

Aon. The cruise

indicator light, set distance indicator and set

vehicle speed indicator come on and in a

standby state for setting.

SSD0607 SSD0608

5-28 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to

the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch

and release it. (Vehicle ahead detection indica-

tor, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed

indicator come on.) Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the

set speed.

The Intelligent Cruise Control system cannot be

set under the following conditions even if the

SET/COAST switch is pushed.

●When traveling outside the 25 to 90 MPH (40

to 144 km/h) speed range

●While the brakes are applied by the driver

●When pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE

switch without a set speed in memory

●When the windshield wipers are operating at

low speed (LO) or high speed (HI)

●When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system is switched off

●When the SNOW mode switch is turned on

SSD0609

Starting and driving 5-29

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

1. System set display with vehicle ahead

2. System set display without vehicle ahead

System operation

WARNING

Normally when controlling the distance to a

vehicle ahead, this system automatically accel-

erates or decelerates your vehicle according to

the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the

accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle

when acceleration is required for a lane

change. Depress the brake pedal when decel-

eration is required to maintain a safe distance

to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking

or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when

using the ICC system.

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based

on the road conditions. The ICC system main-

tains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard

cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected

in the lane ahead.

The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead,

the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by con-

trolling the throttle and applying the brakes to

match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The

system then controls the vehicle speed based

on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain

the driver selected distance.

The stoplights of the vehicle come on and the

brake pedal depresses when braking is per-

formed by the ICC system.

When the brake operates, a noise may be heard.

This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle

ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC

system will also display the set speed and

selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the

ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to

resume the previously set vehicle speed. The

ICC system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected the vehicle

ahead detection indicator turns off.

SSD0610

5-30 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration

to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC

system is in operation, the system controls the

distance to that vehicle.

When passing another vehicle, the set speed

indicator will flash when the vehicle speed

exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indi-

cator will turn off when the area ahead of the

vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the

vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC

system, you can depress the accelerator pedal

when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle

rapidly.

How to change the set vehicle speed

To cancel the preset speed, use any of these

methods:

●Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

●Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed

indicator will go out.

●Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the ON/OFF

switch indicator and set vehicle speed indi-

cator will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of

the following methods:

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the SET/COAST switch.

●Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE

switch. The set vehicle speed will increase

by approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for

Canada).

●Push, then quickly release the

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each time you

do this, the set speed will increase by

approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for Canada).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of

the following methods:

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET/COAST switch and release it.

●Push and hold the SET/COAST switch. The

set vehicle speed will decrease by approxi-

mately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada).

SSD0611

Starting and driving 5-31

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will decrease by approximately 1 MPH (1

km/h for Canada).

To resume the preset speed, push and release

the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The vehicle

will resume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

How to change the set distance to

the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be se-

lected at any time depending on the traffic

conditions.

Each time the DISTANCE switch s

Ais pushed,

the set distance will change to long, middle,

short and back to long again in that sequence.

SSD0612

5-32 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●The distance to the vehicle ahead will

change according to the vehicle speed. The

higher the vehicle speed, the longer the

distance.

●If the engine is stopped, the set distance

becomes “long”. (Each time the engine is

started, the initial setting becomes “long”.)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle

or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns

the driver with the chime and ICC system dis-

play. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal

to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

●The chime sounds.

●The vehicle ahead detection and set dis-

tance indicator blink.

The warning chime may not sound in some

cases when there is a short distance between

vehicles. Some examples are:

●When the vehicles are traveling at the same

speed and the distance between vehicles is

not changing

●When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster

and the distance between vehicles is in-

creasing

●When the accelerator pedal is depressed,

overriding the system

●When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle

The warning chime will not sound when your

vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked or

moving slowly.

SSD0613

Starting and driving 5-33

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound and the

system display may blink when the ICC sensor

detects some reflectors s

Awhich are fitted on

vehicles in other lanes or on the side of the road.

This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or

accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may de-

tect these reflectors when the vehicle is driven

on winding roads, hilly roads or when entering

or exiting a curve. The ICC sensor may also de-

tect reflectors on narrow roads or in road con-

struction zones. In these cases you will have to

manually control the proper distance ahead of

your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by

vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving

position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condi-

tion (for example, if a vehicle is being driven

with some damage).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following conditions

and the control is automatically canceled.

●When the vehicle speed falls below approxi-

mately 20 MPH (32 km/h)

●When the selector lever is shifted to the N

(Neutral) position

●When the windshield wipers are operated at

low speed (LO) or high speed (HI)

●When the VDC is turned off

●When the VDC operates

●When the engine coolant temperature be-

comes excessively high

Warning light and display

Condition A

The chime sounds and the Intelligent Cruise

Control system is canceled automatically in the

conditions described below. Part of the system

display will come on or blink, making it impos-

sible to set.

●When the VDC is turned off

●When the VDC operates

●When a tire slips

●When the SNOW mode switch is turned on

●When strong light (sunlight, etc.) is directly

shining on the front of the vehicle

SSD0284A SSD0614

5-34 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no longer

present, turn the system off using the Intelli-

gent Cruise Control MAIN Switch. Turn the ICC

system back on to use the system.

Condition B

When the sensor window is dirty, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the ICC

system is automatically canceled.

The chime sounds and the system warning light

(Orange) will come on and the “CLEAN SENSOR”

indicator will appear.

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle

in a safe place, turn the engine off. Clean the

sensor window with a soft cloth and then

perform the settings again.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operating properly,

the chime sounds and the system warning light

(Orange) will come on.

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle

in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the

engine, resume driving and set the ICC system

again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the

indicator stays on, it may indicate that the sys-

tem is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is

still driveable under normal conditions, have the

vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer.

SSD0615 SSD0616

Starting and driving 5-35

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Sensor maintenance

The sensor for the ICC system s

Ais located

below the front bumper.

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be

sure to observe the following:

●Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe with a

soft cloth carefully so as not to damage the

sensor.

●Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor. Do not touch or remove the

screw located on the sensor. Doing so could

cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor is

damaged due to an accident, contact an

INFINITI dealer.

●Do not attach a sticker (including transpar-

ent material) or install an accessory near the

sensor. This could cause failure or malfunc-

tion.

Sedan — Type A

SSD0624

Sedan — Type B

SSD0625

Coupe — Type A

SSD0662

Coupe — Type B

SSD0663

5-36 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE

CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed between 25

to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping

your foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

●In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode, a warning chime does not sound

to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle

ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle

ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is

detected.

●Pay special attention to the distance be-

tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of

you or a collision could occur.

●Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent

Cruise Control system display.

●Do not use the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode when driving under the

following conditions:

– when it is not possible to keep the vehicle

at a set speed

– in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed

– on winding or hilly roads

– on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

– in very windy areas

●Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control

and result in an accident.

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control switch

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally.

2. SET/COAST switch:

Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces

speed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing

the set speed.

4. MAIN switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

SSD0617

Starting and driving 5-37

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and indicators

The display is located between the speedom-

eter and tachometer.

1. MAIN switch indicator:

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

2. Cruise set switch indicator:

Displays while the vehicle speed is con-

trolled by the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode of the ICC system.

3. Cruise system warning light:

Comes on if there is a malfunction in the

cruise control system.

Operating conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, push and hold the MAIN switch

Afor longer than about 1.5 seconds.

When pushing the MAIN switch on, the Intelli-

gent Cruise Control system display and the

CRUISE indicator are displayed on the dot ma-

trix crystal display. After you hold the MAIN

switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the

Intelligent Cruise Control system display goes

out. The CRUISE indicator stays lit. You can now

set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the

MAIN switch again will turn the system com-

pletely off.

SSD0618 SSD0619

5-38 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

When the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position, the system is also automatically

turned off. To use the Intelligent Cruise Control

again, quickly push and release the MAIN

switch (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise

control mode) again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control,

make sure to turn the ON/OFF switch off when

not using the Intelligent Cruise Control.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to

the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch

and release it. (The SET indicator will come on in

the display.) Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the accel-

erator pedal. When you release the pedal,

the vehicle will return to the previously set

speed.

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the

following methods:

a. Push the CANCEL button. The SET indica-

tor will go out.

b. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator

will go out.

c. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the CRUISE

indicator and SET indicator will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of

the following three methods:

a. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

and release the SET/COAST switch.

b. Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE

set switch. When the vehicle attains the

speed you desire, release the switch.

c. Push, then quickly release the

RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each time

you do this, the set speed will increase by

about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of

the following three methods:

a. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the SET/COAST switch and release it.

b. Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle

slows down to the desired speed.

SSD0620

Starting and driving 5-39

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

c. Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6

km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release

the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The vehicle

will resume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following conditions

and the control is automatically canceled.

●When the vehicle slows down more than 8

MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed

●When the vehicle speed falls below approxi-

mately 20 MPH (32 km/h)

●When the selector lever is shifted to the N

(Neutral) position

●When the VDC operates (except ABS, which

is functional with ICC system operation)

●When the engine coolant temperature be-

comes excessively high

Warning light

When the system is not operating properly, the

chime sounds and the system warning light

(Orange) will come on.

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle

in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the

engine, resume driving and then perform the

setting again.

If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays

on, it may indicate that the system is malfunc-

tioning. Although the vehicle is still driveable

under normal conditions, have the vehicle

checked at an INFINITI dealer.

PREVIEW FUNCTION (for Intelligent

Cruise Control system equipped

models)

The ICC system with the preview function iden-

tifies the need to apply emergency braking by

sensing the vehicle ahead in the same lane and

the distance to the vehicle ahead and relative

speed from it, it applies the brake pre-pressure

before the driver depresses the brake pedal and

helps improve brake response by reducing

pedal free play.

For more details, see “BRAKE ASSIST” later in

this section.

SSD0621

5-40 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow

these recommendations to obtain maximum

engine performance and ensure the future reli-

ability and economy of your new vehicle.

Failure to follow these recommendations may

result in shortened engine life and reduced en-

gine performance.

●Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

●Avoid quick starts.

●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

●Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant accelerator

position.

●Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

●Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.

●Select a gear range suitable to road condi-

tions.

●Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine idling.

●Keep your engine tuned up.

●Follow the recommended periodic mainte-

nance schedule.

●Keep the tires inflated at the correct pres-

sure. Improper tire pressure will increase

wear and waste fuel.

●Make sure the front wheels are properly

aligned. Improper alignment will cause pre-

mature tire wear and lower fuel economy.

●Climate control operation lowers fuel

economy. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

●When cruising at highway speeds, it is more

economical to use the air conditioner and

leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

The AWD warning light is located in the meter.

The AWD warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. It

turns off soon after the engine is started.

SSD0336

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-41

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system

while the engine is running, the warning light

will come on.

The warning light may blink rapidly (about twice

per second) while trying to free a stuck vehicle

due to high power train oil temperature. The

driving mode may change to two-wheel drive. If

the warning light blinks rapidly during opera-

tion, stop the vehicle with the engine idling in a

safe place immediately. Then if the light goes

off after a while, you can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of

front and rear wheels will make the warning

light blink slowly (about once per two seconds).

Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the

engine. Check that all tire sizes are the same,

tire pressure is correct and tires are not worn.

If the warning light is blinking after the above

operation, have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

●For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt

to raise two wheels off the ground and shift

the transmission to any drive or reverse po-

sition with the engine running. Doing so may

result in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result in seri-

ous vehicle damage or personal injury.

●Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped ve-

hicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as

the dynamometers used by some states for

emissions testing) or similar equipment

even if the other two wheels are raised off

the ground. Make sure that you inform the

test facility personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with AWD before it is placed on a

dynamometer. Using the wrong test equip-

ment may result in drivetrain damage or un-

expected vehicle movement which could re-

sult in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the engine on a free roller

when any of the wheels are raised.

●If the warning light comes on while driving

there may be a malfunction in the AWD sys-

tem. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your

vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as

soon as possible.

●If the warning light remains on after the

above operation, have your vehicle checked

by an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

●The power train may be damaged if you con-

tinue driving with the warning light blinking

rapidly.

5-42 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

WARNING

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam-

mable materials such as dry grass, waste

paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a

fire.

●Never leave the engine running while the

vehicle is unattended.

●Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate

switches or controls. Unattended children

could become involved in serious accidents.

●Safe parking procedures require that both

the parking brake be applied and the trans-

mission placed into P (Park) for Automatic

Transmission (AT) model or in an appropri-

ate gear for Manual Transmission (MT)

model. Failure to do so could cause the ve-

hicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and

result in an accident.

●Make sure the automatic transmission se-

lector lever has been pushed as far forward

as it can go and cannot be moved without

depressing the foot brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) gear.

When parking on an uphill grade, place the

shift lever in the 1st gear.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into the street when parked on a sloping

drive way, it is a good practice to turn the

wheels as illustrated.

●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: s

Turn the wheels into the curb and move

the vehicle forward until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: s

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL,

NO CURB: s

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away from

the center of the road if it moves.

SD1006MA

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-43

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off while

driving, the power assist for the steering will

not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic

pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you

will still have control of the vehicle. However,

much greater steering effort is needed, espe-

cially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. How-

ever, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal

will be required to stop the vehicle and the

stopping distance will be longer.

When the brake pedal is depressed slowly and

firmly, you may hear a clicking noise and feel a

slight pulsation. This is normal and indicates

that the Brake Assist System is operating.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up

the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to

normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds

until the brakes function correctly.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

5-44 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weak-

ened or whenever the parking brake shoes

and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to

assure the best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle ser-

vice manual and can be performed by an

INFINITI dealer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will cause overheating of the

brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster

and reduce gas mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

●While driving on a slippery surface, be care-

ful when braking, accelerating or downshift-

ing. Abrupt braking or accelerating could

cause the wheels to skid and result in an

accident.

●If the engine is not running or is turned off

while driving, the power assist for the

brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is

activated generating greater braking force than

a conventional brake booster even with light

pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking

operation and is not a collision warning or

avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibil-

ity to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of

the vehicle at all times.

PREVIEW FUNCTION (Intelligent Cruise

Control system equipped models)

When the Preview Function identifies the need

to apply emergency braking by sensing a ve-

hicle ahead in the same lane and the distance

and relative speed from it, it applies the brake

pre-pressure before the driver depresses the

brake pedal and helps improve brake response

by reducing pedal free play.

●This system will not operate when the ve-

hicle is moving at approximately 20 MPH (32

km/h) or less.

BRAKE ASSIST

Starting and driving 5-45

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●The pre-pressure function ceases when the

following conditions are met:

a. When the driver depresses the accelera-

tor pedal or the brake pedal.

b. If the driver does not operate the accel-

erator or brake pedal within approxi-

mately 1 second.

●The sensor will not detect:

a) Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

b) Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

c) Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane as illustrated

WARNING

●This system is only an aid to assist braking

operation and is not a collision warning or

avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsi-

bility to stay alert, drive safely and be in

control of the vehicle at all times.

●As there is a performance limit to the Pre-

view Function, never rely solely on this sys-

tem. This system does not correct careless

inattentive or absent-minded driving, or

overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other

bad weather. Reduce vehicle speed by de-

pressing the brake pedal, in order to main-

tain a safe distance between vehicles.

●The system may not detect the vehicle in

front of you in certain road or weather condi-

tions. The Preview Function may not operate

properly under the following conditions. The

vehicle is still driveable under normal condi-

tions and the Brake Assist will operate.

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the sys-

tem sensor

– When strong light (for example, at sun-

rise or sunset) is directly shining on the

front of the vehicle

– Winding or hilly roads may cause the sen-

sor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in

the same lane or may detect objects or

vehicles in other lanes.

– Vehicle position in the lane may cause the

sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle

in the same lane or may detect objects or

vehicles in other lanes.

SSD0338

5-46 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●When the Preview Function operates, the

brake pedal may move slightly and may

make a small noise. This is not a system

malfunction.

Warning light and display

When the Preview Function is not operating

properly, the buzzer sounds and the system

warning light (Orange) will come on.

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle

in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the

engine and resume driving.

If the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the

Preview Function is malfunctioning (the brake is

operative). Although the Vehicle is still drive-

able under normal conditions, have the vehicle

checked at an INFINITI dealer.

How to handle the sensor

The sensor for the Preview Function is common

with Intelligent Cruise Control and is located

below the front bumper.

To keep the Preview Function operating prop-

erly, be sure to observe the following:

●Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe with a

soft cloth carefully so as not to damage the

sensor.

●Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor. Do not touch or remove the

screw located on the sensor. Doing so could

cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor is

damaged due to an accident, contact an

INFINITI dealer.

●Do not attach a sticker (including transpar-

ent material) or install an accessory near the

sensor. This could cause failure or malfunc-

tion.

SSD0471

Starting and driving 5-47

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

●The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a so-

phisticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-

cidents resulting from careless or dangerous

driving techniques. It can help maintain ve-

hicle control during braking on slippery sur-

faces. Remember that stopping distances on

slippery surfaces will be longer than on nor-

mal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough, gravel

or snow covered roads, or if you are using

tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately,

the driver is responsible for safety.

●Tire type and condition may also affect brak-

ing effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the specified

size of tires on all four wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make sure

that it is the proper size and type as speci-

fied on the Tire and Loading Information

label. See “TIRE AND LOADING INFORMA-

TION LABEL” in the “9. Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this

manual.

– For detailed information, see “WHEELS

AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the

brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to

prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By

preventing each wheel from locking, the system

helps the driver maintain steering control and

helps to minimize swerving and spinning on

slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pres-

sure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will

operate to prevent the wheels from locking up.

Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may

result in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in

forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs,

you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a

pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and

does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer

senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off

and illuminates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then oper-

ates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked by an INFINITI dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH

(5 to 10 km/h).

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly

applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This

action is similar to pumping the brakes very

quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or

feel a vibration from the actuator when it is

operating. This is normal and indicates that the

5-48 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa-

tion may indicate that road conditions are haz-

ardous and extra care is required while driving.

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur-

faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors

detect these movements and control the brak-

ing and engine output to help improve vehicle

stability.

●When the VDC system is operating, the

“SLIP” indicator in the instrument panel

blinks.

●If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the road con-

ditions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your

speed and driving to these conditions. Be

sure to drive carefully. (See “Slip indicator

light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section, and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light” in the “2. Instruments

and controls” section.)

●Indicator light

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

“SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicator lights illumi-

nate in the instrument panel. As long as

these indicators are illuminated, the VDC

system function is canceled.

The VDC system uses an Active Brake Limited

Slip (ABLS) function to improve vehicle traction.

The ABLS system works when one of the driving

wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The

ABLS system brakes the spinning wheel, which

distributes the driving power to the other drive

wheel. If the vehicle is operated with the VDC

OFF switch pushed and the VDC system turned

off, all VDC systems will be turned off. The ABLS

system and ABS will still operate with the VDC

system off. If the ABLS system is activated, the

“SLIP” indicator will blink and you may hear a

clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of

a malfunction.

While the VDC system is operating, you may feel

a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise

or feel a vibration from under the hood. This is

normal and indicates that the VDC system is

working properly.

The VDC system computer has a built-in diag-

nostic feature that tests the system each time

you start the engine and move the vehicle at a

low speed forward or backward. When the

self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This

is normal and is not an indication of a

malfunction.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-49

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

WARNING

●The VDC system is designed to help improve

driving stability but does not prevent acci-

dents due to abrupt steering operation at

high speeds or due to careless or dangerous

driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed

and be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and always

drive carefully.

●If engine related parts such as muffler are

not standard equipment or are extremely de-

teriorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP”

indicator or both indicator lights may

illuminate.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If

suspension parts such as shock absorbers,

struts, springs, stabilizer bars and bushings

are not INFINITI approved or are extremely

deteriorated the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly. This could adversely affect ve-

hicle handling performance, and the “VDC

OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both

indicator lights may illuminate.

●If brake related parts such as brake pads,

rotors and calipers are not standard equip-

ment or are extremely deteriorated, the

“VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or

both indicator lights may illuminate.

●When driving on extremely inclined surfaces

such as higher banked corners, the VDC sys-

tem may not operate properly and the “VDC

OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both

indicator lights may illuminate. Do not drive

on these types of roads.

●When driving on unstable surfaces such as a

turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the “VDC

OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both

indicator lights may illuminate. This is not a

malfunction. Restart the engine after driving

onto a stable surface.

●If wheels or tires other than those recom-

mended are used, the VDC system may not

operate properly and “VDC OFF” indicator or

“SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may

illuminate.

●The VDC system is not a substitute for winter

tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

The 4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system is an

electronically controlled four-wheel steering

system.

Depending on the vehicle speed and steering

angle, the angles of the front and rear wheels

are adjusted by the 4WAS system to help

improve driving performance.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the 4WAS

function will stop but the ordinary two-wheel

steering system will operate normally. The

“4WAS” warning light will illuminate. If the light

illuminates while you are driving, contact an

INFINITI dealer for repair.

The steering wheel may be slightly turned even

when driving on a straight road due to a

protection mechanism for the 4WAS system.

This is not a malfunction. The steering wheel

will return to the normal position after the

protection mechanism deactivates.

The protection mechanism activates under the

following conditions:

●The steering wheel is operated forcibly when

it is hard to operate or the tires are blocked

by obstacles.

●The steering wheel is continuously operated

when the vehicle is parked or being driven at

extremely low speed.

4 WHEEL ACTIVE STEER (4WAS) SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

5-50 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●The steering wheel is forcibly turned beyond

its operation limits.

●The battery voltage is reduced.

Repeated steering maneuvers that may activate

the protection mechanism will damage the

4WAS system.

WARNING

The 4WAS system, although a sophisticated

device, cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving techniques.

Ultimately the responsibility for safety of self

and others rests in the hands of the driver.

Therefore only through attentive and careful

driving methods can the 4WAS system be fully

appreciated and safety optimized.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the

key hole or use the Intelligent Key system.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

outside temperature will drop below 32°C (0°F),

check antifreeze to assure proper winter protec-

tion. For additional information, see “ENGINE

COOLING SYSTEM” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during ex-

tremely cold weather conditions, the battery

fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To

maintain maximum efficiency, the battery

should be checked regularly. For additional

information, see “BATTERY” in the “8. Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including

the engine block. Refill before operating the

vehicle. For details, see “ENGINE COOLING SYS-

TEM” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide

superior performance on dry pavement. How-

ever, the performance of these tires will be

substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi-

tions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or

icy roads, INFINITI recommends the use of MUD

& SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Consult an INFINITI dealer for the tire type, size,

speed rating and availability information.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S. states

and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws before

installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than

that of non-studded snow tires.

Tire chains may be used. For details, see “TIRE

CHAINS” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

For all-wheel drive

If you install snow tires, they must also be the

same size, brand, construction and tread pat-

tern on all four wheels.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-51

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

●Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-

voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

●Wet ice (32°C, 0°F and freezing rain), very

cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to

drive on. The vehicle will have much less

traction or “grip” under these conditions.

Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road

is salted or sanded.

●Whatever the condition, drive with caution.

Accelerate and slow down with care. If accel-

erating or downshifting too fast, the drive

wheels will lose even more traction.

●Allow more stopping distance under these

conditions. Braking should be started

sooner than on dry pavement.

●Allow greater following distances on slip-

pery roads.

●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These

may appear on an otherwise clear road in

shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead,

brake before reaching it. Try not to brake

while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steer-

ing maneuvers.

●Do not use the cruise control on slippery

roads.

●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases un-

der your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the ex-

haust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are available through

INFINITI dealers to assist in cold temperature

starting. The engine block heater should be

used when the outside temperature is 20°C

(27°F) or lower.

To use the engine block heater

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension

cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged

in for at least2-4hours, depending on

outside temperatures, to properly warm

the engine coolant. Use an appropriate

timer to turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away

from moving parts.

WARNING

●Do not use your engine block heater with an

ungrounded electrical system or a

2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously in-

jured by an electrical shock if you use an

ungrounded connection.

5-52 Starting and driving

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Disconnect and properly store the engine

block heater cord before starting the engine.

Damage to the cord could result in an electri-

cal shock and can cause serious injury.

●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-

sion cord rated for at least 10A. Plug the

extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt

(GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.

Failure to use the proper extension cord or a

grounded outlet can result in a fire or electri-

cal shock and cause serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-53

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

5-54 Starting and driving

MEMO

6 In case of emergency

Roadside assistance program ...................... 6-2

Flat tire...........................................6-2

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)..........6-2

Changing a flat tire............................. 6-3

Jump starting .....................................6-8

Push starting .................................... 6-10

If your vehicle overheats .......................... 6-10

Towing your vehicle ...............................6-11

Towing recommended by INFINITI ............... 6-12

Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ....... 6-14

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year, unlim-

ited mileage Roadside Assistance plan. In the

event of a roadside emergency, Roadside Assis-

tance Service is available to you. Please refer to

your Warranty Information Booklet (U.S.) or

Warranty & Roadside Assistance Information

Booklet (Canada) for details. Both the Warranty

Information Booklet and Roadside Assistance

Calling Card in your Owner’s Literature Portfolio

provide the Toll-Free Number to call for assis-

tance. Roadside Assistance is provided 24

hours a day, 365 days a year, for 4 years from

the date sold to give emergency roadside help,

in the event of mechanical or nonmechanical

trouble(s) such as flat tires, out-of-gas, dead

battery, lost keys, mechanical breakdown, acci-

dent, etc.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire

pressure of all tires except the spare. When the

low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low

tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn

you of it by the low tire pressure warning light.

This system will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For

more details, see “WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the “2. Instru-

ments and controls” section and “TIRE PRES-

SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

●If the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates or LOW PRESSURE information is dis-

played on the monitor screen while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage the

tires and increase the likelihood of tire fail-

ure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could result in

serious personal injury. Check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure

to the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Information

label to turn the low tire pressure warning

light OFF. If the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a

tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace

it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function and the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI

dealer as soon as possible for tire replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper

operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire

sealant into the tires, as this may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Move the selector lever to

the P (Park) position (Automatic transmis-

sion models). Move the shift lever to the R

(Reverse) gear (Manual transmission

models).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and

to signal professional road assistance

personnel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from

traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

●Make sure the parking brake is securely ap-

plied and the manual transmission is shifted

into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmis-

sion into P (Park).

●Never change tires when the vehicle is on a

slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for professional

road assistance.

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks s

1at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat

tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it

is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may

move and result in personal injury.

MCE0001A

In case of emergency 6-3

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Getting the spare tire and tools

Raise the trunk floor cover s

1using the tab s

Remove jacking tools located inside the trunk

as illustrated.

The spare tire is located under the jacking tools.

Remove the cap s

2holding the spare tire.

Jacking up the vehicle and removing

the damaged tire

WARNING

●Never get under the vehicle while it is sup-

ported only by the jack. If it is necessary to

work under the vehicle, support it with

safety stands.

●Use only the jack provided with your vehicle

to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack pro-

vided with your vehicle on other vehicles.

The jack is designed for lifting only your ve-

hicle during a tire change.

●Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any

other part of the vehicle for jack support.

●Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

●Never use blocks on or under the jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is

on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to

move. This is especially true for vehicles

with limited slip differentials.

●Do not allow passengers to stay in the ve-

hicle while it is on the jack.

Jacking tools — Sedan

SCE0659

Jacking tools — Coupe

SCE0695

Spare — Sedan and Coupe

SCE0702

6-4 In case of emergency

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Carefully read the caution label attached to the

jack body and the following instructions.

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.

Also fit the groove of the jack head be-

tween the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm ground.

Jack-up point

CE1089-A

In case of emergency 6-5

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns

by turning counterclockwise with the

wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the

wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire

clears the ground. To lift the vehicle,

securely hold the jack lever and rod with

both hands as shown above. Remove the

wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

Installing the spare tire

The T-type spare tire is designed for emergency

use. (See specific instructions under the head-

ing “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.)

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

SCE0504 SCE0661

6-6 In case of emergency

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

Models equipped with different sized tires in

the front and rear:

When replacing a front tire, make sure that

the hole in the spare tire wheel is aligned

with the pin on the brake rotor.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly in the se-

quence as illustrated (

)

until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts se-

curely in the sequence as illustrated.

Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened

wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become

loose or come off. This could cause an

accident.

●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or

nuts. This could cause the nuts to become

loose.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle

has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km)

(also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

●As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to speci-

fication at all times. It is recommended that

wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at

each lubrication interval.

●Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked for three

hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6

km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label affixed to the

driver side center pillar.

Sedan

SCE0662

Coupe

SCE0696

In case of emergency 6-7

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking

equipment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk

floor carpeting over the damaged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire and

jacking equipment are properly secured af-

ter use. Such items can become dangerous

projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.

●The T-type spare tire and small size spare

tire are designed for emergency use. See

specific instructions under the heading

“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.

If needed Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information Booklet

or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free

number to call (U.S.) or Warranty Information

Booklet (Canada).

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be

followed.

WARNING

●If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to

a battery explosion, resulting in severe in-

jury or death. It could also damage your

vehicle.

●Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in

the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks

and flames away from the battery.

●Do not allow battery fluid to come into con-

tact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted sur-

faces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric

acid solution which can cause severe burns.

If the fluid should come into contact with

anything, immediately flush the contacted

area with water.

●Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

●The booster battery must be rated at 12

volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can

damage your vehicle.

●Whenever working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protectors (for ex-

ample, goggles or industrial safety spec-

tacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or

any other jewelry. Do not lean over the bat-

tery when jump starting.

●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery.

It could explode and cause serious injury.

●Your vehicle has an automatic engine cool-

ing fan. It could come on at any time. Keep

hands and other objects away from it.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information Booklet

or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free

number to call (U.S.) or Warranty Information

Booklet (Canada).

JUMP STARTING

6-8 In case of emergency

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Failure to

do so could result in damage to the charging

system and cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle

, position the two vehicles (

and

)

to bring their batteries into close proxim-

ity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector

lever to the P (Park) position (Automatic

transmission models). Move the shift le-

ver to the N (Neutral) position (Manual

transmission models). Switch off all un-

necessary electrical systems (light,

heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly

wrung out moist cloth

to reduce explo-

sion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as

illustrated (

→

If the battery is disconnected or discharged,

the steering wheel will lock and cannot be

turned. Supply power using jumper cables

before pushing the ignition switch and dis-

engaging the steering lock.

CAUTION

●Always connect positive (+) to positive (+)

and negative (2) to body ground (as illus-

trated) — not to the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cables do not touch

moving parts in the engine compartment and

that clamps do not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle

at about 2,000 rpm, and start

the engine of the vehicle being jump

started

SCE0653

In case of emergency 6-9

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more

than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start

right away, push the ignition switch to the OFF

position and wait 10 seconds before trying

again.

7. After starting your engine, carefully dis-

connect the negative cable and then the

positive cable (

→

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover

the vent holes as it may be contaminated

with corrosive acid.

9. Put the battery cover on.

CAUTION

●Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way

catalyst may be damaged.

●For manual transmission models, never try

to start the vehicle by towing it; when the

engine starts, the forward surge could cause

the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information Booklet

or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free

number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside

Assistance Information Booklet (Canada).

CAUTION

●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle over-

heats. Doing so could cause engine damage

or a vehicle fire.

●To avoid the danger of being scalded, never

remove the radiator cap while the engine is

still hot. When the radiator cap is removed,

pressurized hot water will spurt out, possi-

bly causing serious injury.

●Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading), or

if you feel a lack of engine power, detect

abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the selector

lever to the P (Park) position (Automatic

transmission models). Move the shift lever

to the N (Neutral) position (Manual trans-

mission models).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the climate control. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maximum

hot and fan control to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-10 In case of emergency

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

3. If engine overheating is caused by climb-

ing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine

at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm)

until the temperature gauge indication

returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radia-

tor before opening the hood. (If steam or

coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)

Do not open the hood further until no

steam or coolant can be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine,

stand clear to prevent getting burned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leak-

ing or the cooling fan does not run, stop

the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry

or clothing to come into contact with, or get

caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling

fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any

time.

7. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the reservoir tank with the

engine running. Add coolant to the reser-

voir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle

repaired at the nearest INFINITI dealer.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information Booklet

or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free

number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside

Assistance Information Booklet (Canada).

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial

in Canada) and local regulations for towing

must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment

could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions

are available from an INFINITI dealer. Local

service operators are familiar with the appli-

cable laws and procedures for towing. To assure

proper towing and to prevent accidental dam-

age to your vehicle, INFINITI recommends that

you have a service operator tow your vehicle. It

is advisable to have the service operator care-

fully read the following precautions.

WARNING

●Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.

●Never get under your vehicle after it has been

lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

●When towing, make sure that the transmis-

sion, axles, steering system and powertrain

are in working condition. If any unit is dam-

aged, dollies must be used.

●Always attach safety chains before towing.

For information about towing your vehicle be-

hind a recreational vehicle (RV), see “FLAT

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-11

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

TOWING” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information Booklet

or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free

number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside

Assistance Information Booklet (Canada).

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY INFINITI

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be towed

with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or

place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illus-

trated.

CAUTION

●Never tow automatic transmission models

with the rear wheels on the ground or four

wheels on the ground (forward or backward),

as this may cause serious and expensive

damage to the transmission. If it is neces-

sary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels

raised, always use towing dollies under the

rear wheels.

Two-wheel drive models

SCE0561

6-12 In case of emergency

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

●When towing rear wheel drive models with

the front wheels on the ground or on towing

dollies: Push the ignition switch to the ACC

or ON position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position with a

rope or similar device. Never secure the

steering wheel by selecting the LOCK posi-

tion. This may damage the steering lock

mechanism.

●If you have to tow manual transmission mod-

els with the rear wheels on the ground (if you

do not use towing dollies) or four wheels on

the ground:

– Push the ignition switch to the ON

position.

– Always release the parking brake.

– Move the transmission shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position.

– Observe the following restricted towing

speeds and distances for manual trans-

mission models only:

Speed: Below 60 MPH (95 km/h)

Distance: Less than 500 miles (800 km)

– If the speed or distance must necessarily

be greater, remove the propeller shaft be-

fore towing to prevent damage to the

transmission.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

INFINITI recommends that towing dollies be

used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be

placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow AWD models with any of the wheels

on the ground as this may cause serious and

expensive damage to the powertrain.

All-wheel drive models

SCE0488

In case of emergency 6-13

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a stuck

vehicle)

WARNING

●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

●Do not spin your tires at high speed. This

could cause them to explode and result in

serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could

also overheat and be damaged.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use a tow strap or other device designed spe-

cifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-

vice.

Securely install the vehicle recovery hook s

stored with jacking tools as illustrated. Attach

the tow strap to the recovery hook. Make sure

that the hook is properly secured in the original

place after use.

Do not use the tie down hooks s

2for towing or

vehicle recovery.

CAUTION

●Tow chains or cables must be attached only

to the vehicle recovery hooks or main struc-

tural members of the vehicle. Otherwise, the

vehicle body will be damaged.

●Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free a

vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.

●Never tow a vehicle using the vehicle tie

downs or recovery hooks.

●Always pull the cable straight out from the

front of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle

at an angle.

●Pulling devices should be routed so they do

not touch any part of the suspension, steer-

ing, brake or cooling systems.

●Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use in ve-

hicle towing or recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind

the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

SCE0654

6-14 In case of emergency

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to

clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

●Shift back and forth between R (reverse)

and D (drive) (automatic transmission

models) or 1st (low) and R (reverse)

(manual transmission models).

●Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.

●Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R and D (automatic

transmission models) or 1st and R

(manual transmission models).

●Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55

km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing ser-

vice to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

6-16 In case of emergency

MEMO

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior .................................. 7-2

Washing....................................... 7-2

Waxing ........................................ 7-2

Removing spots ................................ 7-3

Underbody..................................... 7-3

Glass ......................................... 7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels ......................... 7-3

Chrome parts .................................. 7-3

Tire dressing................................... 7-3

Cleaning interior .................................. 7-4

Power window switch finisher (Sedan) ........... 7-4

Floor mats ..................................... 7-5

Seat belts ..................................... 7-5

Corrosion protection............................... 7-6

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion ............................... 7-6

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ...................................... 7-6

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........... 7-6

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

In order to maintain the appearance of your

vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surface, wash your vehicle

as soon as you can:

●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain

●after driving on coastal roads

●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get

on the paint surface

●when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when

putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and

plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly

using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with

clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

●Do not use car washes that use acid in the

detergent. Some car washes, especially

brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning.

The acid may react with some plastic vehicle

components, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and also could

cause them not to function properly. Always

check with your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

●Do not wash the vehicle with strong house-

hold soap, strong chemical detergents,

gasoline or solvents.

●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or

while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface

may become water-spotted.

●Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths,

such as washing mitts. Care must be taken

when removing caked-on dirt or other for-

eign substances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface

by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing

is recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

reapplying wax.

An INFINITI dealer can assist you in choosing

the proper product.

●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with

the wax.

●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polishing on

a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, in-

sects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from

the paint surface to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are avail-

able at an INFINITI dealer or any automotive

accessory stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, the

underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will

prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the

underbody and suspension. Before the winter

period and again in the spring, the underseal

must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust

film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for

glass to become coated with a film after the

vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner

and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows, do

not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or

chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They

could damage the electrical conductors, radio

antenna elements or rear window defroster

elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a

mild soap solution, especially during winter

months in areas where road salt is used. Salt

could discolor the wheels if not removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid staining or

discoloring the wheels:

●Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or

alkali contents to clean the wheels.

●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels

when they are hot. The wheel temperature

should be the same as ambient temperature.

●Rinse the wheel to completely remove the

cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is

applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non- abra-

sive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSING

INFINITI does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating

to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the

rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires,

it may react with the coating and form a com-

pound. This compound may come off the tire

while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating

on the tire dissolves more easily with an

oil-based tire dressing.

●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Occasionally remove loose dust from the inte-

rior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl

and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth

dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe

clean with a dry soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric

protectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

●Never use benzine, thinner, or any similar

material.

●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and dam-

aging to the leather surfaces and should be

removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap,

car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,

solvents, detergents or ammonia-based

cleaners as they may damage the leather’s

natural finish.

●Only use fabric protectors approved by

INFINITI.

●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter

or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens

cover.

POWER WINDOW SWITCH FINISHER

(Sedan)

Wipe the power window switch finisher surfaces

with a clean soft cloth dampened in a mild soap

solution, then wipe it clean with a dry, soft

cloth.

Some cleaners contain chemicals that may

stain or peel off the surface. Before using any

cleaner, contact an INFINITI dealer for recom-

mendations.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the power finisher

surfaces.

SAI0036

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

FLOOR MATS

The use of INFINITI floor mats can extend the life

of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to

clean the interior. No matter what mats are

used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and

are properly positioned in the footwell to pre-

vent interference with pedal operation. Mats

should be maintained with regular cleaning and

replaced if they become excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid

This model includes front floor mat brackets to

act as floor mat positioning aid. INFINITI floor

mats have been specially designed for your

vehicle model. The front floor mats have grom-

met holes in them. To install, simply position

the mat by placing the floor mat bracket

through the floor mat grommet hole while cen-

tering the mat in the floor pan contour.

Periodically check to make certain that the mats

are properly positioned.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solu-

tion. Allow the belts to dry completely before

using them.

See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical

solvents to clean the seat belts, since these

materials may severely weaken the seat belt

webbing.

SAI0031

Appearance and care 7-5

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

●The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

●Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE

THE RATE OF CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the

vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-

sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely

inside the vehicle, and should be removed for

drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing where

atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt

is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the rate

of corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the

air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will

accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will

also accelerate the disintegration of paint sur-

faces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

●Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

●Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CAUTION

●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from

the passenger compartment by washing it

out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum

cleaner or broom.

●Never allow water or other liquids to come in

contact with electronic components inside

the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned peri-

odically.

For additional protection against rust and cor-

rosion, which may be required in some areas,

consult an INFINITI dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

7-6 Appearance and care

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Appearance and care 7-7

MEMO

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirement ..........................8-2

Scheduled maintenance ........................ 8-2

General maintenance ...........................8-2

Where to go for service .........................8-2

General maintenance ..............................8-2

Explanation of maintenance items ...............8-2

Maintenance precautions .......................... 8-5

Engine compartment check locations................ 8-7

VQ35HR/VQ37VHR engine ....................... 8-7

Engine cooling system .............................8-8

Checking engine coolant level ...................8-8

Changing engine coolant........................8-9

Engine oil ........................................8-9

Checking engine oil level .......................8-9

Changing engine oil and filter ...................8-9

Automatic transmission fluid ...................... 8-12

Power steering fluid .............................. 8-12

Brake and clutch fluid ............................ 8-12

Brake fluid ................................... 8-13

Clutch fluid ................................... 8-13

Window washer fluid ............................. 8-13

Battery .......................................... 8-14

Coupe........................................ 8-14

Sedan and coupe ............................. 8-14

Jump starting ................................. 8-16

Variable voltage control system ................... 8-16

Drive belts....................................... 8-16

Spark plugs ..................................... 8-17

Replacing spark plugs ......................... 8-17

Air cleaner....................................... 8-18

Windshield wiper blades.......................... 8-18

Cleaning...................................... 8-18

Replacing..................................... 8-19

Brakes ..........................................8-20

Self-adjusting brakes ..........................8-20

Brake pad wear indicators .....................8-20

Fuses ...........................................8-20

Engine compartment...........................8-20

Passenger compartment .......................8-22

Intelligent key battery replacement ................8-22

Lights ...........................................8-24

Sedan........................................8-24

Coupe........................................8-25

Headlights....................................8-26

Exterior and interior lights .....................8-27

Wheels and tires .................................8-30

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Tire pressure..................................8-30

Tire labeling ..................................8-34

Types of tires .................................8-36

Tire chains ...................................8-37

Changing wheels and tires.....................8-37

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Your new INFINITI has been designed to have

minimum maintenance requirements with long

service intervals to save you both time and

money. However, some day-to-day and regular

maintenance is essential to maintain your IN-

FINITI’s fine mechanical condition, as well as its

emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper

maintenance care. You are a vital link in the

maintenance chain.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

For your convenience, both required and op-

tional scheduled maintenance items are de-

scribed and listed in your “INFINITI Service and

Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that

guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is

performed on your INFINITI at regular intervals.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal day-to-

day operation. They are essential for proper

vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to

perform these procedures regularly as pre-

scribed.

Performing general maintenance checks re-

quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few

general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer,

an INFINITI dealer.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your ve-

hicle appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and serviced by an INFINITI dealer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained specialists

and are kept up to date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-dealership information systems.

They are completely qualified to work on

INFINITI vehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that an INFINITI dealer’s

service department performs the best job to

meet the maintenance requirements on your

vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smell, be sure to check for the cause or have an

INFINITI dealer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify an INFINITI dealer if you think that

repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, see “MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS” later

in this section.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE

ITEMS

Additional information on the following items

with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors

and the engine hood, operate properly. Also

ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate

hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if

necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch

keeps the hood from opening when the primary

latch is released.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication fre-

quently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other

lights are all operating properly and installed

securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the

tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and

check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if

necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km). If your vehicle is

equipped with different sized tires in the front

and rear, tires cannot be rotated.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If nec-

essary, adjust the pressure in all tires, includ-

ing the spare, to the pressure specified. Check

carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) trans-

mitter components: Replace the TPMS transmit-

ter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the

tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven

or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for

wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal

highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer

to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the

INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a

damaged windshield repaired by a qualified

repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or

wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when

performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the

vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation and make sure the pedal does not

catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor

mat away from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism: On

a fairly steep hill, check that your vehicle is held

securely with the selector lever in the P (Park)

position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth opera-

tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down

further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or

the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see an

INFINITI dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat

away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake opera-

tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely

held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking

brake applied. If the parking brake needs ad-

justed, see an INFINITI dealer.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjuster

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure

they operate smoothly and that all latches lock

securely in every position. Check that the head

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

restraints move up and down smoothly and that

the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all

latched positions.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steer-

ing conditions, such as excessive free play,

hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all

warning lights and chimes are operating prop-

erly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes

out of the defroster outlets properly and in

sufficient quantity when operating the heater or

air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the

wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time

you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or un-

der severe condition require frequent checks of

the battery fluid level.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on

the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is

frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the

engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected by an INFINITI dealer. (See

“PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section for

exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).)

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,

water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from

the air conditioner after use is normal. If you

should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are

evident, check for the cause and have it cor-

rected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the

level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off.

Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,

cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances, other-

wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and around the exhaust system. At the

end of winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, being careful

to clean those areas where mud and dirt may

accumulate. For additional information, see

“CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance

and care” section.

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

When performing any inspection or mainte-

nance work on your vehicle, always take care to

prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or

damage to the vehicle. The following are gen-

eral precautions which should be closely ob-

served.

WARNING

●Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the

parking brake securely and block the wheels

to prevent the vehicle from moving. For

manual transmission models, move the shift

lever to N (Neutral). For automatic transmis-

sion models, move the selector lever to P

(Park).

●Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or

LOCK position when performing any parts

replacement or repairs.

●Never connect or disconnect the battery or

any transistorized component while the ig-

nition switch is in the ON position.

●Never leave the engine or automatic trans-

mission related component harnesses dis-

connected while the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

●If you must work with the engine running,

keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools

away from moving fans, belts and any other

moving parts.

●It is advisable to secure or remove any loose

clothing and remove any jewelry, such as

rings, watches, etc. before working on your

vehicle.

●Always wear eye protection whenever you

work on your vehicle.

●If you must run the engine in an enclosed

space such as a garage, be sure there is

proper ventilation for exhaust gases to

escape.

●Never get under the vehicle while it is sup-

ported only by a jack. If it is necessary to

work under the vehicle, support it with

safety stands.

●Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks

away from fuel tank and the battery.

●Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic

engine cooling fan. It may come on at any

time without warning, even if the ignition

key is in the OFF position and the engine is

not running. To avoid injury, always discon-

nect the negative battery cable before work-

ing near the fan.

●The fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced

by an INFINITI dealer because the fuel lines

are under high pressure even when the en-

gine is off.

CAUTION

●Do not work under the hood while the engine

is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it

cools down.

●Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil,

coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can dam-

age the environment. Always conform to lo-

cal regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion gives instructions regarding only those

items which are relatively easy for an owner to

perform.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also avail-

able. (See “OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in the “9. Tech-

nical and consumer information” section.)

You should be aware that incomplete or im-

proper servicing may result in operating diffi-

culties or excessive emissions, and could affect

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any

servicing, we recommend that it be done by an

INFINITI dealer.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

VQ35HR/VQ37VHR ENGINE

1. Fuse/fusible link holder

2. Battery

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Transmis-

sion models)

6. Window washer fluid reservoir

7. Power steering fluid reservoir

8. Air cleaner

9. Radiator filler cap

10. Drive belts

11. Engine coolant reservoir

12. Engine oil dipstick

SSI0345

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze

coolant solution. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore

additional cooling system additives are not

necessary.

WARNING

●Never remove the radiator cap when the en-

gine is hot. Wait until the engine and radia-

tor cool down. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. See precautions in “IF YOUR

VEHICLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

●The radiator is equipped with a pressure

type radiator cap. To prevent engine dam-

age, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to

use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent with

the proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and

50% demineralized or distilled water. The use

of other types of coolant solutions may damage

the engine cooling system.

Outside

temperature

down to

Antifreeze Demineral-

ized water

or distilled

water

°F °C

235 230 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the

engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN

2, open the reservoir tank cap and add coolant

up to the MAX s

1level. If the reservoir tank is

empty, check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient

coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with

coolant up to the filler opening and also add it

to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level s

Tighten the cap securely after adding engine

coolant.

If the cooling system requires coolant fre-

quently, have it checked by an INFINITI dealer.

SDI2043

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be per-

formed by an INFINITI dealer. The service pro-

cedures can be found in the appropriate INFINITI

Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced heater

performance and engine overheating.

WARNING

●To avoid the danger of being scalded, never

change the coolant when the engine is hot.

●Never remove the radiator cap when the en-

gine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by

high pressure fluid escaping from the

radiator.

●Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant.

If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly

with soap or hand cleaner as soon as

possible.

●Keep coolant out of reach of children and

pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15

minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil

pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the

oil level. It should be within the range

If the oil level is below

, remove the oil

filler cap and pour recommended oil

through the opening. Do not overfill

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil mainte-

nance intervals or during the break-in period,

depending on the severity of operating condi-

tions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Operat-

ing the engine with an insufficient amount of oil

can damage the engine, and such damage is

not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15

minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a

suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.

●Place the safety jack stands under the

vehicle jack-up points.

●A suitable adapter should be attached to

the jack stand saddle.

SDI2045

ENGINE OIL

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.

a. Remove the small plastic clip at the center

point of the undercover.

b. Then remove the other bolts that hold the

undercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and support

points are used to avoid vehicle damage.

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug

with a wrench

and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil

is hot.

●Waste oil must be disposed of properly.

●Check your local regulations.

4. (Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the

engine oil filter change is needed.)

Loosen the oil filter s

2with an oil filter

wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it by

hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur-

face with a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket re-

maining on the mounting surface of the

engine.

Two-wheel drive (2WD) models

SDI2024

All-wheel drive (AWD) models

SDI2047

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a

slight resistance is felt, then tighten ad-

ditionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb

(14.7 to 20.5 N·m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a

new washer. Securely tighten the drain

plug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29 to 39 N·m)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill engine with recommended oil and

install the oil filler cap securely.

See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section for drain and

refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity

depends on the oil temperature and drain time.

Use these specifications for reference only.

Always use the dipstick to determine the proper

amount of oil in the engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the drain plug and the oil filter.

Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15

minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into position

as the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plastic clip

out.

b. Hold the engine undercover into position.

c. Insert the clip through the undercover into

the hole in the frame, then push the

center of the clip in to lock the clip in

place.

d. Install the other bolts that hold the un-

dercover in place. Be careful not to strip

the bolts or over-tighten them.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

WARNING

●Prolonged and repeated contact with used

engine oil may cause skin cancer.

●Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil.

If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly

with soap or hand cleaner as soon as

possible.

●Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

When checking or replacement is required, we

recommend an INFINITI dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

●Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF. Do not

mix with other fluids.

●Using automatic transmission fluid other

than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause

deterioration in driveability and automatic

transmission durability, and may damage

the automatic transmission, which is not

covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited

warranty. Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT

range (s

1: HOT MAX., s

2: HOT MIN.) at fluid

temperatures of 122 to 176°C (50 to 80°F) or

using the COLD range (s

3: COLD MAX., s

COLD MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86°C

(0 to 30°F).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap and

fill through the opening.

CAUTION

●Do not overfill.

●Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake and clutch fluid information,

see “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

●Use only new fluid from a sealed container.

Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may dam-

age the brake and clutch system.

●Be sure to clean the filler cap before

removing.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This

will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash

the surface with water.

SDI1765A

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

BRAKE FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid

is below the MIN line s

2or the brake warning

light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super

Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid

up to the MAX line s

1. If fluid must be added

frequently, the system should be checked by an

INFINITI dealer.

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid

level is below the MIN line s

1, add Genuine

NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equiva-

lent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line s

2. If fluid

must be added frequently, the system should

be checked by an INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

Antifreeze is poisonous and should be stored

carefully in marked containers out of the reach

of children.

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally. Add window washer fluid when the low

window washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the

cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window

washer fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a wind-

shield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

SDI2025 SDI1906A SDI2027

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driv-

ing conditions require an increased amount of

window washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze

or equivalent.

CAUTION

●Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant

for window washer solution. This may result

in damage to the paint.

●Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank

with washer fluid concentrates at full

strength. Some methyl alcohol based

washer fluid concentrates may permanently

stain the grille if spilled while filling the win-

dow washer reservoir tank.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with wa-

ter to the manufacturer’s recommended lev-

els before pouring the fluid into the window

washer reservoir tank. Do not use the win-

dow washer reservoir tank to mix the washer

fluid concentrate and water.

●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

●Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative (2) battery

terminal cable to prevent discharging it.

COUPE

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from the

battery terminal, do not close either of front

doors. The automatic window adjusting func-

tion will not work, and the side roof panel may

be damaged.

To disconnect the negative (2) battery terminal,

perform the procedure in the following order.

Otherwise, the window and the side roof panel

may contact and be damaged.

1. Close the windows.

2. Open the hood.

3. Close and lock all the doors.

4. Disconnect the negative (2) battery termi-

nal.

5. Securely close the hood.

To connect the negative (2) battery terminal,

perform the procedure in the following order.

Otherwise, the window and the side roof panel

may contact and be damaged.

1. Unlock and open the driver side door. Do

not close the door.

2. Open the hood.

3. Connect the negative (2) battery terminal.

Then close the hood.

4. Fully open the driver side door window.

5. Close the driver side door and the win-

dow.

SEDAN AND COUPE

WARNING

●Do not expose the battery to flames or elec-

trical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by

the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery

fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or

painted surfaces. After touching a battery or

battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes.

Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid con-

tacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immedi-

ately flush with water for at least 15 minutes

and seek medical attention.

BATTERY

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the

battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a

higher load on the battery which can gener-

ate heat, reduce battery life, and in some

cases lead to an explosion.

●When working on or near a battery, always

wear suitable eye protection and remove all

jewelry.

●Battery posts, terminals and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds.

Wash hands after handling.

●Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove the

battery cover if it is necessary). It should be

between the UPPER LEVEL s

1and LOWER LEVEL

2lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level to the indicator in each

filler opening. Do not overfill.

1. Remove the cell plugs

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL

line.

If the side of the battery is not clear, check

the distilled water level by looking directly

above the cell; the condition s

1indicates

OK and the conditions s

2needs more to be

added.

3. Tighten cell plugs

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or un-

der severe conditions require frequent checks

of the battery fluid level.

DI0137MA SDI1480C

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “JUMP START-

ING” in the “6. In case of emergency” section. If

the engine does not start by jump starting, the

battery may have to be replaced. Contact an

INFINITI dealer.

CAUTION

●Do not ground accessories directly to the

battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the

variable voltage control system and the ve-

hicle battery may not charge completely.

●Use electrical accessories with the engine

running to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

The variable voltage control system measures

the amount of electrical discharge from the

battery and controls voltage generated by the

generator.

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Alternator

3. Crankshaft pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor

5. Drive belt auto-tensioner

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK

position before servicing drive belts. The en-

gine could rotate unexpectedly.

VQ35HR engine

SDI2152

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVE BELTS

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of

unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness.

If the belt is in poor condition or loose,

have it replaced or adjusted by an INFINITI

dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for con-

dition and tension in accordance with the

maintenance schedule in your “INFINITI

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and the ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the

spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage

the spark plugs.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see an INFINITI

dealer for servicing.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped

spark plugs as frequently as the conventional

type spark plugs since they will last much

longer. Follow the maintenance schedule in

“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”, but

do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with recommended

or equivalent ones.

VQ37VHR engine

SDI2119 SDI2020

SPARK PLUGS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Remove the retainers s

1as illustrated and pull

out the filter element s

The filter element should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the mainte-

nance intervals. See “INFINITI Service and Main-

tenance Guide” for maintenance intervals.

When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the

air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp

cloth.

WARNING

●Operating the engine with the air cleaner

removed can cause you or others to be

burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the

air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it

isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you

could be burned. Do not drive with the air

cleaner removed, and be careful when work-

ing on the engine with the air cleaner

removed.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or at-

tempt to start the engine with the air cleaner

removed. Doing so could result in serious

injury.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your wind-

shield is clean if beads do not form when

rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild deter-

gent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If

your windshield is still not clear after cleaning

the blades and using the wiper, replace the

blades.

Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the

windshield and impair driver vision.

SDI2033

AIR CLEANER WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push the release tab

, and then move

the wiper blade down the wiper arm

while pushing the release tab to remove.

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until a click sounds.

4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in

the groove.

CAUTION

●After wiper blade replacement, return the

wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the hood

is opened.

●Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arm may be damaged

from wind pressure. If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful

not to let wax get into the washer nozzle s

This may cause clogging or improper wind-

shield washer operation. If wax gets into the

nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin s

SDI2048

SDI1832

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked by an INFINITI dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the

brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See an INFINITI dealer for a brake system check

if the brake pedal height does not return to

normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have

audible wear indicators. When a brake pad

requires replacement, it will make a high

pitched scraping or screeching sound when the

vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is

heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect

the function or performance of the brake sys-

tem.

Proper brake inspection intervals should be fol-

lowed. For additional information, see the main-

tenance log section of your “INFINITI Service

and Maintenance Guide” for maintenance inter-

vals.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage

rating than that specified on the fuse box cover.

This could damage the electrical system or

cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to

the OFF or LOCK position and the head-

light switch is turned to OFF.

SDI1479A

BRAKES FUSES

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

2. Open the engine hood and remove the

cover on the battery and the fuse/fusible

link holder.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder

cover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. If the fuse is open

, replace it with a

new fuse

. Spare fuses are stored in the

passenger compartment fuse box.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-

trical system checked and repaired by an

INFINITI dealer.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate

and fuses are in good condition, check the

fusible links. If any of these fusible links are

melted, replace only with genuine INFINITI

parts.

SDI1754

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage

rating than that specified on the fuse box cover.

This could damage the electrical system or

cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to

the OFF or LOCK position and the head-

light switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the fuse box lid.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new

fuse.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electri-

cal system checked and repaired by an

INFINITI dealer.

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Release the lock knob at the back of the

Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical

key.

2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver

wrapped with a cloth into the slit

the corner and twist it to separate the

upper part from the lower part.

SDI2034 SDI1834

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-

lent.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as it could cause a

malfunction.

●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

●Make sure that the + side faces the

bottom of the case.

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower

parts, and then push them together until

it is securely closed.

5. Push the buttons two or three times to

check its operation.

See an INFINITI dealer if you need any assis-

tance for replacement.

FCC Notice:

This equipment has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class B digital device

pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits

are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference in a residential in-

stallation. This equipment generates, uses and

can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the in-

structions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation. If this equipment does

cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning

the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged

to try to correct the interference by one or more

of the following measures:

–Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

–Increase the separation between the equip-

ment and the receiver

–Connect the equipment into an outlet on a

circuit different from that to which the re-

ceiver is connected.

–Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV

technician for help.

SDI2042

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

SEDAN

1. Front turn signal light

2. Headlight (high- and low-beam)

3. Clearance light and front side marker light

4. Map light

5. Rear personal light

6. Fog light

8. Step light

9. High-mounted stop light (on the rear par-

cel shelf or in the rear spoiler)*

10. Trunk light

11. License plate light

12. Back-up light

13. Rear combination light (rear turn

signal/tail/stop/side marker light)

*: Note that the high-mounted stop light is

attached on the rear spoiler, not on the

rear parcel shelf, if the vehicle is

equipped with the rear spoiler.

SDI2035

LIGHTS

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

COUPE

1. Fog light

2. Headlight (high- and low-beam)

3. Front turn signal light

4. Map light

5. Clearance light

6. Front side marker light

7. Step light

8. High-mounted stop light (on the rear par-

cel shelf or in the rear spoiler)*

9. Trunk light

10. License plate light

11. Back-up light

12. Rear combination light (rear turn

signal/tail/stop/side marker light)

*: Note that the high-mounted stop light is

attached on the rear spoiler, not on the

rear parcel shelf, if the vehicle is

equipped with the rear spoiler.

SDI2126

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing

Xenon headlight bulb

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they produce a

high voltage. To prevent an electric shock,

never attempt to modify or disassemble. Al-

ways have your xenon headlights replaced at

an INFINITI dealer. For additional information,

see “HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH” in

the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

CAUTION

Use the same number and wattage as originally

installed:

High/Low beams (Xenon)

Wattage: 35

Bulb no.: D2S

If replacement is required, see an INFINITI

dealer.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is

not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, contact an INFINITI dealer.

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Sedan

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Front turn signal light* 21 WY21W

Front fog light* 51 HB4

Clearance light and front side marker light* 5 WY5W

Rear combination light*

back-up 16 W16W

turn signal 21 W21W

stop/tail/side marker LED —

License plate light* 5 W5W

Map light 8 —

Rear personal light 8 —

Vanity mirror light 2 —

Step light* 8 —

Trunk light* 3.4 —

High-mounted stop light* LED —

*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Coupe

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Front turn signal light* 21 WY21W

Front fog light* 55 H1

Clearance light* 5 W5W

Front side marker light* 5 W5W

Rear combination light*

back-up 16 W16W

turn signal 21 W21W

stop/tail/side marker LED —

License plate light* 5 W5W

Map light 8 —

Vanity mirror light 2 —

Step light* 8 —

Trunk light* 3.4 —

High-mounted stop light* LED —

*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens

and/or cover.

SDI1679

Map light

SDI2030

Rear personal light (Sedan only)

SDI2031

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

If you have a flat tire, see “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In

case of emergency” section.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire

pressure of all tires except the spare. When the

low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also,

this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

For more details, see “Low tire pressure warn-

ing light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section, “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section

and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emergency” sec-

tion.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure of the tires (includ-

ing the spare) often and always prior to

long distance trips. The recommended

tire pressure specifications are shown

on the Tire and Loading Information

label under the “Cold Tire Pressure”

heading. The Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label is affixed to the driver side

center pillar. Tire pressures should be

checked regularly because:

●Most tires naturally lose air over time.

●Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or

driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at mod-

erate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including under

inflation, may adversely affect tire life

and vehicle handling.

Vanity mirror light (Type A)

SDI2032

Vanity mirror light (Type B)

SDI1839

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

WARNING

●Improperly inflated tires can fail sud-

denly and cause an accident.

●The Gross Vehicle Weight rating

(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./

C.M.V.S.S. label. The vehicle weight

capacity is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not

load your vehicle beyond this capac-

ity. Overloading your vehiclemay re-

sult in reduced tire life, unsafe operat-

ing conditions due to premature tire

failure, or unfavorable handling char-

acteristics and could also lead to a

serious accident. Loading beyond the

specified capacity may also result in

failure of other vehicle components.

●Before taking a long trip, or whenever

you heavily load your vehicle, use a

tire pressure gauge to ensure that the

tire pressures are at the specified

level.

●Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH

(137 km/h) unless it is equipped with

high speed rated tires. Driving faster

than 85 MPH (137 km/h) may result in

tire failure, loss of control and pos-

sible injury.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

Tire and Loading Information label

1Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can be

seated in the vehicle.

2Vehicle load limit: See “VEHICLE

LOADING INFORMATION” in the “9.

Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section.

3Original size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle

at the factory.

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires

to this pressure when the tires are

cold. Tires are considered COLD

after the vehicle has been parked

for 3 or more hours, or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds. The recommended cold

tire inflation is set by the manufac-

turer to provide the best balance of

tire wear, vehicle handling, drive-

ability, tire noise, etc., up to the

vehicle’s GVWR.

5Tire size — see “TIRE LABELING”

later in this section.

6Spare tire size or compact spare

tire size (if so equipped)

SDI2153

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Checking the tire pressure

Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem side-

ways, or air will escape. If the hissing

sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure,

reposition the gauge to eliminate this

leakage.

Remove the gauge.

Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare it to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of

the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or re-

lease air as needed.

Install the valve stem cap.

Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Sedan

SIZE COLD TIRE

INFLATION

PRESSURE

FRONT

ORIGINAL

TIRE

P225/

55R17 95V

230 kPa,

33 PSI

P225/

50R18

94V

230 kPa,

33 PSI

225/50R18

95W

230 kPa,

33 PSI

REAR

ORIGINAL

TIRE

P225/

55R17 95V

230 kPa,

33 PSI

P225/

50R18

94V

230 kPa,

33 PSI

245/45R18

96W

230 kPa,

33 PSI

SPARE

TIRE

T145/

80D17

420 kPa,

60 PSI

SDI1949

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Coupe

SIZE COLD TIRE

INFLATION

PRESSURE

FRONT

ORIGINAL

TIRE

P225/

50R18 94V

230 kPa,

33 PSI

225/45R19

92W

240 kPa,

35 PSI

REAR

ORIGINAL

TIRE

P225/

50R18 94V

230 kPa,

33 PSI

245/40R19

94W

240 kPa,

35 PSI

SPARE

TIRE

T145/

80D17

420 kPa,

60 PSI

T145/

70R18

420 kPa,

60 PSI

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental char-

acteristics of the tire and also provides the

tire identification number (TIN) for safety

standard certification. The TIN can be used

to identify the tire in case of a recall.

Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H)

P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed

for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires

have this information.)

Three-digit number (215): This number

gives the width in millimeters of the tire

from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

Example

SDI1575

Example

SDI1606

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Two-digit number (60): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

R: The “R” stands for radial.

Two-digit number (16): This number is

the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

Two- or three-digit number (94): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment of Transportation”. The symbol

can be placed above, below or to the

left or right of the Tire Identification

Number.

Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s iden-

tification mark

Two-digit code: Tire size

Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-

tional)

Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

Four numbers represent the week and

year the tire was built. For example,

the numbers 3103 means the 31st

week of 2003. If these numbers are

missing, then look on the other side-

wall of the tire.

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire.

Tire manufacturers also must indi-

cate the materials in the tire, which

include steel, nylon, polyester, and

others.

4Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

Example

SDI1607

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,

always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires

an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown, if the tire

has radial structure.

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, In-

tended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the side-

wall that contains a whitewall, bears

white lettering or bears manufacturer,

brand and/or model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the same mold-

ing on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(2) the outward facing sidewall of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particular

side that must always face outward

when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

●When changing or replacing tires, be sure all

four tires are of the same type (Example:

Summer, All Season or Snow) and construc-

tion. An INFINITI dealer may be able to help

you with information about tire type, size,

speed rating and availability.

●Replacement tires may have a lower speed

rating than the factory equipped tires, and

may not match the potential maximum ve-

hicle speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper

operation of the TPMS.

●For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires

INFINITI specifies all season tires on some

models to provide good performance all year,

including snowy and icy road conditions. All

Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON

and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side-

wall. Snow tires have better snow traction than

All Season tires and may be more appropriate in

some areas.

Summer tires

INFINITI specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not

have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire

sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or

icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load rating to

the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speed

ratings than factory equipped tires and may not

match the potential maximum vehicle speed.

Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the

tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on

all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S. states

and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws before

installing studded tires. Skid and traction capa-

bilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry

surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-

studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according

to location. Check the local laws before install-

ing tire chains. When installing tire chains,

make sure they are the proper size for the tires

on your vehicle and are installed according to

the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only

SAE Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used

on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-

ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are

designed to meet the SAE standard minimum

clearances between the tire and the closest

vehicle suspension or body component re-

quired to accommodate the use of a winter

traction device (tire chains or cables). The mini-

mum clearances are determined using the fac-

tory equipped tire size. Other types may dam-

age your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when

recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to

ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire

chain must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage to

the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid

fully loading your vehicle when using tire

chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.

Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged

and/or vehicle handling and performance may

be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the rear

wheels and not on the front wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

tire chains in such conditions can cause dam-

age to the various mechanisms of the vehicle

due to some overstress.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation (Models equipped with

same size tires on all wheels)

INFINITI recommends rotating the tires

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). (See

“FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emer-

gency” section for tire replacing proce-

dures.)

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

the specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

the specification at each tire rotation in-

terval.

WARNING

●After rotating the tires, check and ad-

just the tire pressure.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

●Do not include the T-type spare tire or

any other small size spare tire in the

tire rotation.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Tire rotation (Models equipped with

different size tires on front and rear)

Tires cannot be rotated on this vehicle,

as front tires are a different size from

rear tires and the direction of the wheel

rotation is fixed for each tire.

A pin is on the front brake rotor to

prevent the rear wheels from being in-

stalled in place of the front wheels. The

spare tire can be installed in place of the

front and rear wheels. When installing

the spare tire in the front wheel, the hole

in the spare tire wheel must be aligned

with the pin on the brake rotor.

WARNING

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

SDI1662

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

●Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulging or

objects caught in the tread. If exces-

sive wear, cracks, bulging or deep

cuts are found, the tire(s) should be

replaced.

●The original tires have built-in tread

wear indicators. When wear indica-

tors are visible, the tire(s) should be

replaced.

●Tires degrade with age and use. Have

tires, including the spare, over 6

years old checked by a qualified tech-

nician, because some tire damage

may not be obvious. Replace the tires

as necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

●Improper service of the spare tire may

result in serious personal injury. If it

is necessary to repair the spare tire,

contact an INFINITI dealer.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

SDI1663

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

w—

—

07/17/07—tbrooks X

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. (See “SPECIFICATIONS”

in the “9. Technical and consumer information”

section for recommended types and sizes of

tires and wheels.)

WARNING

●The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of different

brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or ra-

dial), or tread patterns can adversely affect

the ride, braking, handling, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain

clearance, speedometer calibration, head-

light aim and bumper height. Some of these

effects may lead to accidents and could re-

sult in serious personal injury.

●If the wheels are changed for any reason,

always replace with wheels which have the

same off-set dimension. Wheels of a differ-

ent off-set could cause premature tire wear,

degrade vehicle handling characteristics

and/or interference with the brake

discs/drums. Such interference can lead to

decreased braking efficiency and/or early

brake pad/shoe wear. See “WHEELS AND

TIRES” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual for

wheel off-set dimensions.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function and the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI

dealer as soon as possible for tire replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper

operation of the TPMS.

●Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if

it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires

could have structural damage and could fail

without warning.

●The use of retread tire is not recommended.

●For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or ra-

dial), and tread pattern on all four wheels.

Failure to do so may result in a circumference

difference between tires on the front and

rear axles which will cause excessive tire

wear and may damage the transmission,

transfer case and differential gears.

●ONLY use spare tires specified for the AWD

model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with tires

of the same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment

should also be checked and corrected as nec-

essary. Contact an INFINITI dealer.

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can

get out of balance. Therefore, they should be

balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performed with

the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the

wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical

damage.

For additional information regarding tires, refer

to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the

INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

●INFINITI recommends that the road wheels

be waxed to protect against road salt in

areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

(T-type) spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the T-type

spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle

could be damaged or involved in an accident.

WARNING

●The T-type spare tire should be used for

emergency use. It should be replaced with

the standard tire at the first opportunity to

avoid possible tire or differential damage.

●Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp

turns and abrupt braking while driving.

●Periodically check spare tire inflation pres-

sure. Always keep the pressure of the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420

kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure of

the full size spare tire (if so equipped) at the

recommended pressure for standard tires,

as indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label. For Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label location, see “Tire and Loading

Information label” in the index of this

manual.

●With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

installed do not drive your vehicle at speeds

faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

●When driving on roads covered with snow or

ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

should be used on the front wheels and origi-

nal tire used on the rear wheels (drive

wheels). Use tire chains only on the two rear

original tires.

●Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the

standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon

as the tread wear indicators appear.

●Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.

●Do not use more than one spare tire at the

same time.

●Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

●Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit prop-

erly and may cause damage to the vehicle.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire is smaller than the original tire, ground

clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the

vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also do

not drive the vehicle through an automatic

car wash since it may get caught.

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ........ 9-2

Fuel recommendation...........................9-4

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation .........9-6

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations ..................... 9-7

Specifications.....................................9-8

Engine ........................................9-8

Wheels and tires ...............................9-9

Dimensions ....................................9-11

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country ...................................9-11

Vehicle identification ............................. 9-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ........ 9-12

Vehicle identification number (Chassis

number) ...................................... 9-12

Engine serial number .......................... 9-12

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ......... 9-13

Emission control information label .............. 9-13

Tire and loading information label .............. 9-14

Air conditioner specification label............... 9-14

Installing front license plate........................9-15

Sedan.........................................9-15

Coupe........................................ 9-17

Vehicle loading information ....................... 9-17

Terms ........................................ 9-17

Vehicle load capacity .......................... 9-19

Loading tips ..................................9-20

Measurement of weights.......................9-20

Towing a trailer .................................. 9-21

Flat towing ................................... 9-21

Uniform tire quality grading ....................... 9-21

Treadwear .................................... 9-21

Traction AA, A, B and C ........................ 9-21

Temperature A, B and C .......................9-22

Emission control system warranty .................9-22

Reporting safety defects (US only) .................9-23

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test

(US only) ........................................9-23

Event data recorders .............................9-24

Owner’s manual/service manual order information . . 9-25

In the event of a collision ...................... 9-25

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended specifications

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 76 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1

Engine oil*5

Drain and refill

With oil filter change 5-1/8 qt 4-3/8 qt 4.9 •Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2

•Viscosity SAE 5W-30

Without oil filter change 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6

Cooling system

Automatic transmission model With reservoir 9-1/2 qt 7-7/8 qt 9.0 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8

Manual transmission model With reservoir 9-5/8 qt 8 qt 9.1

Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8

Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*3

Manual transmission gear oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)

HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90

Differential gear oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 Vis-

cosity SAE 80W-90*6

Transfer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN

Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent (if available)

Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper oil level according to the in-

structions in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*8

Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*4 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease

Without limited slip differential NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

With limited slip differential

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*7

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil

Type S or exact equivalent

Window washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or

equivalent

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

*1: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation.

*2: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.

*3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission

durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

*4: Available in mainland US through an INFINITI dealer.

*5: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.

*6: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 32°C (0°F).

*7: For additional information, see “VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.

*8: Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid or DEXRON

VI type ATF may also be used.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

VQ35HR engine

INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded pre-

mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least

91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research

octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Re-

search octane number 91), but you may notice a

decrease in performance.

VQ37VHR engine

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

number (Research octane number 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded

regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI

number (Research octane number 91) may be

temporarily used, but only under the following

precautions:

●Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as pos-

sible.

●Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-

eration.

However, for maximum vehicle performance, the

use of unleaded premium gasoline is recom-

mended.

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified could

adversely affect the emission control sys-

tem, and may also affect warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a leaded

gasoline be used, because this will damage

the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel.

Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system

components and is not covered by the

INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

INFINITI recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifica-

tions where it is available. Many of the automo-

bile manufacturers developed this specification

to improve emission system and vehicle perfor-

mance. Ask your service station manager if the

gasoline meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter

(WWFC) specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-

mulated gasolines. These gasolines are spe-

cially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.

INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner air

and suggests that you use reformulated gaso-

line when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-

nol with or without advertising their presence.

INFINITI does not recommend the use of fuels of

which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your INFINITI cannot be readily

determined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please

take the following precautions as the usage of

such fuels may cause vehicle performance prob-

lems and/or fuel system damage.

●The fuel should be unleaded and have an oc-

tane rating no lower than that recommended

for unleaded gasoline.

●If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol

blend, is used, it should contain no more than

10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be

added up to 15%.)

9-4 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●If a methanol blend is used, it should contain

no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol,

wood alcohol). It should also contain a suit-

able amount of appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors, such methanol blends may

cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle

performance problems. At this time, suffi-

cient data is not available to ensure that all

methanol blends are suitable for use in

INFINITI vehicles.

If any undesirable driveability problems such as

engine stalling or hard hot starting are experi-

enced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, imme-

diately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel

with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling.

Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint

damage.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern-

ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens-

ing pumps to be identified by a small, square,

orange and black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage for that

region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (Example: fuel injec-

tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve de-

posit removers, etc.) which are sold commer-

cially. Many of these additives intended for

gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain

active solvent or similar ingredients that can be

harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating

lower than recommended above can cause per-

sistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a

metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead

to engine damage. If you detect a persistent

heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of

the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady

spark knock while holding a steady speed on

level roads, have an INFINITI dealer correct the

condition. Failure to correct the condition is mis-

use of the vehicle, for which INFINITI is not re-

sponsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking,

after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause

excessive fuel consumption or damage to the

engine. If any of the above symptoms are

encountered, have your vehicle checked at an

INFINITI dealer or other competent service facil-

ity.

However, now and then you may notice light

spark knock for a short time while accelerating

or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern,

because you get the greatest fuel benefit when

there is light spark knock for a short time under

heavy engine load.

Technical and consumer information 9-5

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

1. API certification mark

2. API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure sat-

isfactory engine life and performance, see “CA-

PACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” earlier in this section.

INFINITI recommends the use of an energy

conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscos-

ity standard. These oils have the API certifica-

tion mark on the front of the container. Oils

which do not have the specified quality label

should not be used as they could cause engine

damage.

Oil additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used and

maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has

been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is impor-

tant that the engine oil viscosity be selected

based on the temperatures at which the vehicle

will be operated before the next oil change.

Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recom-

mended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-

quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replac-

ing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent

for the reason described in change intervals.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than

the specified quality, or oil and filter change

intervals longer than recommended could re-

duce engine life. Damage to engines caused by

improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil

and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered

by the new INFINITI vehicle limited warranties.

Your engine was filled with a high quality

engine oil when it was built. You do not have to

STI0505

9-6 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

change the oil before the first recommended

change interval. Oil and filter change intervals

depend upon how you use your vehicle. Opera-

tion under the following conditions may require

more frequent oil and filter changes.

●repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures,

●driving in dusty conditions,

●extensive idling,

●stop and go “rush hour” traffic,

●aggressive driving.

Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Maintenance

Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in your INFINITI ve-

hicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-

134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, NISSAN A/C sys-

tem oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will

cause severe damage to the air conditioning

system and will require the replacement of all

air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect

the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental

regulations require the recovery and recycling

of any refrigerant during automotive air condi-

tioning system service. Your INFINITI dealer has

the trained technicians and equipment needed

to recover and recycle your air conditioning

system refrigerant.

Contact an INFINITI dealer when servicing your

air conditioning system.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

ENGINE

Model VQ35HR VQ37VHR

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60° 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

Bore × Stroke in

(mm) 3.760 × 3.205 (95.5 × 81.4) 3.760 × 3.385 (95.5 × 86.0)

Displacement cu in

(cm

)213.45 (3,498) 225.54 (3,696)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-2-3-4-5-6

Idle speed rpm See the emission control infor-

mation label on the underside

of the hood.

See the emission control infor-

mation label on the underside

of the hood.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

Spark plug Stan-

dard FXE22HR-11 FXE24HR-11

Spark plug gap (Normal) in

(mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

VQ35HR/VQ37VHR engine

STI0425

SPECIFICATIONS

9-8 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Sedan

Type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum 17 × 7-1/2J 1.77 (45)

18 × 7-1/2J 1.77 (45)

Front: 18 × 7-1/2J 1.77 (45)

Rear: 18 × 8-1/2J 1.97 (50)

Spare 17 × 4T 1.18 (30)

Coupe

Type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum 18 × 8J 1.69 (43)

Front: 19 × 8-1/2J 1.69 (43)

Rear: 19 × 9J 1.77 (45)

Spare 17 × 4T 1.18 (30)

18 × 4T 0 (0)

Technical and consumer information 9-9

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Tire

Sedan

Type Size Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]

Conventional P225/55R17 33 (230)

P225/50R18

Front: 225/50R18

Rear: 245/45R18

Spare (T-type) T145/80D17 60 (420)

Coupe

Type Size Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]

Conventional P225/50R18 33 (230)

Front: 225/45R19 35 (240)

Rear: 245/40R19

Spare (T-type) T145/80D17 60 (420)

T145/70R18

9-10 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

DIMENSIONS

Sedan

Overall length (With front license plate) in (mm) 187.2 (4,755)

Overall width in (mm) 69.8 (1,773)

Overall height in (mm) 57.2 (1,452)*1*3

57.7 (1,465)*2

57.8 (1,469)*4

Front tread in (mm) 59.8 (1,520)

Rear tread in (mm) 59.8 (1,520)*1

60.0 (1,525)*2

60.2 (1,530)*3

Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2 (2,850)

Coupe

Overall length (With front license plate) in (mm) 183.1 (4,650)

Overall width in (mm) 71.8 (1,823)

Overall height in (mm) 54.8 (1,393)*5

54.9 (1,395)*6

Front tread in (mm) 60.8 (1,545)

Rear tread in (mm) 61.4 (1,560)

Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2 (2,850)

*1: Sedan/Two-wheel drive (2WD)/18-in tire models

*2: Sedan/All-wheel drive (AWD)/17-in tire models

*3: Sedan/Two-wheel drive (2WD)/17-in tire models

*4: Sedan/All-wheel drive (AWD)/18-in tire models

*5: Coupe/18-in tire models

*6: Coupe/19-in tire models

If you plan to travel in another country, you

should first find out if the fuel available is

suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane rating may

cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline.

Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas

where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your ve-

hicle to another country, state, province or dis-

trict, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle

to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards vary

according to the country, state, province or

district; therefore, vehicle specifications may

differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into another

country, state, province or district and regis-

tered, its modifications, transportation, and reg-

istration are the responsibility of the user.

INFINITI is not responsible for any inconvenience

that may result.

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR

VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

Technical and consumer information 9-11

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is at-

tached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown in the engine

compartment.

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

STI0431 STI0492 STI0509

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

9-12 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification

label is affixed as shown. This label contains

valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross

Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of

manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached as shown.

Sedan

STI0493

Coupe

STI0550

STI0422

Technical and consumer information 9-13

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as

illustrated.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is at-

tached as shown.

STI0494 STI0495

9-14 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

Use the following steps to mount the license

plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that

the following parts are enclosed in the plastic

bag.

Only use the recommended mounting position

or Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sensor ob-

struction (if so equipped) may result.

●License plate bracket

●J-nut × 2

●Screw × 2

●Screw grommet × 2

SEDAN

1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.

2. Locate the center position indicator

the lower part of the grille. Line up the

marks under the top of the front bumper

with the tabs

on the license plate

bracket. Hold the license plate bracket in

place.

3. Mark the center of the hole

with a

felt-tip pen.

4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0.39

in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked loca-

tions. (Be sure that the drill only goes

through the bumper fascia.)

Sedan

STI0496

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Technical and consumer information 9-15

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

5. Insert grommets into the hole on the

fascia.

6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the

grommet hole to add 90° turn onto the

part

7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

before placing the license plate bracket

on the fascia.

8. Install the license plate bracket with

screws.

9. Install the license plate with bolts that are

no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

Coupe

STI0551

9-16 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/05/07—pattie X

COUPE

1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.

2. Locate the center position indicator

the lower part of the grille. Measure

straight down from the edge where the

bumper and grille meet to the aligning

holes

, keeping the tape measure lined

up with the center position indicator.

3. Mark the holes

with a felt-tip pen.

4. Carefully drill the two aligning holes

using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the

marked locations. (Be sure that the drill

only goes through the bumper fascia.)

5. Line up the bosses

or license plate

bracket with the holes and hold the li-

cense plate bracket in place.

6. Mark the center of the holes

with a

felt-tip pen.

7. Carefully drill the two pilot holes using a

0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked

locations. (Be sure that the drill only goes

through the bumper fascia.)

8. Insert grommets into the hole on the

fascia.

9. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the

grommet hole to add 90° turn onto the

part

10. Insert a J-nut into the license plate

bracket before placing the license plate

bracket on the fascia.

11. Install the license plate bracket with

screws.

12. Install the license plate with bolts that

are no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING

●It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area inside the vehicle. In a col-

lision, people riding in these areas

are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in

a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself

with the following terms before loading

your vehicle:

●Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment, flu-

ids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-17

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -

maximum total combined weight of

the unloaded vehicle, passengers,

luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load

and any other optional equipment.

This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This infor-

mation is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rat-

ing) - The maximum total weight rat-

ing of the vehicle, passengers, cargo,

and trailer.

●Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that

can be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load. This

information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

●Cargo capacity - permissible weight of

cargo, the weight of total occupants

weight subtracted from the load limit.

9-18 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not ex-

ceed the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-

ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the illus-

tration.

Steps for determining correct load

limit

Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on

your vehicle’s placard.

Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the XXX

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there

will be five 150 lb. passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs. (1400 2750 (5 x 150) = 650

lbs) or 640 2340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)

Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this re-

duces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

STI0365

Technical and consumer information 9-19

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

(See “MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS” later

in this section.)

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label.

LOADING TIPS

●The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel.

●Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of

your vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the way

your vehicle handles. This could re-

sult in loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury.

●Overloading could not only shorten

the life of your vehicle and the tires,

but also could lead to hazardous ve-

hicle handling and long braking dis-

tance. This may cause a premature

tire malfunction, which could result in

a serious accident and personal in-

jury. Failures caused by overloading

are not covered by the vehicle’s

warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of

your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded,

drive to a scale and weigh the front and

the rear wheels separately to determine

axle loads. Individual axle loads should

not exceed either of the gross axle

weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the

axle loads should not exceed the gross

vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These rat-

ings are given on the vehicle certifica-

tion label. If weight ratings are ex-

ceeded, move or remove items to bring

all weights below the ratings.

9-20 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

Your vehicle was designed to be used to carry

passengers and cargo. INFINITI does not recom-

mend trailer towing, because it places addi-

tional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

steering, braking, and other systems.

An INFINITI Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available

on the website at www.infiniti.com. This guide

includes information on trailer towing capability

and the special equipment required for proper

towing.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from towing a trailer

is not covered by INFINITI warranties.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a

vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a

motor home.

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can result

in severe transmission damage.

●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always

tow forward, never backward.

●DO NOT tow any automatic transmission ve-

hicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat

towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal

transmission parts due to lack of transmis-

sion lubrication.

●For emergency towing procedures refer to

“TOWING RECOMMENDED BY INFINITI” in the

“6. In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

Automatic transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic

transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly

MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive

wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s

recommendations when using their product.

Manual transmission

●Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

●Your vehicle speed should never exceed 70

MPH (112 km/h) when flat towing your ve-

hicle.

●After towing 500 miles, start and idle the

engine with the transmission in Neutral for

two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after

every 500 miles of towing may cause dam-

age to the transmission’s internal parts.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance of tires

depends upon actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving habits, service

practices and differences in road characteristics

and climate.

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 9-21

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based

on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and

does not include acceleration, cornering, hy-

droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C

The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and

C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the ma-

terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire

life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to

a level of performance which all passenger car

tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A rep-

resent higher levels of performance on the

laboratory test wheel than the minimum re-

quired by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-

lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation,

or excessive loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat build-up and pos-

sible tire failure.

Your INFINITI is covered by the following emis-

sion warranties.

For US:

●Emission Defects Warranty

●Emissions Performance Warranty (See War-

ranty Information Booklet for details.)

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assis-

tance Information (Canada only)) that comes

with your INFINITI. If you did not receive a

Warranty Information Booklet (Warranty and

Roadside Assistance Information (Canada

only)), or it has become lost, you may obtain a

replacement by writing to:

●INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

●Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario,

L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

9-22 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National High-

way Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying INFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and rem-

edy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot

become involved in individual problems

between you, your dealer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Ad-

ministrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,

SW., Washington DC 20590. You can

also obtain other information about mo-

tor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify INFINITI by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free,

at 1-800-662-6200.

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

should never be tested using a two wheel

dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used

by some states for emissions testing), or similar

equipment. Make sure you inform test facility

personnel that your vehicle is equipped with

AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may result in

transmission damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in serious vehicle

damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states/

areas, your vehicle may be required to be in

what is called the “ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-

sion control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when

it is driven through certain driving patterns.

Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained

by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking

the I/M test, check the vehicle’s

inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-

tion. Push the ignition switch to the ON position

without starting the engine. If the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20

seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only) READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)

Technical and consumer information 9-23

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”.

If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not

ready” condition, drive the vehicle through the

following pattern to set the vehicle to the

“ready condition”. If you cannot or do not want

to perform the driving pattern, an INFINITI

dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent

manner according to traffic conditions and

obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle

until the engine coolant temperature

gauge needle points between the C and H

(normal operating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88

km/h), then quickly release the accelera-

tor pedal completely and keep it released

for at least 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for

a moment, then drive the vehicle at a

speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for

at least 9 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine run-

ning.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55

km/h) and maintain the speed for 20

seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88

km/h) and maintain the speed for at least

3 minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatic

transmission selector lever in the P (Park)

or N (Neutral) position or the manual

transmission shift lever in the N (Neutral)

position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one

more time.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the

preceding step. Any safe driving mode is ac-

ceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine

until step 7 is completed.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-

corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in under-

standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.

The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such

data as:

●How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

●Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

●How fast the vehicle was traveling.

●Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which crashes

and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded

by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situa-

tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR

under normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR data

EVENT DATA RECORDERS

9-24 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

with the type of personally identifying data rou-

tinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-

ment is required and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-

facturer and INFINITI dealer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have ac-

cess to the vehicle or the EDR. The EDR data may

be retrieved during routine vehicle servicing or

for special research. It might also be accessed

with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee,

in response to a request by law enforcement, or

as otherwise required or permitted by law.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for your

vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustra-

tions and step-by-step diagnostic and adjust-

ment procedures, this manual is the same one

used by the factory trained technicians working

at an INFINITI dealer. Also available are genuine

INFINITI Owner’s Manuals, and genuine INFINITI

Service and Owner’s Manuals for older INFINITI

models.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability of genuine

INFINITI Service Manuals for the 2000 model

year and later, contact:

Tweddle Litho Company

1-800-450-9491

www.nissan-techinfo.com/infiniti

For current pricing and availability of genuine

INFINITI Service Manuals for the 1999 model

year and prior, see an INFINITI dealer, or con-

tact:

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Drive

Strongsville, OH 44149

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuine

INFINITI Owner’s Manuals for this model year

and prior, see an INFINITI dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Drive

Strongsville, OH 44149

1-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI Service

Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact an

INFINITI dealer. For the phone number and

location of an INFINITI dealer in your area call

the INFINITI Satisfaction Center at 1-800-361-

4792 and a bilingual INFINITI representative will

assist you.

Also available are genuine INFINITI Service and

Owner’s Manuals for older INFINITI models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this un-

likely event, there is some important informa-

tion you should know. Many insurance compa-

nies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine

collision parts in order to cut costs, among

other reasons.

Insist on the use of Genuine INFINITI

Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using

parts made to INFINITI’s original exacting speci-

fications — if you want to help it to last and hold

its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL

ORDER INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-25

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

insurance agent and your repair shop to only use

Genuine INFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITI does

not warrant non-INFINITI parts, nor does INFINI-

TI’s warranty apply to damage caused by a

non-genuine part.

Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help protect

your personal safety, preserve your warranty

protection and maintain the resale value of your

vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine INFINITI Parts may prevent or limit

unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at

the end of your lease.

INFINITI designs its hoods with crumple zones

to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate

the windshield of your vehicle in an accident.

Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide

such built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine

parts often show premature wear, rust and

corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be

advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair

your vehicle. And some states have enacted

laws that restrict insurance companies from

authorizing the use of non-genuine collision

parts during the new vehicle warranty. These

laws help protect you, so you can take action to

protect yourself.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visit us

at:

www.infiniti.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)

9-26 Technical and consumer information

w—

—

07/14/07—pattie X

10 Index

4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system .....5-50

4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) warning light .2-13

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .......5-48

AUX button ...................4-18

Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) .....2-34

Advanced air bag system ...........1-44

Aiming control, Adaptive front lighting

system (AFS) ..................2-34

Air bag system

Advanced air bag system .........1-44

Front passenger air bag and status

light .....................1-46

Air bag warning labels .............1-52

Air bag warning light ..........1-53 , 2-16

Air cleaner housing filter ...........8-18

Air conditioner

Air conditioner service ...........4-28

Air conditioner specification label ....9-14

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations .......4-28

Automatic climate control ........4-23

In-cabin microfilter ............4-28

Operation (See automatic climate

control) ...................4-23

Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle

security system) ................2-28

Alcohol, drugs and driving ...........5-5

All-wheel drive (AWD) .............5-41

All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light .....2-12

Antenna .....................4-55

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .......5-48

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning

light .......................2-12

Appearance care

Exterior appearance care ..........7-2

Interior appearance care ..........7-4

Armrest .....................1-10

Armrest, Rear armrest pocket .........2-46

Ashtrays (See cigarette lighter and

ashtrays) ....................2-41

Audible reminders ...............2-18

Audio operation precautions .........4-29

Audio system ..................4-29

Audio system, Steering wheel audio

controls .....................4-54

Autolight system ................2-32

Automatic

Automatic adjusting function (front

windows) ..................2-52

Automatic climate control ........4-24

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ....8-12

Climate control ..............4-23

Driving with automatic transmission . . . 5-10

Automatic drive positioner ..........3-29

Automatic seat positioner ...........3-29

Average fuel consumption and speed . . . .2-25

Avoiding collision and rollover .........5-5

Battery ......................8-14

Battery saver system ...........2-33

Intelligent Key ...............8-22

Variable voltage control system .....8-16

Before starting the engine ...........5-9

Belts (See drive belts) .............8-16

BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System . . . .4-57

Booster seats ..................1-34

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .....5-48

Brake and clutch fluid ...........8-12

Brake system ...............5-44

Parking brake operation .........5-16

Brake warning light ..............2-12

Break-in schedule ...............5-41

Brightness control and display ON/OFF

button .......................4-7

Brightness control, Instrument panel . . . .2-36

Bulb check/instrument panel .........2-11

Bulb replacement ...............8-24

CD/CF care and cleaning ...........4-53

Cabin air filter .................4-28

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ..................9-2

Car phone or CB radio .............4-56

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

Card holder ...................2-47

Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .2-49

Cargo net ....................2-49

Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst . . . .5-2

Center multi-function control panel ......4-2

Child restraints .................1-19

Child restraints

Booster seats ................1-34

Installation using LATCH .........1-24

Installation using the seat belts .....1-28

LATCH system ................1-21

Precautions on child restraints ......1-20

Top tether strap ..............1-23

Child safety ...................1-14

Child safety rear door lock ...........3-6

Chimes

Audible reminders .............2-18

Seat belt warning light and chime ....2-16

Cigarette lighter and ashtrays ........2-41

Circuit breaker, Fusible link ..........8-21

Cleaning exterior and interior ......7-2 , 7-4

Climate control, Automatic climate control .4-23

Clock ......................2-40

Clutch fluid ...................8-12

Coat hooks ...................2-48

Cockpit ......................2-2

Cold weather driving ..............5-51

Command (See BluetoothTHands-Free Phone

System) .....................4-69

Command (See INFINITI voice recognition

system) .....................4-78

Compact spare tire ...............8-41

CompactFlash (CF) player (See audio

system) .....................4-42

Compass .....................2-8

Console box ..................2-45

Controller, Center multi-function control

panel .......................4-4

Controls

Control panel button (display) .......4-2

Heater and air conditioner controls

(See automatic climate control) .....4-23

Coolant

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants ...................9-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-9

Checking engine coolant level ......8-8

Corrosion protection ..............7-6

Cruise control ..................5-17

Cruise control, Fixed speed cruise control

(on ICC system) .................5-37

Cruise control, Intelligent cruise control

(ICC) system ...................5-19

Cruise indicator ................2-22

Cup holders ...................2-42

Current fuel consumption ...........2-25

Daytime running light system .........2-34

Defroster switch, Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch .............2-31

Dimensions ...................9-11

Display cleaning .................4-5

Display controls (See center multi-function

control panel) ..................4-2

Distance to empty ...............2-25

Door/trunk open warning ...........2-22

Dot matrix liquid crystal display .......2-19

Drive belts ...................8-16

Drive positioner ................3-29

Driving

All-wheel drive (AWD) ...........5-41

All-wheel drive (AWD) safety

precautions .................5-6

Cold weather driving ............5-51

Driving with automatic transmission . . . 5-10

Driving with manual transmission ....5-14

Precautions when starting and driving . . 5-2

Economy, Fuel ..................5-41

Elapsed time ..................2-25

Elapsed time and trip odometer .......2-25

Emission control information label ......9-13

Emission control system warranty ......9-22

Engine

Before starting the engine .........5-9

Break-in schedule .............5-41

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants ..................9-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-9

Changing engine oil and filter .......8-9

Checking engine coolant level ......8-8

Checking engine oil level .........8-9

Engine block heater ............5-52

Engine compartment check locations . . . 8-7

Engine cooling system ...........8-8

Engine oil ..................8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . 9-6

Engine oil replacement indicator ....2-23

Engine oil viscosity .............9-6

Engine serial number ...........9-12

Engine specifications ............9-8

10-2

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

Engine start operation indicator (Automatic

Transmission models) ...........2-21

Engine start operation indicator (Manual

Transmission models) ...........2-22

If your vehicle overheats .........6-10

Starting the engine .............5-9

Engine coolant temperature gauge ......2-6

Entry/exit function ...............3-29

Event data recorders ..............9-24

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ........5-2

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . .9-13

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

changer .....................4-38

Filter

Air cleaner housing filter .........8-18

Changing engine oil and filter .......8-9

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher

switch) ......................2-37

Flat tire ......................6-2

Flat towing ...................9-21

Floor mat cleaning................7-5

Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-12

Brake and clutch fluid ...........8-12

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants ..................9-2

Engine coolant ...............8-8

Engine oil ..................8-9

Power steering fluid ............8-12

Window washer fluid ...........8-13

Fog light switch ................2-37

Front passenger air bag and status light . .1-46

Front power seat adjustment ..........1-2

Front seat adjustment ..............1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants ...................9-2

Fuel economy ................5-41

Fuel economy information (display) ....4-9

Fuel octane rating .............9-4

Fuel recommendation ...........9-4

Fuel-filler cap ................3-21

Fuel-filler door ...............3-21

Gauge ....................2-7

Fuses ......................8-20

Fusible links ..................8-21

Garage door opener, HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver ...................2-56

Gascap .....................3-21

Gauge .......................2-4

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-6

Fuel gauge ..................2-7

Odometer ..................2-5

Speedometer ................2-5

Tachometer .................2-6

Trip computer ...............2-24

General maintenance ..............8-2

Glove box ....................2-44

Golf bag stowing ................2-48

Hands-Free Phone System, BluetoothT. . .4-57

Hazard warning flasher switch ........2-37

Head restraints ..................1-9

Headlights

Aiming control (See adaptive front lighting

system (AFS)) ................2-34

Bulb replacement .............8-26

Headlight switch ..............2-32

Xenon headlights .............2-31

Heated seats ..................2-38

Heater

Automatic climate control .........4-23

Engine block heater ............5-52

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver .......2-56

Hood release ..................3-17

Hook, Coat hooks ...............2-48

Horn .......................2-38

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System .....2-28

INFINITI voice recognition system ......4-78

INFO button ...................4-8

ISOFIX child restraint ..............1-21

Ignition switch

Automatic transmission models ......5-10

Manual transmission models .......5-14

Ignition switch (Push-button) ..........5-6

Immobilizer system ..............2-28

In-cabin microfilter ...............4-28

Indicator lights .................2-16

Indicator, Dot matrix display .........2-19

10-3

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

Inside mirror ..................3-25

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ......9-23

Instrument brightness control ........2-36

Instrument panel ................2-3

Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator .2-22

Intelligent Key insertion indicator ......2-21

Intelligent Key removal indicator .......2-21

Intelligent Key system .............3-6

Intelligent Key system

Battery replacement ............8-22

Key operating range ............3-8

Key operation ................3-9

Warning light ................2-14

Warning signals ..............3-11

Intelligent Key warning light .........2-14

Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system . . . .5-19

Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system main

switch indicator ................2-22

Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system,

Preview function ................5-40

Interior light control switch ..........2-54

Interior light replacement ...........8-27

Interior lights ..................2-54

Interior trunk lid release ...........3-20

Jump starting ..................6-8

Keyless entry (See remote keyless entry

system) .....................3-14

Keys ........................3-2

Keys, For Intelligent Key system ........3-6

LATCH system ..................1-21

Labels

Air bag warning labels ...........1-52

Air conditioner specification label ....9-14

Emission control information label ....9-13

Engine serial number ...........9-12

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label .....................9-13

Tire and Loading Information label . . . 9-14

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . 9-12

License plate, Installing front license

plate .......................9-15

Light

Air bag warning light ............1-53

Bulb replacement .............8-24

Fog light switch ..............2-37

Headlight switch ..............2-32

Headlights bulb replacement ......8-26

Indicator lights ...............2-16

Interior light control switch .......2-54

Interior lights ...............2-54

Map lights .................2-54

Trunk light .................2-56

Vanity mirror lights ............2-55

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ..................2-12

Xenon headlights .............2-31

Light replacement ...............8-24

Lights, Exterior and interior light

replacement ..................8-27

Loading information (See vehicle loading

information) ...................9-17

Lock

Door locks ..................3-4

Glove box lock ...............2-44

Power door lock ...............3-4

Trunk lid ..................3-17

Low fuel warning ................2-22

Low outside temperature warning ......2-22

Low tire pressure warning light ........2-14

Low tire pressure warning system (See tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) .....5-3

Low washer fluid warning ...........2-22

Maintenance

Battery ....................8-14

General maintenance ............8-2

Indicators for maintenance (dot matrix) . 2-23

Inside the vehicle ..............8-3

Maintenance precautions .........8-5

Outside the vehicle .............8-2

Seat belt maintenance ...........1-19

Malfunction indicator light (MIL) .......2-17

Map lights ...................2-54

Master warning light ..............2-15

Memory storage, Automatic drive

positioner ....................3-31

Meter, Trip computer .............2-24

Meters and gauges ...............2-4

Meters and gauges, Instrument brightness

control ......................2-36

10-4

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

Mirror

Inside mirror ................3-25

Outside mirrors ..............3-27

Monitor, Rearview monitor ..........4-19

Moonroof ....................2-52

Net, Cargo net .................2-49

New vehicle break-in ..............5-41

No key warning .................2-21

Odometer .....................2-5

Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants ...................9-2

Changing engine oil and filter .......8-9

Checking engine oil level .........8-9

Engine oil ..................8-9

Engine oil viscosity .............9-6

Oil filter replacement indicator .....2-23

Operation, Indicators for operation (dot

matrix) ......................2-21

Outside mirrors .................3-27

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information ...................9-25

Panic alarm ...................3-15

Parking

Parking brake operation ..........5-16

Parking brake release warning ......2-22

Parking on hills ..............5-43

Parking brake break-in .............5-45

Personal lights .................2-54

Phone

BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System . .4-57

Car phone or CB radio ..........4-56

Power

Power door lock ...............3-4

Power outlet ................2-40

Power steering fluid ............8-12

Power steering system ..........5-44

Power window switch finisher .......7-4

Power windows ..............2-49

Power front seat adjustment ..........1-2

Pre-crash seat belts ...............1-15

Precautions

All-wheel drive (AWD) driving safety . . . .5-6

Audio operation ..............4-29

Braking precautions ............5-44

Child restraints ..............1-20

Cruise control ...............5-17

Maintenance .................8-5

Seat belt usage ...............1-11

Supplemental restraint system ......1-38

When starting and driving .........5-2

Preview function ................5-45

Preview function (for Intelligent cruise

control system) .................5-40

Push starting ..................6-10

Push-button ignition switch ..........5-6

Radio ..................4-29 , 4-54

Car phone or CB radio ...........4-56

FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)

changer ...................4-38

Readiness for inspection/maintenance

(I/M) test (US only) ..............9-23

Rear armrest pocket ..............2-46

Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock . .3-6

Rear power point ................2-40

Rear seats ....................1-7

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch ......................2-31

Rearview monitor ................4-19

Recorders, Event data .............9-24

Registering your vehicle in another

country ......................9-11

Remote keyless entry system .........3-14

Reporting safety defects (US only) ......9-23

Roadside assistance program .........6-2

Rollover ......................5-5

SETTING button .................4-12

STATUS button ..................4-7

Safety

Child seat belts ...............1-14

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . 9-23

Satellite radio operation ...........4-39

10-5

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

Seat adjustment

Front power seat adjustment ........1-2

Front seats ..................1-2

Seat belt(s)

Child safety .................1-14

Infants ....................1-14

Injured persons ...............1-15

Larger children ...............1-14

Pre-crash seat belts ............1-15

Precautions on seat belt usage ......1-11

Pregnant women ..............1-15

Seat belt cleaning ..............7-5

Seat belt extenders ............1-19

Seat belt maintenance ...........1-19

Seat belt warning light and chime ....2-16

Seat belts ..................1-11

Shoulder belt height adjustment .....1-18

Small children ...............1-14

Three-point type ..............1-15

Seat synchronization function ........3-30

Seat(s)

Driver-side memory ............3-29

Heated seats ................2-38

Seats .....................1-2

Security system (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer

System), Engine start .............2-28

Security system, Vehicle security system . .2-27

Selector lever, Shift lock release .......5-14

Servicing air conditioner (See automatic

climate control) .................4-23

Servicing climate control ...........4-28

Shift lock release, Transmission .......5-14

Shifting

Automatic transmission ..........5-10

Manual transmission ...........5-14

Shoulder belt height adjustment .......1-18

Snow mode switch ...............2-39

Spare tire .....................9-9

Spark plugs ...................8-17

Speedometer ...................2-5

Starting

Before starting the engine .........5-9

Precautions when starting and driving . . 5-2

Starting the engine .............5-9

Status light, Front passenger air bag . . . .1-46

Steering

Power steering fluid ............8-12

Power steering system ..........5-44

Steering lock release malfunction

indicator ..................2-21

Steering-wheel-mounted controls for

audio ....................4-54

Tilting telescopic steering column ....3-23

Storage .....................2-42

Stowing golf bags ...............2-48

Sun visors ....................3-25

Sunglasses holder ...............2-44

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . .1-52

Supplemental air bag warning light . .1-53 , 2-16

Supplemental restraint system ........1-38

Supplemental restraint system, Precautions

on supplemental restraint system ......1-38

Switch

Autolight switch ..............2-32

Fog light switch ..............2-37

Hazard warning flasher switch ......2-37

Headlight switch ..............2-32

Ignition switch automatic transmission

models ...................5-10

Ignition switch manual transmission

models ...................5-14

Power door lock switch ...........3-5

Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch ..............2-31

Snow mode switch ............2-39

Turn signal switch .............2-36

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch ...................2-39

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system . . . .5-3

TPMS, Tire pressure warning system .....6-2

Tachometer ....................2-6

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant

temperature gauge ...............2-6

Theft (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System),

Engine start ...................2-28

Thigh extension .................1-5

Three-way catalyst ................5-2

Tilting telescopic steering column ......3-23

TireTire replacement indicator ........2-23

Tire rotation ................8-38

Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warning

light .......................2-14

Tires

Flat tire ....................6-2

Low tire pressure warning system ....5-3

Spare tire ..................8-41

Tire and Loading Information label . . . 9-14

Tire and Loading information label . . . 8-32

Tire chains .................8-37

Tire dressing ................7-3

Tire pressure ................8-30

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . 5-3

Types of tires ...............8-36

10-6

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

Uniform tire quality grading .......9-21

Wheel/tire size ...............9-9

Wheels and tires .............8-30

Top tether strap child restraints .......1-23

Touch screen system ..............4-4

Towing

Flat towing .................9-21

Tow truck towing ..............6-11

Towing a trailer ..............9-21

Towing load/specification chart .....9-21

Trailer towing ..................9-21

Transceiver, HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver ...................2-56

Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-12

Driving with automatic transmission . . . 5-10

Driving with manual transmission ....5-14

Transmission selector lever lock

release ...................5-14

Transmitter (See remote keyless entry

system) .....................3-14

Traveling or registering your vehicle in another

country ......................9-11

Trip computer ..................2-24

Trip odometer ..................2-25

Trunk

Interior trunk lid release .........3-20

Trunk lid ..................3-17

Trunk lid release switch ..........3-18

Trunk net for extra window washer

fluid .....................2-49

Trunk open request switch ........3-18

Trunk release power cancel switch . . . 3-19

Trunk light ...................2-56

Trunk pass-through ...............1-11

Turn signal switch ...............2-36

Underbody cleaning ...............7-3

Uniform tire quality grading ..........9-21

Vanity mirror ..................3-28

Vanity mirror lights ...............2-55

Variable voltage control system .......8-16

Vehicle

Dimensions .................9-11

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ....6-14

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch ...................2-39

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . 5-49

Vehicle information and settings

(display) ...................4-7

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ......9-12

Vehicle loading information ..........9-17

Vehicle security system ............2-27

Ventilators ...................4-22

Voice command (See BluetoothTHands-Free

Phone System) .................4-69

Voice command (See INFINITI voice

recognition system) ..............4-78

Voice recognition system ...........4-78

Walk-in mechanism ...............1-6

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels . . .1-52

Warning light

Air bag warning light ............1-53

All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light . . . 2-12

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning

light .....................2-12

Brake warning light ............2-12

Intelligent Key warning light .......2-14

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-14

Seat belt warning light and chime ....2-16

Warning lights .................2-12

Warning, Dot matrix display ..........2-19

Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch . . .2-37

Warning, Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) ...................5-3 , 6-2

Warning, Warning/indicator lights and

audible reminders ...............2-11

Warranty, Emission control system

warranty .....................9-22

Washer switch, Windshield wiper and

washer switch .................2-29

Washing .....................7-2

Waxing ......................7-2

Wheel/tire size .................9-9

Wheels and tires ................8-30

Wheels and tires, Cleaning aluminum alloy

wheels ......................7-3

Window washer fluid ..............8-13

10-7

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

Window(s)

Automatic adjusting function .......2-52

Cleaning ...................7-3

Power windows ..............2-49

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . .2-29

Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . .2-29

Wiper blades ................8-18

Xenon headlights ................2-31

iPodTplayer operation ............4-44

10-8

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

VQ35HR engine

INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded pre-

mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least

91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research

octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Re-

search octane number 91), but you may notice

a decrease in performance.

VQ37VHR engine

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

number (Research octane number 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded

regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI

number (Research octane number 91) may be

temporarily used, but only under the following

precautions:

●Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as

possible.

●Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-

eration.

However, for maximum vehicle performance,

the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recom-

mended.

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified could

adversely affect the emission control sys-

tems, and may also affect warranty

coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a leaded

gasoline be used, since this will damage the

three way catalyst.

●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel.

Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system

components and is not covered by the

INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.

For additional information, see “CAPACITIES

AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the

“9. Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

●Engine oil with API Certification Mark

●Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section for engine oil

and oil filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For addi-

tional information, see “WHEELS AND TIRES” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES

RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of

vehicle use, follow the recommendations out-

lined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s

Manual. Follow these recommendations for the

future reliability and economy of your new

vehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION 10-9

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

1. Engine oil ( 8-9)

2. Meters and gauges ( 2-4)

3. Hood release ( 3-17)

4. Seat ( 1-2)

5. Seat belt ( 1-11)

6. Door lock ( 3-4)

7. Engine coolant ( 8-8)

8. Windshield washer fluid ( 8-13)

9. Battery ( 8-14)

10. Air conditioner ( 4-23)

Audio system ( 4-29)

11. Fuel-filler door release ( 3-21)

Fuel recommendation ( 9-2)

12. Spare tire ( 6-2)

STI0512

10-10 GAS STATION INFORMATION

w—

—

08/09/07—pattie X

2008 G37 Coupe Owner's Manual Infiniti Owners

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation